<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" xmlns:mi="http://schemas.ingestion.microsoft.com/common/" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:dcterms="http://purl.org/dc/terms/" version="2.0">
<channel>
  <title><![CDATA[Hashtag Investing]]></title>
  <description><![CDATA[The best online platform of tools for self-managing stock traders. Real-time chat and community of stock investors and a proprietary stock and strategies discovery tool. Find stocks like guru and legendary investors.]]></description>
  <language>en-us</language>
  <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/feed/msn-article-hashfeed</link>
  <lastBuildDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 12:39:46 -0400</lastBuildDate>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/nearly-half-of-calgary-businesses-would-leave-alberta-if-province-separates-chamber-poll</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Nearly Half of Calgary Businesses Would Leave Alberta if Province Separates: Chamber Poll]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 13:39:46 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/nearly-half-of-calgary-businesses-would-leave-alberta-if-province-separates-chamber-poll</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A political debate that once felt distant is beginning to influence real business decisions in Calgary. New data from the]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A political debate that once felt distant is beginning to influence real business decisions in Calgary. New data from the Calgary Chamber of Commerce shows that 48% of responding members would be very or somewhat likely to relocate their business if Alberta voted to begin a formal separation process. Another 39% said they were unlikely to leave, while 13% were unsure.</p>
<p>The finding does not mean half of all Calgary companies are preparing moving trucks. It does, however, reveal how quickly constitutional uncertainty can become an investment, hiring and expansion issue. With Alberta’s referendum set for October 19, companies are being asked to consider questions involving trade access, regulation, labour mobility and the future cost of operating in the province.</p>
<h2>The Poll’s Warning Is Hard to Ignore</h2>
<p>The headline figure came from an online poll of 137 Calgary Chamber members conducted by Probe Research between June 8 and June 22. Among respondents, 48% said they were very or somewhat likely to relocate if Alberta moved ahead with the separation process. Only 39% described themselves as unlikely to move, leaving 13% uncertain. The results also showed that 91% were closely following the referendum debate, suggesting the issue has moved well beyond the margins of political conversation for many local employers.</p>
<p>The broader responses were similarly cautious. Nearly three-quarters said they saw no tangible benefit in Alberta leaving Canada, while 80% believed separatist discussion was already harming the provincial economy. Chamber president and CEO Deborah Yedlin characterized the relocation figure as potentially devastating for Calgary. For a company owner, relocation may mean far more than changing an address: it can involve moving employees, rebuilding supplier relationships, transferring licences and persuading customers that service will continue without interruption.</p>
<h2>A Serious Signal, Not a Province-Wide Forecast</h2>
<p>The poll deserves attention, but its methodology also places clear limits on how broadly the results should be applied. Every Chamber member received a secure link, yet participation was voluntary. Probe Research described the group as a convenience sample, which means no formal margin of error can be assigned. The Chamber said respondents broadly reflected its membership by company size and that the results were not weighted. A random sample of the same size would carry a margin of error of roughly 8.1 percentage points, 19 times out of 20, but this was not a random sample.</p>
<p>That distinction matters because Chamber members are not identical to every business operating in Calgary, and owners with strong views may have been more motivated to respond. The most defensible conclusion is therefore not that 48% of all Calgary businesses will leave. It is that nearly half of this group of engaged Chamber respondents is at least considering relocation. Even with that caution, the finding is economically meaningful because uncertainty can change behaviour long before a move becomes final.</p>
<h2>Business Decisions Are Already Starting to Shift</h2>
<p>The June results suggest that some companies are not waiting for a final constitutional outcome before adjusting their plans. Nineteen per cent of respondents said they were slowing expansion within Alberta, while 15% reported actively examining relocation to another province. Sixty-three per cent said separatist discussion was negatively affecting their own business. Those answers capture the quieter side of political risk: a postponed lease, a smaller hiring plan, a delayed equipment purchase or a new office opened elsewhere rather than in Calgary.</p>
<p>An earlier Chamber release in March found that 28% of Calgary respondents said separation discourse was affecting their operations, and most of those affected described the impact as negative. The March and June exercises used different samples, so they should not be treated as a clean trend line. Still, both point in the same direction. Calgary fintech company Helcim offered a practical example when its chief financial officer said a prospective American investor was already aware of the referendum discussion and asking what separation could mean for a payments business operating across Alberta, Canada and the United States.</p>
<h2>Trade Ties Make Separation More Than a Political Question</h2>
<p>Alberta’s economy is deeply connected to customers, suppliers and workers beyond its borders. An analysis commissioned by the Calgary Chamber and prepared by University of Calgary economist Trevor Tombe estimated that about one in three Alberta workers—roughly 900,000 people—are significantly exposed to disruptions in trade with the rest of Canada or international markets. The same work estimated that interprovincial exports generated about $78 billion in income for Alberta workers and businesses in 2025, equal to roughly 16 cents of every dollar earned in the province.</p>
<p>International exports were estimated at approximately $390 billion and equivalent to another 39% of provincial income. Separation would not automatically end those relationships, but it could change the legal and administrative framework supporting them. Businesses would need clarity on customs treatment, product standards, professional credentials, transportation rules, taxes and market access. For a Calgary manufacturer buying components in Ontario or a service firm billing clients across Canada, even modest delays or added paperwork can affect prices, delivery schedules and competitiveness.</p>
<h2>The Brexit Comparison Is a Warning, Not a Replica</h2>
<p>Tombe’s analysis uses the United Kingdom’s departure from the European Union as a reference point, not as proof that Alberta would experience an identical outcome. Under a scenario in which separation increased interprovincial and international trade costs by 8%, the analysis projected Alberta’s gross domestic product per person could fall by about 6%. It also estimated roughly 175,000 fewer jobs and a $62-billion annual reduction in the provincial economy. A Brexit-scale investment shock could mean $10 billion to $15 billion in foregone investment in 2026.</p>
<p>The comparison carries weight because recent economic research has documented substantial costs in Britain. A National Bureau of Economic Research working paper estimated that, by 2025, Brexit had reduced British GDP by 6% to 8% relative to a no-Brexit path, while investment was 12% to 18% lower. Employment and productivity were each estimated to be 3% to 4% lower. Alberta is not the United Kingdom, and Canada is not the European Union. The lesson is narrower: prolonged uncertainty and higher trade friction can impose costs even before every political and legal detail is settled.</p>
<h2>A Vote Would Begin a Process, Not Create a Country Overnight</h2>
<p>The October ballot is not a direct yes-or-no vote on immediate independence. The official question asks whether Alberta should remain a province of Canada or whether the provincial government should begin the legal process required to hold a later, binding referendum on separation. In other words, a vote to proceed would open another stage of political and legal activity. It would not, by itself, remove Alberta from Confederation on October 20.</p>
<p>Canadian law also rules out unilateral provincial secession. The federal Clarity Act states that a province cannot leave Canada on its own and that secession would require a constitutional amendment negotiated with the federal government and the provinces. The Supreme Court’s Quebec Secession Reference similarly found that a clear majority on a clear question would create a duty to negotiate, not an automatic right to depart. Those negotiations could involve borders, debt, assets, Indigenous and treaty interests, citizenship, pensions, federal programs and trade arrangements. For businesses, that means the period of uncertainty could extend well beyond a single campaign.</p>
<h2>Calgary’s Diversification Momentum Could Be Exposed</h2>
<p>The warning arrives as Calgary has been building a broader identity beyond its traditional energy strengths. Calgary Economic Development, citing CBRE’s 2025 technology-talent ranking, reported that the city’s tech workforce grew 61.1% between 2021 and 2024. That added about 24,500 positions and brought the total to approximately 64,600 workers, the fastest growth rate among major North American technology markets for a second consecutive year. More recent ecosystem data valued Calgary startups at about $7 billion between July 2023 and December 2025.</p>
<p>That progress makes confidence especially important. Technology, financial-services and professional-services companies often have more flexibility than resource projects to move teams, intellectual property or future hiring to another jurisdiction. The concern is not necessarily that established firms would abandon Calgary overnight. It is that the next expansion, headquarters function or group of specialized hires could quietly go elsewhere. Helcim’s experience with an American investor shows how quickly a local political issue can enter an international due-diligence conversation. A city working to attract mobile capital and talent can be damaged by uncertainty even when its underlying advantages remain strong.</p>
<h2>Competing Cost Estimates Show How Much Remains Unknown</h2>
<p>The financial debate is already producing dramatically different numbers. Premier Danielle Smith, who has said she supports Alberta remaining in Canada, offered a rough estimate of about $400 billion in transition and startup costs, with annual costs potentially ranging from $25 billion to $50 billion. Her calculation included issues such as Alberta’s share of federal debt, defence commitments and the creation or replacement of national services. The province has commissioned a University of Calgary study and appointed an expert panel to examine the potential costs more fully.</p>
<p>Independence advocates reject that estimate. Separatist leaders have argued that startup costs could be no more than $5.7 billion and that Alberta could run surpluses after retaining taxes now collected by Ottawa. The enormous gap is a reminder that neither side has a universally accepted balance sheet. Outcomes would depend on negotiated debt and asset allocations, future tax rates, pension arrangements, federal transfers, program replacement costs and the trade terms Alberta could secure. For business owners making decisions today, the lack of settled answers may be as influential as the final numbers.</p>
<h2>October Could Shape Investment Before Any Final Decision</h2>
<p>The referendum is scheduled for October 19, and current public polling suggests supporters of beginning the separation process face an uphill battle. The Angus Reid Institute reported in late May that 60% of Albertans would vote against proceeding under the official question, compared with 35% who would vote in favour. Ipsos reported in early June that 19% intended to support holding a future binding separation vote. Different wording and field dates help explain why polling numbers vary, but both studies showed the federalist side ahead.</p>
<p>A defeat of the referendum question could reduce some uncertainty, although it would not erase the grievances that fuelled the debate. A vote to proceed would likely intensify questions about future rules, timelines and negotiations. Either way, the Chamber poll shows that companies are not treating October as a purely symbolic event. Boardrooms evaluate risk before it becomes reality, and capital often moves toward the clearest available option. Calgary’s challenge is therefore immediate: preserve confidence while the political argument unfolds, so that businesses still see Alberta as a place to invest rather than a jurisdiction to hedge against.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/05/Revitalizing-Main-Streets.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/michigan-candidate-accuses-trump-of-keeping-4-4-billion-canada-u-s-bridge-closed-to-help-major-donor</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Michigan Candidate Accuses Trump of Keeping $4.4-Billion Canada–U.S. Bridge Closed to Help Major Donor]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 12:33:06 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/michigan-candidate-accuses-trump-of-keeping-4-4-billion-canada-u-s-bridge-closed-to-help-major-donor</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A bridge built to move cars, trucks and billions of dollars in trade has become the centre of a political]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A bridge built to move cars, trucks and billions of dollars in trade has become the centre of a political accusation with unusually high stakes. Michigan state Sen. Mallory McMorrow, a Democratic candidate for the U.S. Senate, says President Donald Trump is keeping the Gordie Howe International Bridge closed to protect Matthew Moroun, whose family owns the competing Ambassador Bridge and donated $1 million to a Trump-aligned super PAC.</p>
<p>The timing has made the claim difficult to ignore: the donation came weeks before Trump threatened the project, while a planned June 12 opening ceremony was cancelled at the request of the United States. Yet the most explosive part of McMorrow’s case remains unproven. Public records establish the donation, lobbying contact and delayed opening, but they do not establish that Trump traded government action for political support.</p>
<h2>McMorrow Turns the Delay Into a Corruption Charge</h2>
<p>McMorrow’s new campaign message is deliberately blunt. Standing near the completed span, she argues that the bridge is ready, economically important and still closed because Trump refuses to let it open. She then connects that refusal to the Moroun family’s $1-million contribution to MAGA Inc., the super PAC aligned with the president. Her demand that Washington “open this damn bridge” turns a complicated binational dispute into an easy-to-understand accusation: a public project is being held back for the benefit of a wealthy private competitor.</p>
<p>The approach fits the anti-corruption theme McMorrow has emphasized in Michigan’s crowded Democratic Senate primary. She is running against U.S. Rep. Haley Stevens and former gubernatorial candidate Abdul El-Sayed, with Republican Mike Rogers positioned as the likely general-election opponent. McMorrow entered the race as an underdog and is using the bridge dispute to distinguish herself. Her campaign’s initial television and digital advertising commitment exceeded $400,000 in the Detroit market, making the allegation more than a passing comment—it is now a central campaign argument.</p>
<h2>The Ceremony Was Ready—Then Suddenly Cancelled</h2>
<p>The bridge was not waiting on another year of major construction when the political fight erupted. Invitations had already gone out for a June 12 ribbon-cutting, and traffic was expected to begin moving soon afterward. On June 11, however, the Windsor-Detroit Bridge Authority announced that Canada and the United States had agreed to postpone the opening while they worked through unspecified “outstanding issues.” Prime Minister Mark Carney later said Canada accepted the delay at the request of the Trump administration.</p>
<p>Officials have offered little detail about the actual obstacle. Carney referred to technical matters that could be resolved, while a White House official said Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick had been leading the administration’s discussions and that Michigan Gov. Gretchen Whitmer had not received a green light to proceed. The Department of Homeland Security had separately indicated it was prepared to staff the crossing. That combination—a completed bridge, planned ceremony, available border personnel and unexplained last-minute cancellation—created the vacuum in which McMorrow’s accusation gained political force.</p>
<h2>A $1-Million Donation Fuels Suspicion</h2>
<p>The financial record behind McMorrow’s claim is real and specific. Federal Election Commission filings show that Matthew Moroun gave $1 million to MAGA Inc. on January 16, 2026. Moroun is the owner of the Ambassador Bridge, the privately controlled crossing that has carried a large share of Detroit-Windsor traffic for decades. The new Gordie Howe crossing will compete for the same passenger vehicles, commercial trucks and toll revenue once it opens.</p>
<p>Trump publicly threatened the Gordie Howe project less than a month after the contribution. In his February statement, he argued that the United States was receiving too little from a bridge financed by Canada and demanded compensation, greater control and potentially at least half of the asset. The short interval between the donation and the threat does not prove an exchange, but it supplies the most memorable piece of McMorrow’s case. For many voters, a seven-figure contribution followed by government action that benefits the donor’s business is precisely the kind of sequence that invites scrutiny.</p>
<h2>The Lutnick Meeting Tightens the Timeline</h2>
<p>The sequence became more politically damaging because the donation was not the only documented connection. Moroun reportedly met Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick on February 9 to discuss the competing crossings. Lutnick then spoke with Trump, and the president issued his public threat against the Gordie Howe bridge later that day. House Oversight Committee Democrats responded by demanding communications among Moroun, Lutnick, the White House and other officials.</p>
<p>Those lawmakers described the episode as possible donor influence and asked for emails, text messages, calendar records and details of any financial or political relationships. Their inquiry established that Congress considered the matter serious enough for formal oversight, but the Democratic minority could not compel production of records without Republican cooperation. Months later, no publicly released committee finding has demonstrated what was promised, requested or agreed during the meeting. The timeline therefore remains powerful circumstantial evidence for critics, while the missing communications remain the most important gap between a suspicious pattern and a proven quid pro quo.</p>
<h2>The Accusation Is Serious, but Not Proven</h2>
<p>McMorrow’s phrasing presents motive as settled: Trump is keeping the bridge closed to help a donor. The verified public record supports a narrower conclusion. Moroun donated $1 million to a Trump-aligned group, met with a senior administration official, owns the bridge that would face new competition and stood to benefit from delay. Trump subsequently threatened the project, and the United States later requested that the June opening be postponed. Those facts justify investigation and sharp political questions.</p>
<p>They do not, on their own, prove that the contribution purchased a policy decision. The White House has said Trump’s position was guided by what it described as American interests, while MAGA Inc. said donations had no effect on government policy. No disclosed contract, message, witness account or official finding has established a direct bargain between Moroun and the administration. Responsible coverage therefore has to preserve the distinction between conflict-of-interest evidence and proof of corruption. McMorrow is making an accusation based on timing and financial interest; she is not reporting a completed criminal or congressional finding.</p>
<h2>The Rival Bridge Has an Obvious Financial Stake</h2>
<p>The business conflict is unusually direct. The Moroun family controls the Ambassador Bridge, which opened in 1929 and remains one of the most important privately owned international crossings in North America. The Gordie Howe bridge will provide a modern, publicly owned alternative with six traffic lanes, large ports of entry and direct freeway connections between Ontario’s Highway 401 and Michigan’s Interstate 75. Every truck or passenger vehicle that chooses the new route represents toll revenue that does not go to the Ambassador.</p>
<p>The family’s opposition also predates the current administration. Moroun-controlled companies pursued legal challenges against the project, fought property acquisitions and promoted alternatives that would preserve private control. In 2018, the Ambassador Bridge company even ran television advertising urging Trump to reconsider the Gordie Howe project. Courts repeatedly allowed the public bridge to proceed. This history helps explain why critics view the February lobbying and donation with suspicion: the donor’s financial interest was not theoretical or newly discovered. Still, a strong business motive explains why Moroun would lobby; it does not by itself prove that the government acted improperly.</p>
<h2>Why a Few Weeks of Delay Matter to Trade</h2>
<p>The Detroit-Windsor corridor is not an ordinary local route. The existing Ambassador Bridge handled about $126 billion in goods moved by commercial trucks in 2023, and the broader U.S.-Canada freight relationship totalled $712.8 billion in 2025. Automotive manufacturing is especially dependent on predictable border movement because parts may cross the boundary several times before a finished vehicle reaches a showroom. A delay of minutes can ripple through tightly scheduled plants, warehouses and trucking fleets.</p>
<p>The Gordie Howe bridge was designed to create redundancy as well as capacity. Its direct highway-to-highway link avoids the city-street connections that slow some existing traffic, while its border plazas provide more inspection space. A University of Windsor study estimated that the route could reduce truck crossing time by roughly 20 minutes and produce about $2.3 billion in savings over 30 years. For a driver waiting with a time-sensitive load, the politics may feel distant; the practical question is whether a completed piece of infrastructure can begin removing congestion from one of the continent’s most valuable trade gateways.</p>
<h2>Canada Paid Upfront, but the Project Is Binational</h2>
<p>Trump’s public objections focused partly on the idea that Canada would own the asset and collect its revenue while the United States received little in return. The governing structure is more complicated. Official project documents describe the bridge as publicly owned by Canada and the state of Michigan. Canada financed the construction upfront because the United States did not provide the capital, with toll revenue intended to recover those costs over the operating period.</p>
<p>The official contract value is C$6.4 billion, approximately the US$4.4-billion figure used in reports about McMorrow’s accusation. The project includes the bridge itself, Canadian and American ports of entry, and a major interchange connecting directly to I-75. Its construction also used labour, engineering and materials from both countries, and the 2012 agreement required structural iron and steel to come from Canada or the United States. Trump once supported the project, joining then-prime minister Justin Trudeau in 2017 to call for its expeditious completion. That reversal is another reason the administration’s current objections have attracted such intense scrutiny.</p>
<h2>A Bridge Fight Becomes a Michigan Election Test</h2>
<p>The dispute now gives candidates in both parties a vivid way to talk about trade, power and political influence. McMorrow portrays the closure as evidence that wealthy donors receive access and favourable treatment. Rogers, the expected Republican nominee, has also said he would work to get the bridge opened, allowing him to distance himself from the delay without directly embracing McMorrow’s allegation. Stevens has previously backed legislation intended to prevent federal interference with the crossing, while other Michigan Democrats have pressed the administration for answers.</p>
<p>For Michigan voters, the issue lands close to home. The bridge is visible, nearly ready and tied to jobs, manufacturing and daily cross-border life. It is easier to picture than an abstract debate over ethics rules or campaign finance. That makes it unusually potent in an election year: each additional week of closure supplies fresh images of empty lanes and idle inspection booths. The final political impact will depend on whether the administration resolves the dispute quickly—or whether new documents emerge that strengthen or weaken the donor-influence theory.</p>
<h2>What Happens Next</h2>
<p>The immediate outcome depends on negotiations between Ottawa and Washington, but neither government has announced a replacement opening date. Bridge officials continue to describe the delay as temporary, and Carney has argued that several additional weeks are small compared with the crossing’s expected decades of service. The lack of a firm timeline, however, ensures that every missed date will deepen pressure on both governments and give Michigan candidates more material.</p>
<p>The larger unanswered question concerns transparency. A clear technical explanation could reduce suspicion, especially if the outstanding requirements are routine and applied consistently. Disclosure of communications among Moroun, Lutnick and the White House could also establish whether the February meeting shaped policy or merely coincided with Trump’s broader trade complaints. Until either happens, two truths will coexist: McMorrow has assembled a politically compelling sequence of verified events, and she has not proved the motive asserted in her ad. The bridge may eventually open with little ceremony, but the fight over why it stayed closed could last much longer.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/09/Trump-30050.png" type="image/png" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/american-controlled-firms-now-hold-56-of-all-foreign-owned-corporate-assets-in-canada-statcan</guid>      <title><![CDATA[American-Controlled Firms Now Hold 56% of All Foreign-Owned Corporate Assets in Canada: StatCan]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 11:34:56 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/american-controlled-firms-now-hold-56-of-all-foreign-owned-corporate-assets-in-canada-statcan</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s corporate economy is overwhelmingly Canadian-controlled, yet the foreign-owned portion has a distinctly American centre of gravity. Statistics Canada’s latest]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s corporate economy is overwhelmingly Canadian-controlled, yet the foreign-owned portion has a distinctly American centre of gravity. Statistics Canada’s latest Corporations Returns Act data show that U.S.-controlled enterprises held $1.37 trillion in Canadian assets in 2023—more than every other foreign country combined. The finding matters because corporate assets represent more than balance-sheet entries: they include the factories, equipment, financial resources and intellectual property that help determine where investment, production and strategic decisions are made.</p>
<p>There is an important distinction, however. The latest all-industry U.S. share is 53.0%, not 56%. A figure near 56% applies to the narrower non-financial sector in 2022; that share rose to 57.8% in 2023. The correction changes the headline, but not the broader story: no foreign country comes close to matching the United States’ corporate footprint in Canada.</p>
<h2>What the StatCan Data Actually Show</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada counted $17.9 trillion in assets held by incorporated enterprises operating in Canada in 2023. Canadian-controlled enterprises held $15.3 trillion, or 85.6% of the total, while foreign-controlled enterprises held $2.58 trillion, or 14.4%. Within that foreign-controlled pool, U.S.-controlled firms accounted for $1.367 trillion and 53.0%. Put another way, American-controlled enterprises held roughly 7.6% of all corporate assets covered by the program—not 56% of Canada’s entire corporate economy.</p>
<p>That distinction is essential because percentages can sound much larger when their denominator is left unstated. The United Kingdom ranked a distant second with 11.1% of foreign-controlled assets, followed by Japan at 8.0%, Germany at 4.1%, and China and France at 3.6% each. Enterprises were ultimately controlled from 93 countries, yet just eight countries accounted for 87.4% of all foreign-controlled assets. The picture is therefore one of concentrated foreign ownership inside an economy that remains predominantly domestically controlled. That broader context is crucial to an accurate reading.</p>
<h2>A Smaller Foreign Share, but a Bigger U.S. Lead</h2>
<p>The overall foreign-controlled share of Canadian corporate assets has been moving downward for years. It fell from 19.6% in 2014 to 14.4% in 2023, continuing a decline that Statistics Canada says has persisted since 2007. In the latest year, assets held by Canadian-controlled enterprises grew 5.6%, almost twice the 2.9% growth recorded by foreign-controlled enterprises. That faster domestic expansion reduced the foreign share by 0.3 percentage points from 2022.</p>
<p>At the same time, the United States strengthened its position within the shrinking foreign-controlled segment. Its share rose from 52.3% in 2022 to 53.0% in 2023, while the value of U.S.-controlled assets increased by approximately $56.8 billion. This creates a seeming contradiction: Canada is becoming less foreign-controlled overall, but the foreign-controlled portion is becoming slightly more American. For policymakers and business leaders, those two trends require different responses—supporting Canadian capital formation on one hand, while reducing excessive reliance on a single foreign partner on the other.</p>
<h2>Non-Financial Canada Is More Exposed</h2>
<p>The American footprint becomes more pronounced once banks, insurers and other financial institutions are removed. Canada’s non-financial industries held $7.57 trillion in assets in 2023, and 22.9% of those assets were foreign-controlled. U.S.-controlled enterprises held $1.002 trillion, representing 57.8% of foreign-controlled non-financial assets. That was up from 56.4% in 2022—the likely source of the 56% figure in the original headline—and amounted to roughly 13.2% of all non-financial corporate assets.</p>
<p>This matters because non-financial assets are tied closely to the parts of the economy Canadians encounter every day: factories, mines, distribution networks, stores, transportation systems and business-service operations. A parent company’s location does not determine every local decision, but it can influence where new plants are built, which facilities receive upgrades, how supply chains are organized and where profits are reinvested. For a worker in an auto plant or a supplier dependent on one large customer, ownership can become highly tangible when a multinational restructures production across the border.</p>
<h2>Manufacturing and Wholesale Sit at the Centre</h2>
<p>Foreign control is especially visible in the goods supply chain. In 2023, foreign-controlled enterprises held 48.6% of assets in wholesale trade and 44.4% in manufacturing. Oil and gas extraction followed at 33.0%, while mining and quarrying stood at 31.9%. These are not small peripheral industries; they shape Canada’s exports, regional employment and access to essential equipment, vehicles, machinery and consumer goods.</p>
<p>U.S.-controlled manufacturing assets reached $333.8 billion in 2023, up from $237.4 billion in 2014. In wholesale trade, American-controlled assets nearly doubled over the same period to $195.7 billion and represented 59% of the industry’s foreign-controlled assets. American dominance was even higher within several service categories: U.S. firms held 89.2% of foreign-controlled assets in arts, entertainment and recreation, 84.3% in retail trade and 83.9% in information and cultural industries. Those figures do not mean Americans own those shares of each entire sector; they show how strongly the United States dominates the foreign-controlled portion.</p>
<h2>Finance Remains Mostly Canadian-Controlled</h2>
<p>Canada’s financial system substantially lowers the all-industry foreign-control figure. Finance and insurance enterprises held $10.33 trillion in assets in 2023, equal to 57.7% of all corporate assets measured by the program. Yet only 8.2% of financial-sector assets were foreign-controlled, down from 8.6% a year earlier. Canadian-controlled institutions held approximately $9.5 trillion, reflecting the central role of domestic banks, insurers and other financial firms.</p>
<p>The United States still ranked first among foreign controllers in finance, holding 43.1% of the sector’s foreign-controlled assets, or about $365.6 billion. However, that represented only approximately 3.5% of all financial-sector assets. The industry breakdown also varies sharply: foreign control accounted for just 4.9% of assets in depository credit intermediation, which includes major banking activities, but 44.0% in non-depository credit intermediation. A Canadian household may therefore bank with a domestically controlled institution while using credit cards, financing platforms, investment services or other financial products connected to foreign-controlled companies.</p>
<h2>The Influence Reaches Jobs, Exports and Value Added</h2>
<p>Assets show long-term economic capacity, but employment and production reveal how foreign multinationals affect daily life. In 2024, U.S. multinationals supported 1.71 million jobs in Canada, equal to 11.9% of corporate-sector employment. Retail trade accounted for 363,000 of those jobs and manufacturing for 320,200. In 2023, U.S. multinationals generated $265.8 billion in Canadian value added, or 14.5% of corporate-sector value added, with manufacturing contributing the largest amount.</p>
<p>The trade connection is equally significant. U.S. multinationals accounted for 29.3% of the value of Canada’s goods exports to the United States in 2024, led by crude oil, motor vehicles and refined petroleum products. Foreign multinationals as a whole were responsible for 56.4% of Canada’s total goods exports that year. These figures help explain why foreign ownership cannot be judged only as a loss of control. Multinationals also provide jobs, capital, export channels, technology and access to continental supply chains. The real policy challenge is preserving those benefits without allowing strategic dependence to become a vulnerability.</p>
<h2>Control Is Not the Same as Every Foreign Investment</h2>
<p>Statistics Canada’s corporate-control data are narrower than the everyday phrase “foreign ownership.” The program assigns an enterprise to its ultimate country of control and consolidates related corporations into enterprise groups. It excludes several categories, including federal and provincial government business enterprises, management companies, public administration and certain investment funds. Assets are measured at book value, which may differ substantially from market value, particularly for older resource properties or fast-growing technology businesses.</p>
<p>Foreign direct investment is a separate concept. It begins when an investor owns at least 10% of voting equity and therefore includes influential minority stakes that do not amount to corporate control. At the end of 2025, U.S. investors held $737.3 billion, or 46.1%, of Canada’s inward direct-investment stock on the standard immediate-investor basis. That differs from the 53.0% U.S. share of foreign-controlled corporate assets because the datasets measure different relationships, use different coverage and refer to different years. Treating the figures as interchangeable can produce headlines that are dramatic but statistically misleading.</p>
<h2>The Policy Question Is Resilience, Not Isolation</h2>
<p>Canada already reviews foreign investment through the Investment Canada Act. Significant acquisitions of control can face a net-benefit review, while all foreign investments are potentially subject to national-security review. During the 2024–25 fiscal year, the government conducted 30 extended national-security reviews. The framework reflects a balancing act: Canada wants outside capital, technology and employment, but it also needs safeguards around sensitive data, critical minerals, infrastructure and strategically important supply chains.</p>
<p>The relationship is not one-way. By the end of 2025, Canadian direct investment abroad stood at $2.43 trillion, well above the $1.60 trillion stock of foreign direct investment in Canada. Canadian investors held $1.20 trillion in direct investment in the United States, compared with $737.3 billion flowing the other way on the standard country basis. That does not erase concerns about who controls key Canadian industries, but it shows a deeply integrated two-way system rather than a simple economic takeover. The practical response is greater domestic investment, more diversified trade and financing partners, and clearer conditions ensuring that foreign-controlled firms continue to create jobs, innovate and reinvest in Canada.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/07/Canada-Supports-American-Culture.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawas-sweeping-bail-crackdown-becomes-law-with-more-than-80-criminal-code-changes</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa’s Sweeping Bail Crackdown Becomes Law With More Than 80 Criminal Code Changes]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 10:54:55 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawas-sweeping-bail-crackdown-becomes-law-with-more-than-80-criminal-code-changes</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A major rewrite of Canada’s bail and sentencing rules has cleared Parliament, giving courts and police a broader set of]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A major rewrite of Canada’s bail and sentencing rules has cleared Parliament, giving courts and police a broader set of tools aimed at repeat violence, organized crime, home invasions, auto theft and human trafficking. Bill C-14, formally known as the Bail and Sentencing Reform Act, received Royal Assent on June 15, 2026. Most of its bail and sentencing provisions are scheduled to take effect on July 15.</p>
<p>The scale is unusually wide. Rather than changing a single test for release, the law contains more than 80 targeted clauses touching the Criminal Code, the Youth Criminal Justice Act and the National Defence Act. Supporters describe it as a public-safety response to recurring concerns about high-risk accused people being released. Critics warn that tougher pretrial rules could deepen existing inequalities in a system where an accused person remains legally innocent until proven guilty.</p>
<h2>A Broad Package, Not a Single Bail Rule</h2>
<p>Bill C-14 was introduced on October 23, 2025, passed through the House of Commons and Senate, and became law almost eight months later. Its core Criminal Code provisions cover bail decisions, release conditions, sureties, sentencing principles, consecutive prison terms, conditional sentences, driving prohibitions and fine enforcement. The law also aligns parts of the military justice system with the new sentencing framework and makes separate changes to youth justice nationwide.</p>
<p>The timing matters. Royal Assent means Parliament has enacted the legislation, but it does not mean every change began operating immediately. Most bail and sentencing measures take effect 30 days after Royal Assent, on July 15, 2026. Several Youth Criminal Justice Act provisions will start later through an order in council. For police officers, Crown prosecutors, defence lawyers and judges, the next step is practical: updating forms, courtroom arguments and local procedures before the new rules begin shaping real bail hearings.</p>
<h2>Reverse-Onus Bail Expands to More Offences</h2>
<p>The most consequential change is the expansion of “reverse onus” bail. In an ordinary bail hearing, the prosecution generally must justify keeping an accused person in custody. A reverse onus shifts that burden, requiring the accused to show why release is justified. Bill C-14 creates new reverse-onus rules for violent or organized-crime-related vehicle theft, home break-ins, human trafficking, human smuggling, violent extortion, certain repeat violent offences, and assaults or sexual assaults involving choking, suffocation or strangulation.</p>
<p>The law also lengthens an important repeat-offender window. A reverse onus for a serious violent offence involving a weapon can now be triggered by a qualifying prior conviction from the previous 10 years, rather than five. In practical terms, a person charged today may face a much steeper path to release because of a similar conviction dating back nearly a decade. The reform does not automatically require detention, but it changes who must persuade the court and how closely a proposed bail plan will be examined.</p>
<h2>Judges Must Weigh New Risk Signals</h2>
<p>Canadian bail law recognizes three main grounds for detention: ensuring the accused attends court, protecting the public, and maintaining confidence in the administration of justice. Bill C-14 leaves those foundations in place while directing judges to consider additional signals. Courts must now examine whether the alleged offence involved random or unprovoked violence and consider the number or seriousness of outstanding charges when deciding whether release would undermine public confidence.</p>
<p>The legislation also clarifies two principles that have shaped bail hearings for years. The principle of restraint still favours release at the earliest reasonable opportunity and discourages unnecessary conditions, but the new wording emphasizes that it does not require release where detention is justified. The “ladder principle,” which normally requires courts to begin with the least restrictive form of release, does not apply to accused people who face a reverse onus. These changes are intended to provide clearer direction without eliminating individualized judicial decisions.</p>
<h2>Release Conditions and Sureties Get Tighter</h2>
<p>Bill C-14 gives courts more explicit direction on conditions for people released in higher-risk cases. For extortion and organized-crime allegations, judges must consider restrictions such as no-contact orders and geographic limits, while weapons prohibitions generally become mandatory unless the court concludes they are unnecessary for public or victim safety. For auto theft and break-and-enter cases involving a home, courts must consider measures such as curfews, geographic boundaries and bans on possessing break-in tools.</p>
<p>The law also changes who may supervise an accused person as a surety. Someone convicted of an indictable offence within the previous 10 years generally cannot serve in that role, unless no other suitable person is available and naming them would be in the interests of justice. That rule could matter in ordinary households where a parent, sibling or partner is the only realistic supervisor. Supporters see it as a safeguard against unreliable bail plans; critics argue it may make release harder for accused people with small support networks, even before guilt has been established.</p>
<h2>Sentences Can Stack Up More Quickly</h2>
<p>The law reaches well beyond the bail stage. Judges must impose consecutive sentences in certain combinations of offences, including extortion with arson and violent or organized-crime-related auto theft with break and enter. Consecutive terms are served one after another rather than at the same time. Courts must also consider consecutive sentences in specified cases involving repeat violent offenders, increasing the possibility of substantially longer total prison terms when several serious offences arise from related conduct.</p>
<p>Bill C-14 adds or expands aggravating factors for repeat violence, crimes against first responders, crimes against public transit workers, organized retail theft and offences that interfere with essential infrastructure. A previous violent conviction within five years can now weigh more heavily at sentencing in qualifying repeat-offender cases. The law also directs courts to give primary consideration to denunciation and deterrence for repeat violent auto theft, repeat home break-ins and organized-crime offences. The stated message is straightforward: repeated or coordinated offending should produce consequences beyond those imposed for an isolated incident.</p>
<h2>House Arrest, Driving Bans and Court Penalties Change</h2>
<p>Several less-publicized provisions may still have significant effects. Conditional sentences, commonly called house arrest, will no longer be available for certain serious sexual offences, including offences against children. The change does not set one automatic prison term, but it removes a community-based sentencing option that had been available when the legal requirements for a conditional sentence were otherwise met.</p>
<p>The legislation also restores a power that disappeared in 2018, allowing courts to impose driving prohibitions for manslaughter and criminal negligence causing death or bodily harm. It strengthens collection of unpaid federal fines by allowing provinces and territories to suspend licences or permits in federally prosecuted cases. One of the sharpest numerical changes concerns contempt for failing to attend or remain in court to give evidence: the former maximum of a $100 fine or 90 days in jail rises to a maximum $5,000 fine or imprisonment for up to two years less a day. These provisions show how broadly the package extends beyond headline bail disputes.</p>
<h2>Youth and Military Justice Are Also Affected</h2>
<p>The Youth Criminal Justice Act changes are narrower but important. The definition of a violent offence is expanded to clarify that it includes conduct causing bodily harm and offences involving the use or trafficking of a firearm, which broadens the circumstances in which a custodial youth sentence may be available. Police will also be permitted, in urgent cases, to publish identifying information about a young person who is at large when there is an immediate grave danger to the public.</p>
<p>Other amendments clarify that time spent unlawfully at large does not count toward the custodial portion of a youth sentence. Certain diversion and police-investigation records may be accessible to authorized people for two years, including some investigations that did not lead to a charge. These youth provisions will not necessarily start on July 15; they require a later government order. Bill C-14 also updates the National Defence Act so military sentencing rules remain aligned with comparable Criminal Code reforms, avoiding two sharply different approaches to similar conduct in civilian and military courts.</p>
<h2>Implementation and Fairness Will Decide the Outcome</h2>
<p>Ottawa writes criminal law, but provinces and territories operate much of the machinery that will determine whether the reforms work. They fund and manage police services, Crown prosecution offices, bail courts, provincial courts, remand facilities, supervision programs and victim services. A stricter legal test can have limited effect without timely hearings, reliable information about criminal histories, credible supervision plans and enough courtroom capacity to process cases fairly.</p>
<p>The law therefore requires an annual federal report on bail outcomes, compliance, reoffending, release conditions and accessibility, along with a parliamentary review beginning five years after Royal Assent. That oversight will be closely watched. A Senate committee warned that the reforms could disproportionately affect marginalized groups. Statistics Canada reported that Indigenous adults represented 33.2 per cent of the custodial population in six reporting provinces in 2023–24 while making up 4.3 per cent of the adult population there; Black adults were incarcerated at three times the rate of white adults in four reporting provinces. The crackdown’s real test will be whether it improves safety without worsening those disparities.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/Contradictory-Criminal-Justice-Record-judge.png" type="image/png" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/nearly-half-of-ontario-condos-are-now-valued-below-500000-as-housing-market-retreats-from-peak</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Nearly Half of Ontario Condos Are Now Valued Below $500,000 as Housing Market Retreats From Peak]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 10:50:36 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/nearly-half-of-ontario-condos-are-now-valued-below-500000-as-housing-market-retreats-from-peak</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Ontario’s condo market has crossed a threshold that would have seemed unlikely at the height of the housing boom. New]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ontario’s condo market has crossed a threshold that would have seemed unlikely at the height of the housing boom. New MPAC data show that 46 per cent of condominium units across the province are now valued below $500,000, nearly double the 24 per cent recorded in 2022. The shift gives some buyers more options, but it does not mean the affordability crisis has disappeared.</p>
<p>The correction has been uneven, with the largest opportunities often found outside the most expensive parts of the Greater Toronto Area. High borrowing costs, weaker investor demand and more negotiating room have all played a role. For buyers who spent years watching prices race ahead of incomes, the market now looks less frantic—but still far from cheap.</p>
<h2>The Reversal Is Real, but Far From Complete</h2>
<p>The change since 2022 is striking. At the peak, only about one-quarter of Ontario condos were valued below $500,000. By 2026, that share had risen to 46 per cent. Across all residential property types, the portion of homes below $500,000 increased from roughly 17 per cent in 2022 to nearly 24 per cent in 2026, while the share valued above $1 million fell from 35 per cent to about 25 per cent.</p>
<p>That is a meaningful retreat, but the longer view is less comforting. In 2016, approximately 67 per cent of Ontario homes were valued below $500,000. A decade later, fewer than one in four remain in that range. The market has moved away from its most extreme pandemic-era valuations, yet it has not returned to the affordability conditions that existed before prices accelerated.</p>
<h2>Condos Took the Brunt of the Correction</h2>
<p>Condominiums have weakened faster than most other housing types because they were especially exposed to investors, higher financing costs and a large wave of completed supply. In the Greater Toronto Area, the average condo apartment sold for $618,484 in the first quarter of 2026, down 9.1 per cent from a year earlier. Sales declined 11.3 per cent, while active listings remained elevated at 6,688 units.</p>
<p>That combination gave buyers something that had been scarce during the boom: time and leverage. A unit that might once have attracted immediate interest can now face competition from similar listings in the same building or neighbourhood. Sellers may need to accept financing and inspection conditions, negotiate on price or address concerns about fees and building finances. The province-wide MPAC figures reflect this broader reset, even though individual cities and buildings continue to perform differently.</p>
<h2>A $500,000 Price Tag Does Not Make Ontario Affordable Again</h2>
<p>The headline number can sound more optimistic than the underlying reality. A $500,000 condo still requires a minimum down payment of $25,000 under federal rules, and a purchaser putting down less than 20 per cent will typically require mortgage loan insurance. Legal expenses, land transfer tax, moving costs and other closing expenses create additional pressure before monthly ownership costs even begin.</p>
<p>The comparison with other housing types shows how narrow the affordable segment remains. MPAC reports that only five per cent of townhouses, 15 per cent of semi-detached homes and 18 per cent of detached homes are valued below $500,000. For households that need another bedroom, private outdoor space or room for a growing family, the condo market may be the only ownership category offering meaningful choice near that price.</p>
<h2>Geography Determines What the Threshold Actually Buys</h2>
<p>Ontario’s provincial average hides enormous regional differences. MPAC’s 2026 data show that 44 per cent of homes in London and 55 per cent in Belleville were valued below $500,000. The comparable shares were 26 per cent in Brantford, 21 per cent in Kitchener, 17 per cent in Hamilton and 10 per cent in Guelph. In Chatham-Kent, nearly three-quarters of homes remained below the threshold.</p>
<p>Those differences can completely reshape a buyer’s options. A $500,000 budget might mean a compact apartment in a high-cost urban market, a larger condo townhouse in a mid-sized city or, in parts of southwestern and eastern Ontario, a selection of ground-oriented homes. The trade-off is often distance from major employment centres, relatives, established communities and rapid transit. Lower prices can widen the search map, but they do not erase the financial and personal costs of relocating.</p>
<h2>The GTA Is Cooling Without Becoming Cheap</h2>
<p>The Greater Toronto Area has pulled back from its 2022 peak, but it remains the province’s most difficult ownership market. MPAC reports that every GTA municipality except Oshawa still has a median home value above $750,000. Even after substantial declines at the high end, Oakville and Richmond Hill continue to contain some of Ontario’s largest concentrations of expensive properties.</p>
<p>Condo buyers have received more relief than buyers seeking detached houses. In the first quarter of 2026, the average condo apartment price was $649,330 in the City of Toronto, compared with $618,484 across the GTA. Both averages remain above the $500,000 line, meaning many options below that threshold may involve compromises involving size, building age or location. The region is less expensive than it was at the peak, but desirable neighbourhoods and well-managed buildings still command significant premiums.</p>
<h2>More Inventory Shifted Power Toward Buyers</h2>
<p>A softer market is not defined only by falling prices. It also changes the rhythm of a transaction. In early 2026, GTA condo sales were lower than a year earlier while available inventory stayed high, allowing buyers to compare more properties and negotiate more aggressively. This is a sharp contrast with the periods when limited supply pushed purchasers toward rushed decisions and offers with few protections.</p>
<p>By May 2026, the broader GTA market was beginning to tighten, with sales rising 6.3 per cent year over year and new listings falling 18.9 per cent. Even so, the benchmark home price remained 6.7 per cent below May 2025. The mixed signals suggest that the deepest stage of the correction may be passing, but buyers have not lost all their leverage. Conditions can also vary dramatically between neighbourhoods and even between buildings on the same street.</p>
<h2>Lower Interest Rates Help, but Qualification Still Matters</h2>
<p>Borrowing conditions have improved from the most punishing stage of the interest-rate cycle. The Bank of Canada’s policy rate stood at 2.25 per cent following its June 10, 2026 decision. Lower rates can reduce payments on some variable-rate borrowing and influence the mortgage rates offered by lenders, giving certain households more room in their budgets than they had when financing costs were higher.</p>
<p>Still, a lower purchase price and policy rate do not guarantee mortgage approval. Lenders examine income, existing debts, credit history, the down payment and the borrower’s ability to withstand a higher qualifying rate. Property taxes and part of a unit’s monthly condo fees are included in standard housing-cost calculations. A buyer who finds a condo below $500,000 may therefore discover that elevated maintenance fees reduce borrowing capacity as much as a more expensive mortgage would.</p>
<h2>The Monthly Cost Can Matter More Than the Sticker Price</h2>
<p>Condo ownership comes with expenses that are easy to overlook when attention is fixed on the purchase price. Monthly common expenses help pay for elevators, garages, hallways, insurance, landscaping and amenities, while a portion is directed to the corporation’s reserve fund. Two similarly priced units can therefore carry very different ownership costs depending on the building’s age, services, size and financial condition.</p>
<p>Ontario’s Condominium Authority advises resale buyers to review the status certificate with legal counsel. The document can include the corporation’s budget, audited statements, reserve fund information, fee increases, special assessments, litigation and arrears connected to the unit. A discounted condo in a poorly funded building can become expensive if major repairs are approaching. In a softer market, careful due diligence may ultimately be more valuable than negotiating another few thousand dollars off the purchase price.</p>
<h2>First-Time Buyers Have More Openings, but Also More Trade-Offs</h2>
<p>Condos have long served as an entry point into ownership. Statistics Canada found that 16.5 per cent of Ontario first-time buyers purchased a condominium in 2020. The renewed availability of units below $500,000 could make that route more realistic again, particularly for single purchasers and couples who cannot qualify for a townhouse or detached property.</p>
<p>However, MPAC cautions that lower-priced condos may not match buyer preferences for size, bedroom count or location. A first-time purchaser may gain the stability of ownership but sacrifice space, accept a longer commute or choose an older building with higher maintenance costs. The practical question is not simply whether the unit is affordable at closing, but whether it can remain suitable for several years. Selling again quickly can produce legal, moving and mortgage-related costs that absorb much of the equity accumulated.</p>
<h2>Investor Retreat Helped Push the Market Down</h2>
<p>The condo downturn is closely connected to a sharp loss of investor demand. CMHC reported that Toronto condo sales across the resale, new and pre-construction segments had fallen 75 per cent by the first quarter of 2025 compared with their earlier level. Average Toronto resale condo prices declined 13.4 per cent between 2022 and early 2025, while investor carrying costs increased faster than rents.</p>
<p>Pre-construction conditions became especially difficult. Fifty-five per cent of Toronto pre-construction units were unsold in the first quarter of 2025, and the available inventory represented roughly 58 months of supply at the prevailing sales pace. Investors who once expected rapid appreciation became more cautious as financing costs rose and cash flow weakened. That pullback reduced demand, increased competition among sellers and contributed to the lower valuations now visible throughout Ontario’s condominium data.</p>
<h2>Today’s Relief Could Create Tomorrow’s Supply Problem</h2>
<p>Falling condo values can help purchasers in the short term, but the same forces are discouraging construction. CMHC expects condominium starts to be particularly weak in Toronto, where pre-construction sales fell to multi-decade lows in 2025. Projects have been delayed or cancelled because developers generally need to sell a substantial portion of their units before lenders will release construction financing.</p>
<p>This creates a difficult cycle. More inventory and weaker demand can lower prices today, but fewer project launches may produce a shortage of new ownership housing several years later. CMHC expects overall Ontario housing starts to fall near two-decade lows in 2026, with purpose-built rentals providing much of the new construction. Buyers may enjoy better selection in the resale market now, while future purchasers could face a much thinner pipeline once recently completed units and existing listings are absorbed.</p>
<h2>The Next Phase May Be Stabilization, Not Another Boom</h2>
<p>Recent data suggest that the market may be shifting from a rapid correction toward a more balanced phase. Canadian home sales rose 5.5 per cent from April to May 2026, with Ontario accounting for a disproportionate share of the increase. National prices were close to flat month over month, while the GTA recorded stronger spring sales and fewer new listings than it had one year earlier.</p>
<p>That does not automatically signal another price surge. Affordability remains strained, condo inventory is still substantial and economic uncertainty can keep potential purchasers cautious. The near-term market may reward well-priced units in financially healthy buildings while flawed or overpriced listings continue to sit. Nearly half of Ontario condos falling below $500,000 represents a major change from 2022, but the next chapter will depend on employment, interest rates, inventory and whether demand returns without reigniting speculation.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/Condo-apartment-Vancouver-BC-Canada.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-awards-mda-688-million-contract-for-new-canadian-surveillance-satellite</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa Awards MDA $688-Million Contract for New Canadian Surveillance Satellite]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 10:28:02 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-awards-mda-688-million-contract-for-new-canadian-surveillance-satellite</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A new Canadian eye in orbit is moving from plan to procurement. Ottawa has awarded MDA Space a $688-million contract]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A new Canadian eye in orbit is moving from plan to procurement. Ottawa has awarded MDA Space a $688-million contract to deliver an advanced radar-imaging satellite that will join the country’s existing RADARSAT Constellation Mission. The spacecraft is intended to protect continuity in a system that quietly supports everything from Arctic navigation and ship detection to flood response, crop mapping and environmental monitoring. The agreement reaches well beyond the satellite itself: it covers design, construction, testing, launch, commissioning and upgrades to the ground systems that control and secure the mission’s data. For Canada, the investment is both practical and strategic. It keeps a critical national capability under Canadian control while giving MDA a major domestic project rooted in technology developed through decades of RADARSAT work.</p>
<h2>A $688-Million Contract With a Broad Mandate</h2>
<p>The new agreement puts MDA Space in charge of supplying an advanced synthetic aperture radar satellite for the Canadian Space Agency. MDA is expected to design, build, test, launch and commission the spacecraft, which will operate alongside the three satellites already forming the RADARSAT Constellation Mission. The work also includes improvements to satellite ground control, security and data-management systems. That wider scope matters because an Earth-observation mission is not simply a piece of hardware in orbit; it also depends on protected communications, reliable command systems and the ability to receive, process and distribute enormous volumes of imagery.</p>
<p>The award follows a $44.7-million contract announced in December 2025 for specialized, long-lead components. That earlier step allowed procurement to begin before the full mission contract was finalized. MDA says the $688-million award will be added to its backlog in the second quarter of fiscal 2026. The satellite will be assembled, integrated and tested at the company’s Montreal facility, keeping the core production work in Canada.</p>
<h2>Why Canada Is Adding Another RADARSAT Satellite</h2>
<p>Canada’s current RADARSAT constellation was launched on June 12, 2019, and became operational in January 2020. Its three identical spacecraft were designed with seven-year mission lifetimes, making continuity planning increasingly important as the system moves deeper into its operational life. Ottawa has described the new spacecraft as a replenishment satellite: an additional unit intended to preserve access to radar data rather than replace the entire constellation at once. That approach reduces the risk of a sudden service gap while a more ambitious successor system is still being studied.</p>
<p>The need is easy to underestimate because the satellites usually work far from public view. Yet federal departments and agencies use roughly 250,000 RADARSAT Constellation images a year—about 50 times the volume used during the RADARSAT-1 era. The system provides average daily coverage of Canada’s maritime approaches, frequent imaging of the land mass and daily access to about 90 per cent of Earth’s surface. Adding another satellite is therefore less like buying a spare camera and more like maintaining a national information utility used across government.</p>
<h2>Radar Imaging Works When Ordinary Cameras Cannot</h2>
<p>The satellite’s central tool will be synthetic aperture radar, commonly known as SAR. Unlike an optical camera, SAR actively sends microwave signals toward Earth and measures the energy reflected back. Because it supplies its own signal, it can collect imagery during daylight or darkness. The wavelengths can also pass through clouds and haze, allowing observations during weather conditions that would block a conventional space-based camera. In a country where northern darkness, coastal fog and fast-changing weather are routine, that capability turns radar imagery into an operational service rather than a fair-weather option.</p>
<p>Canada’s RADARSAT systems use C-band radar, a field in which the domestic space sector has built decades of experience. Different imaging modes can trade detail for coverage depending on the task. A wide swath can scan large ocean areas for vessels or ice, while higher-resolution modes can examine smaller locations during an emergency. The new satellite will be based on MDA CHORUS technology, the company’s fourth generation of Earth-observation capability, allowing Ottawa to draw on a newer commercial platform while maintaining a sovereign Canadian mission.</p>
<h2>The Arctic and Canada’s Coastlines Are Central to the Mission</h2>
<p>The geography explains much of the investment. Canada has an enormous land mass, three ocean coastlines and maritime approaches that are difficult and expensive to watch using ships or aircraft alone. The existing constellation can revisit Canada’s far north as often as four times a day and make several passes over the Northwest Passage. Radar imagery helps the Canadian Ice Service produce ice information that the Coast Guard can turn into routing guidance for mariners. For a crew moving supplies toward a northern community, better ice awareness can shape both safety and timing.</p>
<p>The same imagery supports surveillance. RADARSAT spacecraft carry Automatic Identification System receivers, allowing radar detections to be compared with identification signals broadcast by ships. When a vessel appears in an image without a matching signal, authorities may have found a “dark ship” that has stopped transmitting or cannot otherwise be identified. Fisheries officers and defence users can then focus limited patrol resources on suspicious areas. This does not replace aircraft, ships or human judgment; it gives them a much larger and more timely picture of activity at sea.</p>
<h2>Disaster Response Is One of the Most Immediate Benefits</h2>
<p>During a flood, wildfire or major storm, responders often need a reliable picture of conditions before roads are passable or aircraft can safely survey the area. Radar satellites can collect imagery despite cloud cover and darkness, helping officials map water, identify damaged zones and compare changing conditions over time. Natural Resources Canada uses satellite data to support emergency mapping for wildfires, ice breakup and floods, while Public Safety Canada coordinates access to Earth-observation information during major emergencies. High-resolution RADARSAT modes were designed in part for this kind of work.</p>
<p>The human value appears in ordinary decisions made under pressure. A flood map can help identify which communities, roads or infrastructure corridors may require urgent attention. Repeated images can show whether water is advancing or receding, giving emergency managers evidence that complements reports from the ground. The mission also supports longer-term risk reduction, because regular observations can reveal coastal erosion, land movement and other changes before they become crises. The replenishment satellite is therefore not only about observing disasters from space; it is about preserving a dependable flow of information for people responding below.</p>
<h2>The Data Reaches Farms, Forests and Protected Areas</h2>
<p>RADARSAT’s role extends far beyond security and emergencies. Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada combines satellite observations with other information to create annual crop inventories, helping researchers and producers understand the extent and condition of agricultural land. Radar-derived soil-moisture information can contribute to weather forecasting, runoff estimates and flood modelling. Natural Resources Canada uses Earth-observation data to map and monitor vegetation, water, snow, ice and infrastructure, while Parks Canada applies satellite information to land-cover mapping, glacier monitoring and conservation work.</p>
<p>These applications benefit from repetition. One image provides a snapshot; a sequence collected over weeks, seasons or years can reveal change. Farmers can see broad patterns across large growing regions, forest managers can monitor disturbances, and coastal specialists can track erosion. Radar is particularly useful when persistent cloud cover would otherwise create gaps in an optical record. The new satellite is meant to protect that continuity, ensuring that agencies do not lose a long-running stream of comparable observations. Its value will often be measured not by a dramatic single picture, but by the reliability of thousands of images accumulated over time.</p>
<h2>Sovereign Data Has Become a Strategic Asset</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s repeated use of the word “sovereign” is significant. Owning and operating a national Earth-observation capability gives Canada more control over what is imaged, when it is collected, how quickly it is delivered and how sensitive information is protected. More than a dozen federal departments and agencies use RADARSAT data, including National Defence, Fisheries and Oceans, Environment and Climate Change Canada, Natural Resources Canada and Public Safety Canada. Defence users rely on the imagery for Arctic surveillance, maritime awareness, intelligence and support to operations.</p>
<p>Commercial and allied satellite data can add valuable coverage, but it may not always provide the priority access, security arrangements or tasking flexibility required during an emergency or security event. A Canadian-controlled satellite helps preserve those options. The contract’s ground-system and security upgrades are consequently as important as the spacecraft itself, because control over data depends on the full chain from tasking to downlink, processing, storage and distribution. In practical terms, sovereignty here is not an abstract claim over space; it is the ability to obtain trusted information about Canadian territory and approaches when national authorities need it.</p>
<h2>The Contract Fits Into a Much Larger RADARSAT+ Plan</h2>
<p>The $688-million award is one part of Ottawa’s $1.012-billion RADARSAT+ investment, announced as a 15-year effort to protect immediate services while preparing for future needs. The portfolio has two distinct tracks. The replenishment satellite will strengthen the current constellation, while a separate initiative is defining the next generation of Canada’s sovereign radar-satellite system. In late 2025, C-CORE, Kepler Communications and MDA received study contracts for possible space-segment concepts. In June 2026, Calian, Kepler and MDA were selected for ground-segment concept work.</p>
<p>That distinction prevents the latest contract from being overstated. The new MDA satellite is a major modernization step, but it is not necessarily the final architecture that will succeed today’s RADARSAT constellation. Ottawa is also examining how commercial imagery, international partnerships and open-access data can complement national satellites. Important details about the replenishment mission—including its target launch date and final operating schedule—were not disclosed in the contract announcement. What is clear is the direction: Canada is spending now to avoid a capability gap while designing a broader system for the decades ahead.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/MDA-Space.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/57-of-newcomers-regret-mortgage-size-as-two-thirds-brace-for-higher-renewals</guid>      <title><![CDATA[57% of Newcomers Regret Mortgage Size as Two-Thirds Brace for Higher Renewals]]></title>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 26 10:25:50 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/57-of-newcomers-regret-mortgage-size-as-two-thirds-brace-for-higher-renewals</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <description><![CDATA[For many newcomers, buying a home has represented permanence, security and proof that years of saving have paid off. Yet]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For many newcomers, buying a home has represented permanence, security and proof that years of saving have paid off. Yet the mortgage attached to that milestone is becoming a source of second thoughts. New national research finds that 57% of people identified as new to Canada regret the size of mortgage they accepted, while 68% are anxious about renewing at a higher interest rate.</p>
<p>The concern is not simply that rates may rise. It is that many households have little room left in their monthly budgets after housing, food, transportation and other essentials. With a major renewal cycle still moving through Canada, the gap between owning a home and comfortably carrying it is becoming harder to ignore.</p>
<h2>Mortgage Regret Is Much Higher Among Newcomers</h2>
<p>Mortgage regret is not evenly distributed across Canadian homeowners. Mortgage Professionals Canada found that 57% of respondents who were new to Canada regretted the size of mortgage they had taken on. Among first-time buyers who entered the market within the past five years, the comparable figure was 37%. That 20-point gap suggests that the financial experience of ownership can differ sharply even among people who bought relatively recently.</p>
<p>The finding does not mean most newcomers regret becoming homeowners. It points more specifically to the debt required to make ownership possible. A family may still value the stability of its home while wishing it had purchased a smaller property, made a larger down payment or preserved more room for unexpected expenses. The research, conducted online among nearly 2,000 Canadians in February 2026, captures that tension: the home can remain meaningful even when the mortgage begins to feel uncomfortably large today.</p>
<h2>Renewal Anxiety Is Becoming the Immediate Test</h2>
<p>One-third of Canadian mortgage holders expect to renew within the next 12 months, and 67% of that group are anxious about facing a higher interest rate. Among newcomers, the share rises slightly to 68%. Those numbers turn renewal from a routine piece of paperwork into a major household financial event, especially for borrowers whose original term was arranged when borrowing costs were lower.</p>
<p>Bank of Canada analysis has projected that about 60% of mortgage holders renewing in 2025 and 2026 would see their payments increase. The average change varies substantially by mortgage type. Five-year fixed-rate borrowers renewing in 2026 were projected to face an average payment increase of roughly 20% compared with their December 2024 payments. That does not describe every household, but it helps explain why even borrowers who have never missed a payment may be uneasy. A renewal can preserve the same home and outstanding balance while still producing a noticeably different monthly obligation.</p>
<h2>A 15% Payment Increase Could Break Many Budgets</h2>
<p>The most troubling figures concern how little payment flexibility some households have left. Across mortgage holders, 6% said they were already struggling with payments, while another 44% said they would encounter difficulty before their payments rose by 15%. Among newcomers, 67% were either already struggling or expected to struggle before reaching that threshold. The issue is therefore not only the direction of rates, but the size of the household cushion available to absorb change.</p>
<p>A 15% increase on a $2,500 monthly mortgage payment equals another $375 every month, or $4,500 a year. That money may have to come from savings, retirement contributions, children’s activities, travel or everyday discretionary spending. For a household already managing higher grocery, insurance and maintenance costs, the adjustment can feel larger than the percentage suggests. It also explains why mortgage regret can emerge years after a purchase: the original payment may have been manageable, while the renewed payment collides with a much tighter cost-of-living reality.</p>
<h2>Pandemic-Era Borrowers Face the Sharpest Reset</h2>
<p>The current renewal wave is largely a delayed consequence of Canada’s mortgage structure. Many borrowers who secured five-year fixed terms during the low-rate period are only now moving onto new contracts. Five-year fixed mortgages account for about 40% of outstanding mortgages, and the Bank of Canada estimated that roughly three-quarters of borrowers facing payment increases through 2026 held that type of loan.</p>
<p>CMHC reported in February 2026 that more than 1.5 million households had already renewed at higher rates, with another one million expected to sign new terms over the coming year. For many families, the impact has shown up not as immediate default but as reduced saving and less discretionary spending. A newcomer household that bought near the top of its approved budget may be especially exposed because there is less room to trim the mortgage itself. The contract resets quickly; household income, child-care costs and other obligations may not adjust nearly as fast.</p>
<h2>Newcomers Often Enter Ownership With Larger Debt Loads</h2>
<p>Recent Statistics Canada research helps explain why mortgage-size regret may be elevated among newcomers. It found that recent immigrant first-time buyers generally earned less but purchased more expensive homes than Canadian-born first-time buyers in the provinces examined. In British Columbia, for example, the median purchase price was $660,000 for recent immigrant buyers and $580,000 for Canadian-born buyers, while median family incomes were $125,000 and $135,000, respectively.</p>
<p>The debt differences can persist after the purchase. Among mortgaged homeowner households headed by someone younger than 35, average outstanding mortgage debt in 2023 was estimated at $450,000 for recent immigrant households and $265,000 for comparable Canadian-born households. Statistics Canada also found that recent immigrant buyers were less likely to contribute to an RRSP in the year of purchase. Together, those findings suggest that some households are concentrating a larger share of their financial lives in one asset: the family home. That can build equity, but it also leaves fewer buffers when payments rise.</p>
<h2>Homeownership Still Carries Powerful Appeal</h2>
<p>Financial pressure has not erased the belief that homeownership is worthwhile. Mortgage Professionals Canada found that 76% of Canadians viewed real estate as a good long-term investment and 74% classified mortgages as “good debt.” Among people new to Canada, 79% described mortgage debt positively, the highest share among the groups highlighted in the research. Regret about mortgage size therefore coexists with strong faith in the underlying asset.</p>
<p>That apparent contradiction makes more sense when homeownership is viewed as more than a monthly calculation. A home can offer stability, space for extended family and a sense of having established roots. Statistics Canada has also found that ownership rates rise quickly with time in Canada. In Ontario, the homeownership rate among recent immigrants in their fifth year after admission reached 40.2% in 2021, up from 35.7% for the comparable group in 2018. The aspiration remains resilient; the growing concern is whether the financing required to reach it is sustainable.</p>
<h2>Rental Income Is Becoming Part of the Mortgage Plan</h2>
<p>More homeowners are treating part of their property as an income-producing asset rather than relying only on wages to carry the mortgage. More than one-third of Canadians in the MPC research said they needed to rent out part of their home to afford ownership, up from 25% in 2021. Among first-time buyers from the past five years, 29% had rented or planned to rent part of the property. Among newcomers, the share reached 53%.</p>
<p>That can mean a basement apartment, a room rented to a student or a multigenerational arrangement in which relatives contribute to household costs. The extra income can soften a renewal shock, but it can also turn a family home into a small business with vacancy, maintenance and privacy considerations. The trend shows how affordability is changing the meaning of ownership. For a growing number of households, qualifying for a mortgage is only the first step; keeping the home affordable may depend on the property continuously generating cash.</p>
<h2>Shopping the Renewal Could Make a Difference</h2>
<p>Borrowers approaching renewal have more ability to compare lenders than they did several years ago. Federal changes removed the mortgage stress-test requirement for insured borrowers switching lenders at renewal and, beginning in November 2024, for uninsured borrowers making a straight switch between federally regulated lenders. The relief generally applies when the loan amount and remaining amortization are not increased, so it does not turn every refinance into a simple transfer.</p>
<p>The practical importance is competition. A borrower who can move without requalifying under the minimum qualifying rate may have a better chance of negotiating rather than accepting the first renewal offer. Rate is only one part of that comparison; term length, fixed-versus-variable structure, prepayment privileges and the total cost of extending an amortization can also change the outcome. For a newcomer unfamiliar with Canadian renewal practices, starting the review well before the deadline can reduce the risk of making another major borrowing decision under time pressure.</p>
<h2>The Risk Is Serious, but Not Yet a Systemwide Crisis</h2>
<p>Anxiety and regret should not be confused with widespread mortgage failure. CMHC found that the national mortgage arrears rate increased by seven basis points between the third quarter of 2023 and the third quarter of 2025, yet remained historically low. The pressure is also uneven. Toronto and Vancouver have shown greater vulnerability because of high debt loads, expensive housing and weaker resale conditions, while several other major markets have experienced more moderate changes.</p>
<p>That distinction matters. The new figures reveal financial fragility, particularly among newcomers and recent buyers, but they do not show that most of those households are defaulting. Many are coping by cutting spending, drawing on savings, adding rental income or restructuring their mortgages. The larger warning is about resilience: a household can remain current while becoming increasingly exposed to job loss, repairs or another unexpected expense. The renewal wave is testing not only whether Canadians can make their payments, but how much financial life remains after the payment is made.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Mortgage-Renewal.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="667">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/corporate-ties-forced-carney-to-sit-out-at-least-17-government-decisions</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Corporate Ties Forced Carney to Sit Out at Least 17 Government Decisions]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 23:44:36 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/corporate-ties-forced-carney-to-sit-out-at-least-17-government-decisions</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Prime ministers are expected to sit at the centre of the country’s most consequential choices. Yet Mark Carney’s move from]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Prime ministers are expected to sit at the centre of the country’s most consequential choices. Yet Mark Carney’s move from global finance into public office created an unusual counterweight: an ethics system designed to keep certain files away from him. Records reported by the Toronto Star indicate that corporate connections have kept Carney out of at least 17 government deliberations.</p>
<p>The number is politically potent, but it is not proof of misconduct. Recusals and conflict screens exist to prevent wrongdoing before it occurs. What makes this case significant is the scale of the safeguard, the limited detail available about the affected files and the tension between a prime minister’s sweeping responsibilities and a screen covering 103 named entities tied mainly to Brookfield, along with Stripe. The result is both evidence that preventive controls are operating and a test of whether Canada’s ethics regime offers enough transparency.</p>
<h2>The Figure That Changed the Debate</h2>
<p>The latest disclosure shifts the discussion from hypothetical risk to documented government practice. According to reporting based on letters from the Privy Council Office, Carney was kept out of at least 17 deliberations because the conflict screen applied. A May 2026 parliamentary transcript also records that the screen had been “triggered 17 times” by then. That language matters. Earlier testimony distinguished between an assessment being opened and the screen ultimately being applied, so the public record does not always use “triggered,” “invoked” and “applied” with perfect consistency.</p>
<p>What can be said with confidence is that potential conflicts were not merely listed on paper. They repeatedly changed how government business moved through the system. At the same time, the full subject matter of all 17 deliberations has not been publicly identified. That leaves two competing impressions: the safeguard appears active, but outsiders cannot independently assess every judgment behind it. The number therefore tells Canadians how often the mechanism affected Carney’s access, while revealing far less about the importance, financial stakes or policy consequences of the files themselves.</p>
<h2>A Screen Built to Act Before Carney Does</h2>
<p>Carney’s arrangement is designed to intervene before a conflicted matter reaches him. When a department or agency prepares a note, policy proposal, update or other document for the prime minister, officials assess whether it could engage the screen. Governance specialists conduct due diligence, and recommendations move to the two administrators responsible for the final determination. When the answer is positive, the material is marked accordingly and is neither shown to nor discussed with Carney.</p>
<p>That is why describing each episode simply as a last-minute recusal can be misleading. In many cases, the system aims to ensure that Carney never enters the discussion at all. The Ethics Commissioner has explained that the matter can instead go to another minister, with the prime minister informed only after the decision takes effect and becomes public. Imagine a Cabinet file changing direction before it reaches the corner office: no dramatic walkout, no vote recorded beside the prime minister’s name, just a controlled diversion meant to remove both influence and opportunity.</p>
<h2>Why Sitting Out Means More Than Abstaining</h2>
<p>Under federal ethics guidance, recusal is broader than declining to vote. A public office holder must remove themselves from the discussion, decision, debate and related work when there is an opportunity to advance a private interest or improperly advance someone else’s. The Ethics Commissioner emphasizes that mere presence can influence colleagues, which is why abstention alone may not be enough. In practical terms, “sitting out” means having nothing to do with the affected matter.</p>
<p>For a prime minister, that standard carries unusual weight. The office is not simply one vote around a table; it shapes agendas, convenes ministers, receives confidential advice and signals the government’s priorities. Preventing a document from reaching Carney can therefore matter as much as preventing him from signing a final decision. It also explains why secrecy is built into the process. If he were told that a sensitive commercial or tax file had been screened out while it remained active, that knowledge could itself undermine the barrier the system was created to maintain.</p>
<h2>The Original Baseline Was Thirteen Reviews</h2>
<p>Before the total reached at least 17 affected deliberations, parliamentary testimony offered a smaller but more detailed snapshot. Clerk of the Privy Council Michael Sabia told the ethics committee that 13 cases had been examined in relation to Carney’s screen. The Conflict of Interest and Ethics Commissioner was consulted in all 13. Administrators concluded that the screen did not apply in seven cases and did apply in six, establishing the first public numerical baseline for how frequently potential conflicts were being tested.</p>
<p>That breakdown is important because it shows the assessment process does not automatically remove Carney whenever a screened company or sector appears in the background. Officials make a case-by-case determination about whether the connection is sufficiently direct or material. Seven files passed through the review without the screen being imposed, while six were diverted. The later rise in the count demonstrates that the workload continued, but the earlier figures remain the clearest public window into both outcomes: the occasions when officials closed the gate and the occasions when they decided it could safely remain open.</p>
<h2>Six Early Files Were Diverted</h2>
<p>In the six early cases where the screen applied, Carney could not be informed about the matters before the final decisions became public. That restriction was not symbolic. It prevented him from receiving the underlying advice, taking part in deliberations or attempting to shape the result. Officials described the screen as precautionary, meaning it could be imposed while questions were still being resolved rather than waiting until a conflict had been conclusively established.</p>
<p>The approach reflects a preventive philosophy: the safest way to manage a possible conflict is often to remove the opportunity before influence occurs. It also makes the public record harder to interpret in real time. Canadians may see a government announcement without knowing that the prime minister was excluded from the internal work that produced it. Only later, through periodic reporting or committee scrutiny, might the existence of the screen become known. The six early applications therefore demonstrated both the mechanism’s practical force and the transparency problem that would grow as the tally increased.</p>
<h2>Two Known Matters Involved Tax Changes</h2>
<p>Of the six early applications, two were publicly described as changes to Canada’s tax system. Carney was not involved in those matters. The available parliamentary record did not disclose the precise measures, affected taxpayers or departments leading the decisions, which limits any attempt to connect the exclusions to a particular budget promise or corporate benefit. Still, the category is revealing because tax policy can alter the value of companies, investments and entire sectors at once.</p>
<p>Tax files also illustrate why conflict analysis becomes difficult at the top of government. A measure can be broad enough to affect millions of Canadians while still having a disproportionate effect on a company tied to a public office holder. The screen must separate ordinary policy of general application from decisions that create a more specific private-interest risk. In these two cases, administrators determined that Carney should remain outside the process. The result offered a concrete example of the safeguard operating in an area central to economic governance, even as key details remained protected.</p>
<h2>Four Early Cases Stayed Confidential</h2>
<p>Four of the six early screen applications were still pending when Sabia testified, so officials declined to identify them publicly. That confidentiality was not presented as a permanent exemption from scrutiny. The logic was that revealing an active file could alert Carney to a matter he was deliberately being prevented from knowing, disclose Cabinet deliberations or expose commercially sensitive information before a decision was complete.</p>
<p>The trade-off is easy to understand and difficult to police. A screen works best when the person being screened does not know what has been withheld, but democratic oversight works best when the public can see what decisions were made and why. Those goals pull in opposite directions until a file is finalized. The committee later pressed for periodic reporting after decisions become public, attempting to preserve the barrier during deliberations while creating a record afterward. The four confidential cases became an early demonstration of why timing, not only disclosure, is central to the credibility of the arrangement.</p>
<h2>The Count Continued to Rise</h2>
<p>By May 2026, MPs referred to a more recent Privy Council Office letter showing that the screen had been triggered 17 times. The Toronto Star’s later reporting described Carney as having been sidelined from at least 17 government deliberations because of corporate conflicts. The increase confirms that the screen was not a one-off response to a handful of transition files; it became a recurring feature of government operations.</p>
<p>Yet the rising tally should be read carefully. The public material does not provide a complete, itemized catalogue explaining every file, the alternate decision-maker or the economic significance of each outcome. Nor does the number itself establish that Carney violated the Conflict of Interest Act. It shows that the preventive machinery identified enough risk to alter his participation. Politically, critics can point to the breadth of the exclusions; defenders can point to them as proof that the safeguards are doing their job. Both interpretations begin with the same fact but emphasize different parts of it.</p>
<h2>A List Covering 103 Named Entities</h2>
<p>The final screen established in July 2025 lists 103 entities. It replaced a simpler arrangement that had focused mainly on Brookfield shortly after Carney became prime minister. The first 25 entities were included because the Ethics Commissioner determined that Carney had held a management position or oversight role connected to their investing activities on or before January 2025. Four more were Brookfield portfolio companies appearing in the federal Registry of Lobbyists.</p>
<p>The remaining entities were identified as Brookfield-related even though Carney had not managed them directly and held no direct financial interest in them, according to the committee’s review. This structure helps explain why the screen reaches beyond companies whose names might be familiar to the public. It is not merely a list of personal shareholdings; it is an attempt to map relationships, oversight history and corporate connections that could create a private-interest concern. For officials screening daily government work, those 103 names form the practical starting point for deciding what reaches the prime minister.</p>
<h2>Brookfield’s Network Is Far Larger</h2>
<p>The 103-entity list captures only a portion of Brookfield’s wider corporate universe. Brookfield chief operating officer Justin Beber told the committee that the organization owns approximately 2,000 companies. The Ethics Commissioner explained that the screen focused on entities connected to Carney’s previous management or oversight, companies appearing in lobbying records and other Brookfield-related firms considered sufficiently relevant. The commissioner accepted Brookfield’s information that the remaining companies were of minimal interest for the purpose of the screen.</p>
<p>That gap has become one of the most politically sensitive features of the arrangement. Critics argue that a network of roughly 2,000 companies is too sprawling for a list of about 100 to reassure the public. Supporters counter that an ethics screen must be based on meaningful connections, not every remote corporate link in a global investment structure. The disagreement is ultimately about where to draw a workable boundary. A list that is too narrow may miss risk; one that is limitless could remove a prime minister from broad areas of economic policy and make normal governing impractical.</p>
<h2>Stripe Added a Separate Corporate Link</h2>
<p>Brookfield dominates the public discussion, but Carney’s agreed compliance measures also name Stripe Inc. The official declaration directs that powers, duties and functions involving Brookfield Asset Management, Brookfield Corporation, Stripe and certain owned or controlled companies be exercised by the appropriate minister when the screen applies. This broadens the arrangement beyond a single former employer and reinforces that the concern is not limited to one corporate family.</p>
<p>The inclusion of Stripe matters because technology and payments policy can intersect with competition, financial regulation, taxation and digital commerce. That does not mean every government decision touching those subjects automatically excludes Carney. The assessment still depends on whether the matter engages a covered private interest rather than merely affecting a large class of businesses. Even so, adding a major payments company to a screen already shaped by Brookfield’s vast holdings increases the range of files that officials must examine. It also makes accurate record-keeping essential, since the relevant connection may not be obvious from a document’s headline.</p>
<h2>The Blind Trust Could Not Do Everything</h2>
<p>Carney placed controlled assets in a blind trust, meaning he does not direct the trustee’s choices or know how the holdings may change over time. The Ethics Commissioner has nevertheless acknowledged that a blind trust does not erase knowledge of what a public office holder owned before transferring the assets. A government decision affecting those known companies could still influence the value of the trust, even when its current contents are hidden from the beneficiary.</p>
<p>The conflict screen was added to address that remaining risk. It operates as a second barrier: the trust separates Carney from investment decisions, while the screen separates him from certain government decisions. Administrators themselves do not know the trust’s exact current assets; that information is held by the trustee and the Ethics Commissioner. They instead work from the named entities, relevant sectors and advice from the commissioner’s office. The arrangement is therefore deliberately layered, but no layer is complete on its own. Its effectiveness depends on communication among officials who possess different pieces of the picture.</p>
<h2>Two Gatekeepers Control the Flow</h2>
<p>The screen is administered by the Clerk of the Privy Council and the prime minister’s chief of staff. At the time examined by the committee, those roles were held by Michael Sabia and Marc-André Blanchard. The choice reflects the two channels through which material reaches a prime minister: the non-partisan public service and the political office. Both administrators must agree on a determination before implementation proceeds.</p>
<p>Their position gives them an unusually practical form of authority. They do not decide the underlying policy simply because a conflict is identified; instead, they determine whether Carney can receive the material and participate. Supporters say these officials are the logical “keyholders” because they already oversee the flow of bureaucratic and political documents. Critics question whether people who ultimately serve within the prime minister’s governing structure are sufficiently independent. The committee heard both views, highlighting a basic institutional dilemma: an external administrator may appear more independent, but insiders are the people best placed to see confidential business before it reaches the prime minister.</p>
<h2>The Ethics Commissioner Advises but Does Not Administer</h2>
<p>The Conflict of Interest and Ethics Commissioner is closely involved without making the administrators’ final decision for them. Sabia and Blanchard described frequent consultation, particularly when a file creates uncertainty. The commissioner’s office provides confidential advice and has access to information about the blind trust that the screen administrators do not possess. Officials then conduct the analysis and decide whether the screen applies.</p>
<p>That division is intended to preserve the commissioner’s ability to oversee and, if necessary, investigate the regime rather than becoming the direct operator of it. The commissioner told MPs that the screen is a preventive measure approved by the Federal Court of Appeal and said it appeared to work well based on the administrators’ testimony. Critics remain concerned that confidential advice leaves outsiders unable to reconstruct the reasoning. The system therefore depends heavily on institutional trust: trust that administrators disclose the right facts, that the commissioner gives rigorous advice and that any later review can distinguish a reasonable judgment from an overly permissive one.</p>
<h2>Broad Policies Can Still Reach the Prime Minister</h2>
<p>Carney’s screen does not automatically bar him from every decision that affects a covered company. Federal conflict-of-interest rules generally distinguish a specific private interest from an interest shared with the public or a broad class of people. A nationwide economic measure may therefore remain within the prime minister’s role unless a covered entity would experience a disproportionate effect. This exception is essential to governability because Brookfield-linked businesses operate across numerous sectors.</p>
<p>It is also the point at which reasonable people can disagree most sharply. A policy can look broad on its face while producing concentrated gains for one industry or company. Officials must judge the substance of the impact, not simply the wording of the proposal. Witnesses before the committee differed over whether Carney’s screen is exceptionally broad or still leaves him able to participate in most major policy choices. The 17 affected deliberations show that the exception has not swallowed the rule, but the undisclosed files make it impossible for the public to evaluate every boundary call independently.</p>
<h2>Transparency Remains the Weakest Link</h2>
<p>Parliament’s ethics committee recommended a written, auditable log recording the dates, subject categories and alternate decision-makers for screened matters. It also called for non-partisan administrators, standardized public reporting and a formal mechanism to disclose when screens are applied. Those proposals emerged because the current arrangement reveals totals and selected categories but often not enough detail to reconstruct what happened.</p>
<p>Officials have a legitimate reason to protect active Cabinet business, national-security information and commercially sensitive deliberations. The harder question is what should be released after the risk has passed. A delayed record could show that the prime minister was excluded without revealing information while it was still actionable. It could also identify who exercised the authority in his place. Such reporting would not satisfy every critic, but it would convert a largely trust-based mechanism into one that can be audited over time. The movement from six known applications to at least 17 affected deliberations makes that reform more urgent, not less.</p>
<h2>What the Seventeen Decisions Really Show</h2>
<p>The most defensible conclusion is neither that the system proves corruption nor that the exclusions are unimportant. The documented interventions show that Carney’s former corporate relationships created recurring situations serious enough to alter the normal flow of government work. They also show officials using a legal and administrative tool intended to stop a conflict before it becomes a violation. A functioning safeguard should sometimes produce exactly this result: a powerful decision-maker is removed from a file rather than trusted to manage the risk informally.</p>
<p>The unresolved issue is accountability after the fact. Canadians still lack a complete public account of the subjects involved, the officials who took over and the reasoning that separated screened matters from those Carney was allowed to handle. Without that information, supporters and critics can both use the number 17 to reinforce what they already believe. A stronger disclosure system would make the figure more meaningful. It would allow the public to judge not only how often Carney sat out, but whether the right files were caught, the replacements were appropriate and the government’s decisions remained firmly in the public interest.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/shutterstock_2768006633.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="716">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/trumps-ambassador-says-canada-u-s-trade-talks-are-not-anywhere-close-to-a-deal</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Trump’s Ambassador Says Canada-U.S. Trade Talks Are ‘Not Anywhere Close’ to a Deal]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 23:25:56 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/trumps-ambassador-says-canada-u-s-trade-talks-are-not-anywhere-close-to-a-deal</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Only days before North America’s landmark trade pact reaches its first mandatory review, the public messages from Ottawa and Washington]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Only days before North America’s landmark trade pact reaches its first mandatory review, the public messages from Ottawa and Washington are moving in opposite directions. Canadian officials have described recent discussions as detailed, serious and productive. U.S. Ambassador to Canada Pete Hoekstra has now offered a much colder assessment, saying the two countries are “not anywhere close” to a new CUSMA framework.</p>
<p>The warning does not mean cross-border commerce is about to stop on July 1, 2026. It does, however, expose how much remains unresolved—from tariffs and automotive rules to dairy access, digital regulation and the wider question of whether Donald Trump still wants the agreement he negotiated during his first presidency. For businesses and workers, the immediate danger is less a sudden collapse than a prolonged period of uncertainty.</p>
<h2>Hoekstra’s Warning Cuts Through Ottawa’s Optimism</h2>
<p>Hoekstra’s assessment arrived after Canadian officials had spent days emphasizing the professionalism of the negotiations. Prime Minister Mark Carney said his team held detailed technical conversations with U.S. officials during the G7 summit in France. Canada’s ambassador in Washington, Mark Wiseman, similarly characterized the behind-the-scenes discussions as productive, respectful and businesslike. Those descriptions suggested that the political noise surrounding CUSMA was not preventing officials from making practical progress.</p>
<p>The American ambassador’s language points to a different reality: cordial meetings are not the same as agreement on a framework. Hoekstra was discussing the state of negotiations ahead of the July 1 review, when Canada, the United States and Mexico are scheduled to meet formally. His warning also followed Trump’s declaration that the United States might perform better without CUSMA, even though the president left open the possibility of signing an extension. The result is a negotiation in which Canadian officials are stressing process while Washington is emphasizing leverage and unfinished business.</p>
<h2>July 1 Is a Review Date, Not an Automatic Expiry</h2>
<p>The approaching deadline is often described as if CUSMA will disappear unless all three countries announce a deal immediately. The agreement’s legal text says otherwise. CUSMA entered into force on July 1, 2020, with an initial 16-year term. Its sixth anniversary triggers a joint review in which the three governments assess how the pact is functioning, consider proposed changes and decide whether to extend its term for another 16 years.</p>
<p>If all three governments confirm an extension, the agreement receives a fresh 16-year horizon and another review occurs six years later. If even one country declines to extend it this year, CUSMA remains in force rather than vanishing overnight. The parties would instead conduct annual reviews through 2036, unless they agree on an extension before then. That distinction matters for factories, farms and investors. There is no immediate trade cliff on July 1, but failing to renew would replace long-term certainty with yearly political pressure and repeated negotiations.</p>
<h2>The Three Countries Are Not Negotiating in the Same Formation</h2>
<p>One reason a comprehensive outcome remains distant is that the negotiations are not unfolding solely through a single three-country process. The United States and Mexico have already held bilateral rounds connected to the CUSMA review. Their June discussions covered industrial rules of origin, economic security, agriculture, labour, the environment, steel, aluminum and automobiles. A third U.S.-Mexico round is expected in Mexico City, showing that substantial work is moving ahead on a two-country track.</p>
<p>Canada appears prepared to accept a similar structure. Trade Minister Dominic LeBlanc has said bilateral arrangements between Canada and the United States, and between the United States and Mexico, could sit beside the trilateral agreement when they address shared problems. That flexibility may make targeted compromises easier, but it also creates a more complicated bargaining table. Ottawa must defend the core three-country framework while negotiating separate solutions with Washington, which has greater economic power and has already demonstrated that it is willing to advance discussions with Mexico first.</p>
<h2>Tariffs Have Turned a Scheduled Review Into a Trust Test</h2>
<p>CUSMA was designed to provide predictable, largely duty-free trade across North America, yet major sectors have spent much of the past year operating under tariffs and counter-tariffs. Canada continues to apply 25 per cent counter-tariffs on selected U.S. steel, aluminum and automotive imports because Washington still maintains sectoral duties that do not fully exempt CUSMA-compliant products. The dispute means companies can comply with the trade pact and still face added costs under separate national-security measures.</p>
<p>The damage extends beyond customs bills. Canadian manufacturers must decide whether to delay investments, change suppliers, absorb higher costs or pass them to customers. Ottawa has responded with large support programs, including a $1-billion loan initiative for tariff-affected industries and additional regional funding. Such measures may keep plants operating, but they do not restore the certainty businesses expected from a continental trade agreement. Until tariffs on metals, vehicles and other strategic goods are addressed, any claim that CUSMA is functioning normally will remain difficult to sustain.</p>
<h2>The Auto Sector Shows Why a Simple Deal Is So Difficult</h2>
<p>Automotive trade is likely to be one of the hardest areas to settle because the industry is built around deeply integrated production rather than neatly separated national factories. Under CUSMA, passenger vehicles generally need 75 per cent regional value content to qualify for preferential treatment, up from 62.5 per cent under NAFTA. The pact also requires 70 per cent North American steel and aluminum content and includes labour-value rules intended to support higher-wage production.</p>
<p>Those percentages translate into thousands of sourcing decisions involving engines, transmissions, batteries, electronics and raw materials. Canadian officials have noted that a vehicle and its components can cross the border seven to nine times before final assembly. Canada’s automotive industry contributed about $16.8 billion to national GDP in 2024, directly employed more than 125,000 people and indirectly supported roughly 427,000 jobs. A stricter U.S.-content demand or prolonged tariff regime would therefore affect not only automakers, but parts suppliers, logistics firms, dealerships and communities across southern Ontario and the U.S. Midwest.</p>
<h2>Dairy and Digital Rules Carry Political Weight Beyond Their Dollar Value</h2>
<p>Some of the most sensitive disputes are not the largest parts of bilateral trade, but they touch national identity and domestic political constituencies. Washington has repeatedly challenged Canada’s administration of dairy import quotas and continues to seek greater access for American producers. Canada changed its quota system after losing an earlier CUSMA case, then won a second panel dispute in 2023. The legal victory did not end American pressure, making dairy a likely bargaining point again.</p>
<p>Digital regulation has become another flashpoint. In May, the CRTC announced that major online streaming services would contribute 15 per cent of their Canadian broadcasting revenues toward Canadian and Indigenous programming obligations, including an existing five per cent base contribution. Hoekstra criticized the change as a new trade barrier, while Canadian regulators framed it as support for domestic culture, French-language programming and Indigenous content. These issues are difficult to trade away because concessions can be portrayed domestically as surrendering farmers, creators or cultural sovereignty—even when negotiators are pursuing gains elsewhere.</p>
<h2>The Economic Relationship Is Too Large to Treat as Political Theatre</h2>
<p>The numbers explain why blunt rhetoric from either capital quickly reaches factory floors and household budgets. Nearly $3.6 billion in goods and services crossed the Canada-U.S. border each day in 2024. The United States remains Canada’s largest trading partner, its largest source of foreign investment and the destination for most Canadian exports. Canada is also the largest foreign supplier of energy to the United States, linking the relationship to fuel prices, electricity reliability and industrial production.</p>
<p>At the same time, Canada has already started reducing its exposure. Statistics Canada reported that the U.S. share of Canadian merchandise exports fell from 75.9 per cent in 2024 to 71.7 per cent in 2025. Exports to non-U.S. markets rose sharply, although Canada still ran a large deficit with those countries. Diversification can create leverage and new opportunities, but it cannot quickly replace the scale, proximity and infrastructure of the U.S. market. A manufacturer in Windsor or an energy producer in Alberta cannot simply recreate decades of continental integration in another region.</p>
<h2>A Limited Extension May Be More Realistic Than a Grand Bargain</h2>
<p>The most orderly outcome would be a three-country extension accompanied by targeted side agreements on tariffs, rules of origin, economic security and sector-specific disputes. That would preserve the continental framework while giving Trump’s administration visible changes it could present as a win. Canada has already signalled openness to bilateral arrangements alongside CUSMA, and the ongoing U.S.-Mexico rounds offer a possible model for resolving issues without rewriting every chapter at once.</p>
<p>A second possibility is that the countries complete the review without agreeing to extend the pact. Trade would continue, but annual reviews would begin, leaving businesses to plan under a recurring threat of renegotiation until 2036. The least predictable outcome would involve a formal withdrawal notice, which is legally separate from the review process and would take effect six months after notice is given. Hoekstra’s warning suggests the first outcome is not yet within reach. It does not prove a breakdown is inevitable, but it makes clear that technical discussions and diplomatic optimism have not yet produced the political bargain needed for lasting certainty.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/Shutterstock_312956195.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/provinces-push-ottawa-for-more-control-as-canada-reaffirms-immigration-below-1-of-population</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Provinces Push Ottawa for More Control as Canada Reaffirms Immigration Below 1% of Population]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 23:11:49 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/provinces-push-ottawa-for-more-control-as-canada-reaffirms-immigration-below-1-of-population</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s immigration debate is shifting from how many newcomers should arrive to who should decide where their skills are needed]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s immigration debate is shifting from how many newcomers should arrive to who should decide where their skills are needed most. At a June 23 meeting in Ottawa, federal, provincial and territorial immigration ministers agreed that national intake must remain sustainable, but provinces pressed for a stronger role in shaping economic immigration. Their message was direct: labour shortages in Newfoundland and Labrador, Manitoba or rural Alberta cannot always be solved through a single national formula.</p>
<p>Ottawa, meanwhile, reaffirmed its commitment to keep permanent resident admissions below 1% of Canada’s population beyond 2027 and to reduce temporary residents to less than 5% of the population by the end of that year. The result is an emerging compromise—lower overall growth, but more pressure to give provinces predictable nominee spaces, better regional tools and greater influence over which workers can stay permanently.</p>
<h2>A New Federal-Provincial Bargain Takes Shape</h2>
<p>The June 23 meeting of the Forum of Ministers Responsible for Immigration was not simply another discussion about annual targets. Ministers began work connected to the 2027–2029 Immigration Levels Plan and focused on how national limits can reflect regional, rural and northern conditions. Provinces and territories argued that they must be substantive partners because they understand local employers, settlement capacity and demographic pressures.</p>
<p>That demand stops short of transferring full control over immigration. Ottawa still determines admissibility, issues visas and grants permanent residence. However, provincial ministers want more influence over economic selection, clearer information about how nominee allocations are calculated and enough notice to plan programs. For a hospital recruiting nurses or a contractor seeking skilled tradespeople, an unpredictable allocation can mean that a promising worker’s pathway closes unexpectedly. The emerging bargain is about predictability as much as power: Ottawa controls the national ceiling, while provinces seek greater authority beneath.</p>
<h2>What “Below 1%” Actually Means</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s promise to keep permanent resident admissions below 1% of the population does not mean immigration is being halted. The current plan sets a target of 380,000 permanent residents in each year from 2026 through 2028. Economic immigration remains the largest component, accounting for 239,800 planned admissions in 2026 and rising to 244,700 in 2027 and 2028, roughly 64% of the total.</p>
<p>The important comparison is with the recent peak. Canada admitted about 484,000 permanent residents in 2024, after years of rising targets, while preliminary federal data placed 2025 admissions near 394,000. Holding the annual number at 380,000 therefore represents a meaningful reduction, but not a retreat from immigration as an economic strategy. It is a stabilization policy: fewer admissions than during the surge, with a larger share directed toward workers, provincial nominees and people whose skills match shortages. The continuing dispute concerns how those limited spaces should be distributed.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Cutting Temporary Arrivals More Sharply</h2>
<p>The deepest reductions are occurring on the temporary side of the system. The federal plan targets 385,000 new temporary resident arrivals in 2026 and 370,000 in both 2027 and 2028. Those figures cover newly arriving international students and temporary workers; they do not count every permit extension or status change involving someone already in Canada. Ottawa’s broader goal is to reduce the non-permanent resident population below 5% nationally by the end of 2027.</p>
<p>The Parliamentary Budget Officer estimated that non-permanent residents peaked at 7.6% of the population in October 2024 and declined to 6.8% one year later. Its projection shows the share falling just below 5% by the deadline, largely through departures and transitions to permanent status. That adjustment has major demographic consequences. The PBO expects population growth to remain essentially flat in 2026 and reach only 0.3% in 2027, a sharp change from rapid growth during the temporary-resident surge.</p>
<h2>Provincial Nominee Programs Return to Centre Stage</h2>
<p>Provincial Nominee Programs have become the clearest vehicle for expanding regional control. Through these programs, provinces and territories can nominate candidates whose education, experience or business background fits local priorities. Ottawa still makes the final permanent-residence decision, but an enhanced nomination linked to Express Entry gives a candidate 600 additional ranking points, moving a profile toward an invitation.</p>
<p>The program’s size has changed. The federal target for provincial nominees fell from 110,000 admissions in 2024 to 55,000 in the 2025 plan, a reduction premiers criticized as too severe. The 2026–2028 plan raises the target to 91,500 in 2026 and 92,500 in each of the next two years. Provinces welcomed the recovery but are still asking for stable allocations plus a clearer explanation of how Ottawa divides spaces. Their argument is practical: a province cannot build a multiyear recruitment strategy when nomination capacity changes sharply from one cycle to the next.</p>
<h2>One National Target, Several Regional Realities</h2>
<p>Immigrants do not settle evenly across Canada, which helps explain the provincial push for more control. Preliminary 2025 data showed Ontario receiving 43.1% of new permanent residents, followed by Quebec at 15.3%, Alberta at 13.1% and British Columbia at 12.9%. Saskatchewan, Manitoba and the four Atlantic provinces together received roughly the same share as Quebec, even though many smaller communities are trying to offset aging populations and fill jobs.</p>
<p>A national target can therefore produce different outcomes. Toronto may be concerned about housing and transit capacity, while a rural health authority may struggle to attract a physician, nurse or laboratory technologist. Provincial selection offers a way to distinguish between those realities without raising the national ceiling. It can prioritize workers with a job offer, local experience or a connection to a region. Yet selection alone cannot ensure retention; long-term success still depends on employment, housing, schools, services and community ties.</p>
<h2>International Students Become Workforce Policy</h2>
<p>International education is now being treated as both an immigration issue and a workforce-planning tool. Ottawa’s 2026 target is 155,000 newly arriving international students, 49% below the previous year’s target. The government expects to issue up to 408,000 study permits overall, but that total includes about 253,000 extensions for students already in Canada. The distinction matters because new arrivals affect population growth differently from renewals.</p>
<p>The reductions are reshaping campuses. Statistics Canada estimated that international enrolment at public postsecondary institutions declined 4% in 2024–2025 and could fall another 26% in 2025–2026, representing roughly 124,000 fewer students over two years. Ontario was projected to experience the largest decline. Provinces want graduates whose training matches local shortages, which is why ministers agreed to keep working on the Post-Graduation Work Permit Program. The question is no longer how many students enter, but whether their programs, jobs and permanent pathways align with regional demand.</p>
<h2>The Focus Shifts to People Already in Canada</h2>
<p>A feature of the recalibrated system is the preference for people already living, studying or working in Canada. According to the Parliamentary Budget Officer, 48% of new permanent residents admitted in 2025 had previously been international students or temporary workers. Those candidates often bring Canadian work experience, language exposure and community connections, making their transition less disruptive than recruiting the same number entirely from abroad.</p>
<p>The federal plan also includes one-time measures to move approximately 148,000 people into permanent status during 2026 and 2027. That total includes about 115,000 protected persons and their dependants, plus 33,000 temporary workers described as having strong community roots. These changes can push permanent-resident admissions above the annual target, but they do not represent the same number of new arrivals because the people are already present. For provinces, this creates an opportunity to retain trained workers employers already rely upon while reducing the temporary population.</p>
<h2>Selecting Workers Is Only Half the Job</h2>
<p>Greater provincial selection will have limited value if newcomers cannot work in the occupations for which they were chosen. Foreign credential recognition is handled through provincial regulators and professional bodies, creating processes across Canada. At the June meeting, ministers highlighted reforms in health care and fair-registration laws, then directed officials to coordinate work across the pathway from pre-arrival assessment to employment.</p>
<p>The mismatch remains. Statistics Canada found that 25.2% of immigrant workers with postsecondary education reported being overqualified for their jobs, compared with 19.1% of Canadian-born workers. The rate reached 32.6% among recent immigrants. Ottawa has proposed a $97-million, five-year Foreign Credential Recognition Action Fund focused on health and construction, sectors cited in shortage discussions. Faster licensing would make regional immigration more credible: recruiting an internationally trained nurse to a community solves little if that person spends years unable to practise. Selection, recognition and settlement must operate as one system.</p>
<h2>Quebec and Francophone Immigration Follow Different Rules</h2>
<p>Canada’s immigration federation already includes one example of provincial authority. Under the Canada–Quebec Accord, Quebec selects economic immigrants destined for the province and controls its immigration levels, francization and integration policies. Quebec joined the June forum as an observer and is not bound by decisions in areas covered by its agreement. Other provinces do not possess those powers, making Quebec an unavoidable reference in debates over decentralization.</p>
<p>Outside Quebec, Ottawa is increasing targets for French-speaking permanent residents. The plan sets goals of 9% of admissions outside Quebec in 2026, 9.5% in 2027 and 10.5% in 2028, supporting an objective of 12% by 2029. Regional programs can help, including provincial streams, the Atlantic Immigration Program and Francophone community pilots. The policy carries cultural and economic aims: strengthening minority-language communities while directing skilled newcomers toward areas that may struggle to attract them. It shows how national goals can still be tailored geographically.</p>
<h2>The Next Levels Plan Will Test the Partnership</h2>
<p>The 2027–2029 Immigration Levels Plan will reveal whether the June meeting produced change or another consultation promise. Provincial ministers asked Ottawa for details on how nominee targets and allocations are set, larger provincial and Atlantic allocations, and restored funding for services such as targeted language training. They also want less federal-provincial duplication and a stronger regional role in Express Entry.</p>
<p>Ottawa must balance those requests against keeping permanent admissions below 1% of the population and temporary residents below 5%. Giving provinces more spaces without changing the national ceiling means taking spaces from another category or changing how the total is divided. That is the arithmetic behind partnership. A workable settlement would give provinces predictable tools, require evidence that selected workers match needs and fund services that help families remain. Canada is not abandoning immigration; it is trying to make a smaller intake more targeted, regionally responsive, publicly trusted and sustainable.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/01/immigration.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="668">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/toronto-cuts-homebuilding-charges-by-up-to-60-as-governments-put-1-5-billion-behind-deal</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Toronto Cuts Homebuilding Charges by Up to 60% as Governments Put $1.5 Billion Behind Deal]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 16:28:43 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/toronto-cuts-homebuilding-charges-by-up-to-60-as-governments-put-1-5-billion-behind-deal</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Toronto has placed one of its biggest housing-cost bets yet on a simple idea: make it cheaper to start building]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Toronto has placed one of its biggest housing-cost bets yet on a simple idea: make it cheaper to start building without starving growing neighbourhoods of the infrastructure they need. The city has secured up to $1.5 billion from Ottawa and Queen’s Park after committing to reduce residential development charges by 40% to 60%, depending on the unit type, from 2026 through 2029.</p>
<p>The money will support transit, roads, water and wastewater projects already in Toronto’s capital plan, while the lower charges are meant to improve the financial case for stalled or marginal housing projects. The announcement is substantial, but its real value will depend on whether more projects reach construction, more rental homes are completed and lower costs translate into better prices or rents.</p>
<h2>The Deal Is Bigger Than a Fee Cut</h2>
<p>Toronto’s agreement sits inside the Canada-Ontario Development Charge Reduction Program, a broader federal-provincial effort backed by up to $8.8 billion over 10 years. Municipalities were asked to reduce residential development charges by at least 30% to 50% for three years in exchange for support for housing-enabling infrastructure. Toronto went further, promising cuts of 40% to 60% for more than three years. That stronger commitment helped the city secure up to $1.5 billion over a decade, one of the largest municipal allocations announced under the program.</p>
<p>The arrangement changes who carries part of the upfront cost of growth. Instead of relying as heavily on charges collected from each new development, Toronto will use senior-government funding to support infrastructure already approved in its 10-year capital plan. The city says the reduction will apply between 2026 and 2029 and will vary by housing type. That detail matters because a small condominium, a family-sized apartment and a detached home currently face very different charge levels, so the dollar benefit will not be uniform across the market.</p>
<h2>Why Development Charges Became a Housing Flashpoint</h2>
<p>Development charges are one-time municipal fees imposed on new construction and redevelopment. Toronto uses the revenue to help pay for services and infrastructure required by growth, including transit, roads, water systems, sewers, parks, recreation facilities, libraries and emergency services. The logic is often summarized as “growth pays for growth”: new residents and businesses create infrastructure needs, so new development helps fund the expansion rather than placing the entire burden on existing taxpayers.</p>
<p>The size of the charges has made that principle increasingly controversial. Toronto’s published non-rental rates, effective June 26, 2025, list a charge of $137,846 for a single or semi-detached home, $80,690 for an apartment with two or more bedrooms and $52,676 for a one-bedroom or bachelor apartment. Transit accounts for the largest share of the non-rental charge, while roads, parks, water and sewer services also represent major components. For a builder deciding whether a project works financially, those amounts are not minor administrative expenses; they can materially alter the cost of every unit.</p>
<h2>What a 40% to 60% Cut Could Mean Per Home</h2>
<p>Using Toronto’s currently published rates only as a reference point, the potential reduction is large. A 40% cut to the $137,846 charge on a single or semi-detached home would reduce the fee by roughly $55,100, while a 60% cut would lower it by about $82,700. For a one-bedroom or bachelor apartment carrying a $52,676 charge, the same range would represent roughly $21,100 to $31,600. A two-bedroom apartment could see a reduction of about $32,300 to $48,400 before considering other project-specific rules.</p>
<p>Those figures are illustrations, not guaranteed discounts at the sales centre. Toronto has not said that every unit type will receive the maximum reduction, and the city’s announcement states that the percentage will vary by unit type. The applicable rate can also depend on project timing, tenure and existing exemptions. Still, the scale shows why builders and housing advocates have focused on development charges: tens of thousands of dollars per unit can determine whether financing closes, construction begins or a project remains approved but unbuilt for another cycle.</p>
<h2>Toronto Had Already Begun Reducing the Burden</h2>
<p>The new agreement builds on measures Toronto introduced before the $1.5-billion commitment was finalized. The city froze development charges at 2024 levels by skipping annual indexing in 2025 and 2026. It also expanded exemptions for multiplexes containing up to six units and changed policies that affected when rates were locked in. These steps were designed to lower costs for smaller infill projects as well as large developments, especially when rapid construction-cost increases were already squeezing project budgets.</p>
<p>Toronto says its housing incentives and related financial contributions had reached $1.2 billion by the first quarter of 2026. That total includes development-charge relief, property-tax reductions and waivers of certain fees. Among the measures is a 15% municipal property-tax reduction for new multi-residential properties. The city has also provided charge exemptions or deferrals for thousands of rental, affordable and rent-controlled homes. The latest funding therefore does not start a new direction so much as give Toronto greater financial room to extend one it had already chosen and deepen the reductions.</p>
<h2>The $1.5 Billion Is Also an Infrastructure Deal</h2>
<p>The senior-government contribution is not described as a simple reimbursement cheque for developers. Toronto says the funding will support eligible projects already approved in its 10-year capital plan, including transit-capacity improvements, water and wastewater systems and road-network expansion. By using outside funding for those investments, the city can rely less on development-charge revenue while continuing to build the systems new neighbourhoods require as thousands of additional residents move in.</p>
<p>That distinction is important in a city with a $63.1-billion capital plan for 2026 through 2035. Toronto says 53% of that plan is devoted to keeping existing assets in a state of good repair, leaving limited room to absorb new growth costs without another funding source. A new apartment tower may add hundreds of homes, but it can also increase pressure on transit, sewers, roads and public facilities. The agreement is an attempt to lower the entry cost of construction without pretending that growth-related infrastructure is free or can be postponed indefinitely.</p>
<h2>Rental Construction Gets a Major Second Push</h2>
<p>The added financial certainty is allowing Toronto to launch another phase of its Purpose-Built Rental Housing Incentives Stream. The city says the new phase will support up to 10,000 rental homes, including at least 2,000 affordable units. Eligible projects must include a minimum of 20% affordable housing, and Toronto plans to prioritize developments that are ready to begin construction. Applications are expected to be reviewed on a rolling basis in the coming weeks and months.</p>
<p>The program offers an indefinite deferral of development charges while a qualifying project remains rental housing. Its first phase, launched in 2024, supported more than 8,000 rental homes, including more than 2,000 affordable units. For renters, this part of the announcement may be more consequential than a theoretical reduction in the price of a new detached home. Purpose-built rental projects are held for tenants rather than sold unit by unit, and the affordability condition ties part of the public incentive directly to homes that meet the city’s affordability requirements for a defined share of the building.</p>
<h2>The Timing Reflects a Weak Construction Pipeline</h2>
<p>The announcement arrives as Toronto’s ownership-housing pipeline is under pressure. CMHC expects Toronto housing starts to remain low in 2026 as condominium construction continues to slow, although rental starts are expected to provide some support. Its national housing-supply analysis also found that 2025’s overall gain in starts was driven by record rental construction and more missing-middle housing, while weak condominium presales and rising unsold inventory threatened future ownership supply in Toronto and Vancouver.</p>
<p>Toronto’s own development data shows the gap between approvals and construction. The provincial target calls for 285,000 Toronto housing starts by 2031. At 40% of the target period, the city had recorded 87,921 starts, equal to 31% of the goal. At the same time, 192,389 units had received official-plan or zoning approvals. That contrast helps explain the policy focus: Toronto does not only need more proposals or rezonings. It needs approved projects to become financeable enough to break ground, secure trades and move from planning documents into neighbourhoods.</p>
<h2>Lower Charges Can Unlock Projects, but Not All of Them</h2>
<p>CMHC’s modelling suggests a reduction in Toronto’s proposed range could make a measurable difference. Its Housing Development Viability Analyzer estimates that cutting development charges by 50% to 60% would increase the number of viable Toronto projects by about 5.27%. A roughly 50% reduction was also modelled to generate an additional 4,900 to 7,650 housing units annually in the city, depending on project size, financing conditions and the wider market environment.</p>
<p>That is meaningful, but it is not a complete solution. The same analysis found that eliminating development charges entirely would increase viable Toronto projects by about 10.74%, not transform every proposal into a construction site. Land prices, labour, materials, interest rates, expected selling prices and financing conditions still shape whether a development works. The practical value of the Toronto deal is therefore its ability to move borderline projects across the viability threshold. Projects facing much larger financial gaps may remain delayed even after the charges fall, while stronger projects may simply proceed sooner.</p>
<h2>Buyers May Not See Every Dollar Immediately</h2>
<p>A lower development charge reduces a builder’s cost, but that does not automatically create an identical reduction in the advertised price of every new home. New-construction prices are influenced by land costs, financing, construction expenses, buyer demand, competing projects and the revenue lenders require before releasing funds. In a weak presale market, lower charges may appear through reduced prices, smaller closing adjustments, buyer incentives or simply a project proceeding instead of being cancelled or postponed.</p>
<p>The most important consumer effect may take time. If the policy helps more projects launch, competition and added supply can place downward pressure on prices and rents across the market. If only a limited number of projects respond, the affordability effect will be smaller. CMHC’s model reflects this complexity by assessing charges alongside construction costs, selling prices and broader economic conditions. The deal should therefore be judged by changes in starts, completions, available supply and project cancellations, not only by whether developers advertise a line-item rebate equal to the municipal fee reduction.</p>
<h2>The Fiscal Trade-Off Has Not Disappeared</h2>
<p>Under the provincial program, federal and Ontario funding can cover up to 90% of eligible infrastructure-project costs, while municipalities must contribute at least 10%. Toronto’s $1.5-billion allocation reduces its reliance on development charges, but it does not remove the city’s responsibility to fund growth or maintain infrastructure. Municipal leaders elsewhere in Ontario have warned that any remaining revenue gap could eventually put pressure on property taxes or other local funding sources.</p>
<p>Toronto’s advantage is that the supported projects are already part of its approved capital plan, making the agreement less about inventing new spending and more about changing how existing work is financed. Even so, the long-term question remains unresolved. The charge cuts run from 2026 to 2029, while roads, water systems and transit assets require funding for decades. Success will mean more homes begin construction during the reduction period without leaving a large fiscal hole when the temporary arrangement ends. It will also require clear reporting on starts, infrastructure delivery and the cost absorbed by each order of government.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/03/Housing-Affordability-Crisis.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canada-invites-4000-skilled-workers-to-apply-for-permanent-residence-in-new-express-entry-draw</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Invites 4,000 Skilled Workers to Apply for Permanent Residence in New Express Entry Draw]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 16:17:15 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canada-invites-4000-skilled-workers-to-apply-for-permanent-residence-in-new-express-entry-draw</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For thousands of skilled workers who have already built careers and lives in Canada, a long-awaited message may have finally]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For thousands of skilled workers who have already built careers and lives in Canada, a long-awaited message may have finally arrived. Immigration, Refugees and Citizenship Canada issued 4,000 invitations to apply for permanent residence in a new Canadian Experience Class Express Entry draw held on June 23, 2026.</p>
<p>Candidates needed a Comprehensive Ranking System score of at least 516 to receive an invitation. The draw was one of the largest Canadian Experience Class rounds of the year, but its relatively high cut-off also demonstrated how competitive the pool remains. For successful candidates, the invitation opens a potentially life-changing path to permanent residence. It also begins a demanding 60-day period in which applicants must confirm their eligibility, collect supporting records and submit a complete electronic application.</p>
<h2>A Major Canadian Experience Class Draw With a 516 Cut-Off</h2>
<p>The June 23 selection round invited 4,000 candidates through the Canadian Experience Class, commonly known as the CEC. To qualify, candidates needed a CRS score of 516 or higher. Where multiple candidates had exactly 516 points, the tie-breaking rule favoured profiles submitted before April 14, 2026, at 12:03 a.m. Coordinated Universal Time. The rule ensures that candidates who entered the pool earlier are considered first when the number of eligible profiles exceeds the number of invitations available.</p>
<p>The size of the round will be encouraging to people waiting in the pool. It followed a May 27 CEC draw that invited 3,000 candidates with a higher cut-off of 518. Earlier rounds included 2,000 invitations at 514 on April 28 and 4,000 invitations at 507 on March 17. These fluctuations illustrate why one draw cannot establish a reliable long-term trend. A score that would have been sufficient in March may not have secured an invitation in June. Nevertheless, issuing 4,000 invitations at once provides a meaningful opportunity for temporary residents who have gained qualifying Canadian work experience and want to remain in the country permanently.</p>
<h2>Who Can Qualify Through the Canadian Experience Class</h2>
<p>The Canadian Experience Class is intended for skilled workers with recent employment experience in Canada. Candidates generally need at least one year, or 1,560 hours, of paid and authorized Canadian work experience obtained during the three years before applying. The experience must fall within occupations classified under Training, Education, Experience and Responsibilities categories 0, 1, 2 or 3. A person can meet the requirement through 30 hours of work per week for 12 months or through an equivalent amount of eligible part-time work.</p>
<p>Language requirements vary according to the occupation. Candidates working in TEER 0 or 1 positions must usually reach Canadian Language Benchmark 7 in English or the equivalent French level. Those in TEER 2 or 3 occupations generally need at least CLB 5. Applicants must also intend to live outside Quebec, which operates its own immigration selection system. A job offer is not required for CEC eligibility. However, work performed while studying full-time normally does not count toward the minimum experience requirement. That distinction can be crucial for graduates who worked throughout school but only began accumulating qualifying experience after completing their studies.</p>
<h2>Why the CRS Cut-Off Matters</h2>
<p>Express Entry candidates are ranked through the Comprehensive Ranking System, which awards points for factors such as age, education, official-language ability and Canadian work experience. A spouse’s qualifications, combinations of education and work experience, provincial nominations and certain Canadian connections can also affect the total. The June cut-off of 516 was two points lower than the previous CEC round, but it remained substantially above the 507-point threshold recorded on March 17.</p>
<p>Even a one-point difference can separate an invitation from another period of waiting. Candidates at the cut-off are also affected by the tie-breaking timestamp, meaning two people with identical scores may receive different results based on when their profiles were first submitted. Updating a profile does not normally reset its original submission date. Another important change occurred in March 2025, when IRCC removed the 50 or 200 CRS points previously available for qualifying job offers. A job offer may still matter for eligibility under certain immigration programs, but it no longer provides the same ranking advantage. By contrast, a provincial nomination continues to add 600 points, often moving an otherwise competitive candidate well above the threshold for a future invitation.</p>
<h2>An Invitation Is the Beginning of the Application Process</h2>
<p>Receiving an invitation does not automatically grant permanent residence. Candidates have 60 days to accept the invitation and submit a complete electronic application. During that period, they must enter detailed personal, employment, education, travel and family information, upload supporting documents and pay the required fees. For many invitees, the countdown begins after months of watching Express Entry scores move by only a few points, making preparation before the invitation especially valuable.</p>
<p>Candidates should also recalculate their CRS score when completing the application. A birthday, expired language result, change in marital status or employment correction can alter the score originally recorded in the profile. If the revised total falls below the cut-off for the draw, proceeding could result in refusal. IRCC advises candidates in that situation to consider declining the invitation. Someone who declines may return to the pool if still eligible, although another invitation is not guaranteed. Allowing the invitation to expire is different: the Express Entry profile is removed, and the person must create a new one to be considered again. IRCC’s service standard is to finalize most complete Express Entry applications within six months, but complex cases may take longer.</p>
<h2>Documents, Biometrics and Fees Require Careful Planning</h2>
<p>A complete application can involve employment letters, passports, language-test results, educational records, police certificates, medical examination information and proof of family relationships. Police certificates are generally required from countries where an applicant spent six consecutive months or longer after reaching the applicable age. A certificate for the country where the applicant currently lives must normally have been issued no more than six months before submission. When a document cannot be obtained in time, the applicant may provide evidence of efforts made and a written explanation, although acceptance remains at the officer’s discretion.</p>
<p>Most permanent residence applicants between the ages of 14 and 79 must also provide fingerprints and a photograph after receiving a biometric instruction letter, usually within 30 days. As of April 30, 2026, the federal fee for a principal economic immigration applicant is $1,590, including the $600 right of permanent residence fee. The same amount applies to an accompanying spouse or partner, while each dependent child costs $270. Canadian Experience Class applicants are generally exempt from the settlement-funds requirement. Because the online system may still generate a proof-of-funds upload field, exempt applicants can submit a letter explaining that they were invited under the CEC.</p>
<h2>Canada Is Prioritizing Workers Who Are Already Contributing</h2>
<p>The draw reflects a broader effort to select more permanent residents with established Canadian work histories. Under the federal government’s 2026–2028 Immigration Levels Plan, permanent resident admissions are targeted at 380,000 annually. Economic immigration represents roughly 63 per cent of planned admissions in 2026 and is expected to rise to approximately 64 per cent in the next two years. Programs managed through Express Entry, including the Canadian Experience Class, form an important part of that economic strategy.</p>
<p>The reasoning is partly practical. Candidates already working in Canada often have local references, professional networks, language experience and a clearer understanding of the labour market. Federal data presented during consultations on future Express Entry categories indicated that principal applicants admitted through federal high-skilled programs between 2015 and 2022 had employment rates above 94 per cent. Their median employment earnings ranged from approximately $58,000 one year after admission to about $80,000 after five years. These outcomes do not guarantee that every newcomer will experience the same success, but they help explain why Canadian experience has become an increasingly valuable factor in immigration selection.</p>
<h2>Competition in the Express Entry Pool Remains Intense</h2>
<p>Large invitation rounds can quickly change the composition of the Express Entry pool, but competition near the top remains significant. Shortly before the latest draws, IRCC data showed approximately 239,645 candidates across all CRS ranges as of June 21, 2026. More than 20,000 had scores between 501 and 600, while another 941 had scores above 600. The highest group often includes provincial nominees, who can receive an additional 600 CRS points after accepting a nomination.</p>
<p>The number of candidates with scores above 500 had also been growing faster than the pool overall. Between May 24 and June 21, the total number of profiles increased by less than one per cent, while the population scoring 501 or higher rose by roughly 14.6 per cent. The figures were recorded before the June 22 and June 23 invitation rounds, so subsequent selections would have removed some high-scoring candidates from the pool. Even so, they reveal why cut-offs can remain elevated despite thousands of invitations. New profiles are continuously entering the system, existing candidates are improving their scores and provincial nominations can suddenly move applicants into the highest ranking bands.</p>
<h2>What This Draw Means for Future Candidates</h2>
<p>The June 23 draw offers a positive signal for people with Canadian work experience, but it should not be interpreted as a guarantee that another 4,000-person round will occur at the same score. IRCC controls the timing, category, size and cut-off of each draw based on immigration targets and policy priorities. Future rounds may focus on the CEC, provincial nominees, candidates with French-language ability or workers in designated occupational categories.</p>
<p>Candidates can still take practical steps to improve their position. Stronger English or French test results may add core and skills-transferability points, while French-language proficiency can provide as many as 50 additional points. Eligible Canadian post-secondary education can add up to 30 points, and a provincial nomination can add 600. Profiles should be updated after changes in employment, education, language results or family circumstances, while expiring documents deserve close attention. Language results must remain valid when the permanent residence application is submitted, not merely when the profile is created. Express Entry profiles also expire after 12 months without an invitation. For candidates near the cut-off, keeping records current and documents ready can be nearly as important as gaining another point.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/10/The-Heroism-of-Canadian-Troops-on-D-Day.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ontario-awards-20-year-deal-for-massive-battery-co-owned-by-first-nation</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ontario Awards 20-Year Deal for Massive Battery Co-Owned by First Nation]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 14:01:53 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ontario-awards-20-year-deal-for-massive-battery-co-owned-by-first-nation</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Ontario’s next wave of electricity infrastructure will include a battery powerful enough to supply a small city during its busiest]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ontario’s next wave of electricity infrastructure will include a battery powerful enough to supply a small city during its busiest hours. The Eagle Lake Power Reserve, planned west of Dryden in Northwestern Ontario, has secured a 20-year capacity contract from the Independent Electricity System Operator.</p>
<p>The facility will be jointly owned by renewable-energy developer Neoen and Eagle Lake First Nation through an equal equity partnership. With a planned capacity of 200 megawatts and 1,600 megawatt-hours of stored energy, the battery is designed to provide sustained power for eight hours. Construction is expected to begin in 2028, followed by commercial operation in 2030. Beyond its imposing size, the project reflects two major shifts in Ontario’s electricity strategy: the rapid rise of grid-scale batteries and a growing expectation that First Nations will participate as owners rather than simply communities consulted during development.</p>
<h2>A 1,600-Megawatt-Hour Battery Near Dryden</h2>
<p>The Eagle Lake Power Reserve will be located approximately 15 kilometres west of Dryden in the District of Kenora. Its physical battery system is expected to have a maximum output of 200 megawatts and store 1,600 megawatt-hours of electricity. Those figures mean the facility could theoretically discharge at its full nameplate output for eight consecutive hours before requiring another charge.</p>
<p>The IESO contract covers 190 megawatts of eight-hour capacity rather than the complete 200-megawatt nameplate rating. That distinction is consistent with the procurement rules, which limit contracted capacity to no more than 95 per cent of a facility’s nameplate capacity. In practical terms, the project is being built slightly larger than the service it is obligated to provide. The difference offers a useful reminder that megawatts and megawatt-hours describe separate characteristics: megawatts measure how much power can be delivered at one moment, while megawatt-hours measure how much total energy can be supplied over time.</p>
<h2>Why Eight Hours Makes a Major Difference</h2>
<p>Battery storage does not generate new electricity. Instead, it shifts electricity from one part of the day to another. The Eagle Lake facility could charge when demand is lower or when the grid has abundant available supply, then discharge during periods when homes, factories, businesses and public buildings are collectively using more power.</p>
<p>Consider a hot weekday when air conditioners, industrial equipment and commercial buildings remain active into the evening. A shorter battery might cover only the sharpest part of that peak. An eight-hour system could continue contributing well beyond the first surge, giving the grid operator more flexibility across an extended period. Under the LT2 procurement structure, contracted facilities are expected to make their capacity available during designated weekday hours. That reliability obligation is central to the deal: Ontario is not merely purchasing battery equipment, but securing a dependable resource that can be called upon when the system is under the greatest pressure.</p>
<h2>Eagle Lake First Nation Will Own Half</h2>
<p>Eagle Lake First Nation and Neoen will each hold a 50 per cent equity interest in the project. That arrangement makes the Nation a co-owner with a direct financial stake, rather than a nearby community receiving only short-term construction work or negotiated benefit payments. Neoen has said the partnership is expected to produce employment, business activity and local spending, although detailed financial projections and job totals have not been publicly released.</p>
<p>Also known as Migisi Sahgaigan, Eagle Lake is an Ojibwe community located southwest of Dryden and is one of 28 First Nations in the Treaty 3 region. The Nation describes care for the land, responsible resource use and consideration of future generations as central community principles. Chief Bernadette Wabange has said the project must be developed in a way that respects the community’s traditional values, culture and relationship with the land. The battery will be Eagle Lake First Nation’s first utility-scale energy project, giving the partnership significance beyond its electrical output.</p>
<h2>What the 20-Year Contract Provides</h2>
<p>The agreement is a capacity contract, meaning the IESO is primarily paying for reliable availability rather than purchasing every unit of energy that passes through the battery. Under the procurement framework, suppliers receive fixed capacity payments based on the contracted number of megawatts and the number of business days in each month. In return, the facility must offer its contracted capacity into Ontario’s electricity market during specified qualifying periods.</p>
<p>A long contract can make an infrastructure project easier to finance because it provides a predictable revenue foundation extending across two decades. That certainty does not remove every commercial risk. The owners will still be responsible for building the facility, maintaining its performance, managing battery degradation and meeting contractual availability requirements. Nevertheless, the agreement transforms the project from a speculative development into a contracted grid asset. For Eagle Lake First Nation, a 50 per cent interest in an asset backed by long-term payments could provide a more durable economic opportunity than benefits concentrated only in the construction phase.</p>
<h2>Part of a 640-Megawatt Battery Sweep</h2>
<p>Eagle Lake Power Reserve was one of three battery projects selected during the first capacity window of Ontario’s Long-Term 2 procurement. Together, the winning facilities represent 640 megawatts of new capacity, exceeding the IESO’s original 600-megawatt target. Each selected project includes 50 per cent Indigenous economic participation.</p>
<p>The largest award went to the planned 300-megawatt Napanee Battery Energy Storage System Phase 2, partnered with the Mississaugas of Scugog Island First Nation. The 150-megawatt Simcoe Battery Project in Norfolk County includes Six Nations of the Grand River and the Mississaugas of the Credit First Nation. Eagle Lake, at 190 contracted megawatts, sits between them. The geographic spread is important: one facility is planned in Eastern Ontario, one in the northwest and one in the southwest. Rather than concentrating the entire procurement in a single electricity zone, the results create a distributed group of storage assets that can respond to needs in different parts of the provincial system.</p>
<h2>Battery Prices Fell Sharply</h2>
<p>The IESO reported that the three LT2 battery projects were secured at a weighted average fixed capacity payment of $563.48 per megawatt for each business day. The operator said that price was 36 per cent below comparable battery capacity purchased through its expedited first long-term procurement and 16 per cent below battery storage selected through the regular Long-Term 1 process.</p>
<p>Those comparisons matter because storage has sometimes been portrayed as an expensive addition to the electricity system. The latest bids suggest that competition, technological improvements and a maturing development market are reducing the cost of securing battery capacity in Ontario. The capacity competition was also open to other eligible technologies, yet all three selected projects were batteries. The government consequently described the results as the lowest-cost electricity-capacity procurement in the province’s history. That does not mean batteries can meet every grid requirement, but it indicates that they have become serious competitors for the specific job of supplying power during extended peak periods.</p>
<h2>Ontario Is Preparing for Much Higher Demand</h2>
<p>The project is arriving as Ontario prepares for a sustained increase in electricity consumption. The IESO’s 2026 planning outlook forecasts that provincial energy demand could grow by approximately 65 per cent by 2050 under its reference scenario. Population growth, industrial development, transportation electrification, heating changes and new commercial loads are all contributing to the long-term trend.</p>
<p>Two emerging sources of demand are particularly notable. The IESO expects electric vehicles to account for 15 per cent of Ontario’s total energy consumption by 2050, while data centres could represent 8.6 per cent. At the same time, Ontario must manage nuclear refurbishment schedules, changing import conditions and new transmission requirements. The system operator expects an eight-terawatt-hour energy need to emerge as early as 2032. Batteries such as Eagle Lake cannot create the additional annual energy required to close that gap, but they can make existing and future generation more useful by moving available electricity into the hours when it has the greatest reliability value.</p>
<h2>Northwestern Ontario Gains a Strategic Asset</h2>
<p>Locating the battery near Dryden gives Northwestern Ontario one of the three major storage projects selected in the latest competition. The site is listed near Oxdrift in an unincorporated part of the District of Kenora, while Eagle Lake First Nation itself is approximately 25 kilometres southwest of Dryden. The surrounding region includes resource industries, dispersed communities and long transmission routes that differ considerably from the dense electricity network of Southern Ontario.</p>
<p>The battery should not be viewed as a stand-alone power source for Dryden or Eagle Lake. It will operate as part of the wider provincial grid and will need electricity from other resources to recharge. Its northern location nevertheless places substantial infrastructure investment in a region where new transmission and industrial development are already prominent issues. Eagle Lake First Nation is also among the Indigenous partners involved in the separate Waasigan transmission project. Although the battery and transmission developments are distinct, together they illustrate how Northwestern communities are becoming increasingly involved in the ownership, development and oversight of major electricity assets.</p>
<h2>The Most Difficult Work Still Lies Ahead</h2>
<p>The contract award is a major milestone, but the battery has not yet been built. Neoen expects construction to begin in 2028, with the facility entering service in 2030. Before then, the partners must complete detailed engineering, financing, environmental and technical studies, permitting, equipment selection, procurement and grid-connection work. Large projects can also encounter changing material prices, supply-chain pressure and construction delays during the years between selection and operation.</p>
<p>Neoen says its standard development process includes technical, economic, legal and environmental assessments, along with engagement involving landowners, governments and local decision-makers. The company finances projects through a combination of equity and long-term debt and generally remains a long-term owner and operator. For the surrounding area, construction could create opportunities for contractors, equipment operators and service businesses. However, the scale and duration of those opportunities will depend on future procurement decisions. The most lasting local impact may ultimately come from Eagle Lake First Nation’s ownership position rather than the temporary workforce assembled to build the site.</p>
<h2>A Test of Ontario’s New Electricity Model</h2>
<p>Ontario expects the latest awards to help push provincial battery-storage capacity above 3,500 megawatts by 2030. Just a few years ago, storage occupied a comparatively small role in Ontario’s power system. It is now becoming part of the province’s core reliability planning, alongside nuclear generation, hydroelectricity, natural gas, renewable power, imports, conservation and new transmission.</p>
<p>Eagle Lake Power Reserve will be an important test of that strategy. It must prove that an eight-hour battery can remain dependable through changing seasons, market conditions and years of repeated charging. The partnership must also demonstrate that equal Indigenous ownership can create meaningful economic value while respecting the community’s relationship with its traditional lands. If the project reaches service on schedule and performs as contracted, its influence could extend far beyond Northwestern Ontario. It would show how long-term procurement, grid-scale storage and First Nations equity participation can be combined in a single piece of essential infrastructure.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/01/Battery-Plants.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="713">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/macklem-says-canadas-3-2-inflation-spike-is-concentrated-in-oil-but-food-prices-remain-a-concern</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Macklem Says Canada’s 3.2% Inflation Spike Is Concentrated in Oil—but Food Prices Remain a Concern]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 13:39:54 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/macklem-says-canadas-3-2-inflation-spike-is-concentrated-in-oil-but-food-prices-remain-a-concern</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s inflation rate has climbed above the Bank of Canada’s control range, but Governor Tiff Macklem is urging Canadians to]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s inflation rate has climbed above the Bank of Canada’s control range, but Governor Tiff Macklem is urging Canadians to look beneath the headline. The Consumer Price Index rose 3.2% year over year in May 2026, its strongest reading in 29 months, as gasoline prices surged amid Middle East supply disruptions. Macklem said the increase was heavily concentrated in oil-related costs rather than evidence of a broad inflation comeback.</p>
<p>That distinction matters for interest rates, but it offers limited comfort at the grocery store. Food prices rose faster than overall inflation, with sharp increases for fresh vegetables and other staples. The central bank may be willing to look through a temporary energy shock, yet persistent increases in essentials could still influence household expectations, wage demands and future policy decisions.</p>
<h2>The 3.2% Reading Was a Sharp Headline Jump</h2>
<p>Annual inflation accelerated from 2.8% in April to 3.2% in May, pushing the headline rate above the Bank of Canada’s 1% to 3% target range for the first time in 29 months. Prices also rose 1.0% from April on an unadjusted basis, the largest monthly increase in 15 months. After seasonal adjustments, the gain was a more moderate 0.5%, led mainly by transportation and recreation-related expenses.</p>
<p>The number was uncomfortable because the Bank aims for the 2% midpoint of its range over time, not merely anything below 3%. Still, a single above-range reading does not automatically signal that inflation has become entrenched. The composition of the increase is crucial. Four of the eight major CPI categories accelerated, but transportation stood apart with a 9.0% annual increase. That concentration helps explain why Macklem described the report differently from the broad, persistent price increases Canadians experienced earlier in the decade.</p>
<h2>Gasoline Did Most of the Heavy Lifting</h2>
<p>Gasoline prices jumped 33.2% from a year earlier and 5.6% in May alone. Statistics Canada linked the increase to supply uncertainty caused by the Middle East conflict and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz. Motorists paid the highest gasoline prices since June 2022, when Russia’s invasion of Ukraine had also created intense uncertainty in global energy markets. Energy prices overall were 22.2% higher than a year earlier.</p>
<p>Gasoline represents only about 4% of the CPI basket, but a price increase of that size can still move the national inflation rate substantially. Excluding gasoline, inflation was 2.2%, up only modestly from 2.0% in April. That gap—3.2% overall versus 2.2% without gasoline—is the statistical foundation for Macklem’s view that the spike was concentrated. The impact also extended into air travel, where fares rose 7.4% annually as airlines faced higher jet-fuel costs.</p>
<h2>Core Inflation Is Still Sending a Calmer Signal</h2>
<p>The Bank of Canada pays close attention to measures designed to filter out unusually large or volatile price movements. CPI-trim, which removes components in the extreme tails of the distribution, remained at 2.0% in May. CPI-median, which tracks the price change at the midpoint of the weighted CPI basket, held at 2.1%. Both readings were unchanged from April and sat close to the central bank’s 2% target.</p>
<p>Other measures told a similar story. Inflation excluding food and energy was 1.6%, while services inflation was 2.0%. Those figures do not suggest that businesses across the economy are suddenly raising prices at an accelerating pace. Macklem therefore said there was no evidence of generalized inflation. The caution is that core measures are backward-looking filters, not guarantees. If elevated fuel costs begin affecting transportation, manufacturing, wages or expectations for long enough, today’s concentrated shock could still gradually spread through the economy.</p>
<h2>Grocery Inflation Is Harder to Dismiss</h2>
<p>Food prices rose 3.8% year over year in May, while food purchased from stores increased 4.3%. Grocery inflation has now exceeded the overall CPI rate for 16 consecutive months, which helps explain why household experience can feel worse than the headline data suggest. Fresh fruit rose 5.3%, fresh vegetables climbed 9.0%, and restaurant food was 3.1% more expensive than a year earlier.</p>
<p>Some increases were especially striking. Tomato prices surged 45.2% after poor weather reduced Mexican supply and planted acreage declined following new U.S. tariffs. Vegetable prices rose 5.5% in May alone, the largest increase for that month since 2008. Broccoli, cauliflower and lettuce also became more expensive. These are frequently purchased essentials, not occasional luxury items, so even a relatively narrow increase can be highly visible. For a household buying produce every week, food inflation is felt immediately and repeatedly in a way that many other CPI categories are not.</p>
<h2>Food Costs Can Move Through the System Slowly</h2>
<p>Bank of Canada research shows that grocery prices often respond to cost pressures with a delay of six to nine months. Food must be produced, processed, packaged, transported, warehoused and sold, while retailers may be working through older inventories or contracts. That lag means today’s shelf prices can reflect exchange-rate movements, weather problems, shipping costs and input prices that developed several months earlier.</p>
<p>The longer view is also important. Grocery prices had risen about 22% since 2022 by the end of 2025, compared with roughly 13% for other consumer prices. Bank research found that the 2025 resurgence was driven largely by imported food costs, including the effect of a weaker Canadian dollar, while domestic pressures remained notable for meat and some farm inputs. The burden is uneven: lower-income households devoted more than 27% of disposable income to food and non-alcoholic beverages in 2024, versus just 5% for the highest-income households.</p>
<h2>Shelter Is Providing Some Offset—But Not Equal Relief</h2>
<p>Shelter inflation eased to 1.7% in May from 1.8% in April, making it one of the forces restraining the headline rate. The mortgage interest cost index declined 0.2% from a year earlier and recorded its 33rd consecutive month of deceleration. Homeowners’ replacement costs fell 2.5%, while other owned-accommodation expenses declined 2.1%. Those movements provided an important offset as housing activity and prices remained soft.</p>
<p>Renters are seeing a different picture. Rent inflation slowed only slightly to 3.5%, although that was its lowest rate since January 2022. Property taxes and other special charges were up 5.6%, adding pressure for many homeowners even as some financing-related costs eased. Regional experiences also varied, but inflation accelerated in every province in May because of gasoline. The effect was larger in Atlantic Canada, where fuel carries a greater weight in household spending. A national average can therefore conceal sharply different household realities.</p>
<h2>The Bank of Canada Faces a Policy Balancing Act</h2>
<p>The Bank held its policy interest rate at 2.25% on June 10, its fifth consecutive pause. Even before the May CPI release, officials said the economy remained soft, with excess supply and only limited evidence that higher energy costs were spreading broadly. Raising rates in response to a temporary oil shock could weaken spending, housing and investment without producing more oil or quickly lowering global fuel prices.</p>
<p>However, the Bank cannot ignore the shock completely. Macklem has said policymakers will look through the immediate energy impact but will not allow it to become persistent inflation. The concern is less about one expensive tank of gasoline than about second-round effects: businesses raising prices to cover fuel bills, workers seeking higher wages, or households beginning to expect rapid inflation to continue. If those pressures broaden, the Bank has warned that consecutive rate increases could become necessary. If they do not, patience remains the less damaging response.</p>
<h2>Oil, Food and Inflation Expectations Will Decide What Comes Next</h2>
<p>The next few inflation reports will help determine whether May was a temporary peak or the start of a more difficult phase. Oil prices fell after diplomatic progress reduced fears of a prolonged supply disruption, and economists noted that cheaper fuel could provide meaningful relief to June’s headline number. Statistics Canada will release the June CPI on July 20, offering the first clear test of that expectation.</p>
<p>Policymakers will look beyond the headline rate. The most important signals will be whether CPI-trim and CPI-median remain near 2%, whether the share of rapidly rising components increases, and whether food inflation begins to cool. The Bank had expected inflation to hover near 3% in the near term before gradually returning toward 2%, but that path depends heavily on energy markets and the absence of broader spillovers. Macklem’s message is therefore cautiously reassuring, not celebratory: the oil shock looks concentrated, while grocery costs remain a genuine pressure point.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Grocery-Bill.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/u-s-visits-to-canada-rise-6-9-as-canadian-cross-border-trips-increase-just-1-8-statcan</guid>      <title><![CDATA[U.S. Visits to Canada Rise 6.9% as Canadian Cross-Border Trips Increase Just 1.8%: StatCan]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 12:34:50 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/u-s-visits-to-canada-rise-6-9-as-canadian-cross-border-trips-increase-just-1-8-statcan</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Cross-border travel between Canada and the United States moved back into positive territory in April 2026, but the recovery was]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Cross-border travel between Canada and the United States moved back into positive territory in April 2026, but the recovery was far from even. Statistics Canada reported that trips to Canada by U.S. residents rose 6.9% from a year earlier, while Canadian-resident return trips from the United States increased only 1.8%.</p>
<p>The contrast captures a border market that is reopening in layers rather than snapping back all at once. American arrivals grew by both automobile and air, while the Canadian increase was powered mainly by road travel. Air trips by Canadians remained lower than a year earlier, and the latest gains came after an exceptionally weak period in 2025. The result is encouraging for tourism businesses, but it is not yet evidence that older travel patterns have fully returned.</p>
<h2>A Two-Way Recovery With Unequal Momentum</h2>
<p>Canadian residents returned from 3.8 million trips abroad in April, up 2.1% from the same month in 2025. It was the first year-over-year increase in total outbound travel since February 2025. Of those trips, approximately 2.4 million were returns from the United States, representing the headline increase of 1.8%.</p>
<p>Travel in the opposite direction showed stronger momentum. U.S. residents made about 1.5 million trips to Canada, an increase of 6.9% and the third consecutive month of year-over-year growth. The totals also show that Canadians still made substantially more U.S. trips than Americans made Canadian trips during April. However, the faster inbound growth rate matters for hotels, restaurants, attractions and border communities that rely on American demand. It signals that the Canadian side of the tourism exchange was recovering more quickly, even though the overall number of Canadian trips south remained larger.</p>
<h2>Canadian Drivers Led the Return South</h2>
<p>The Canadian increase was overwhelmingly a road story. Return trips from the United States by automobile rose 8.1% to 1.5 million. Roughly 65% of those automobile trips were completed the same day, showing how heavily the monthly gain depended on short cross-border movements rather than traditional vacations.</p>
<p>Air travel moved in the opposite direction. Canadian-resident return trips from the United States by air fell 7.1% to 805,900, while cruise-ship returns dropped 38.5% to just 3,900. That split is important because a rise in total crossings can hide very different behaviour underneath. A family driving across the border for shopping, a sporting event or a brief visit represents a different economic pattern from travellers purchasing flights and staying several nights. April therefore looked less like a broad revival of U.S. travel and more like a selective rebound concentrated among people who could reach the border by car.</p>
<h2>Americans Increased Both Road and Air Travel</h2>
<p>The U.S. increase was broader across the two largest modes of travel. American residents made approximately 1.0 million automobile trips to Canada in April, up 6.8% from a year earlier. Air arrivals climbed 7.8% to 366,600, giving Canadian destinations gains from both nearby drivers and longer-distance visitors.</p>
<p>Cruise traffic was the exception. About 22,100 U.S. residents arrived in Canada by cruise ship, down 10.8% year over year. Even with that decline, the overall American total rose strongly enough to produce the 6.9% gain. The combination of higher road and air arrivals is especially notable because those categories serve different markets. Automobile traffic is most accessible to border states and nearby metropolitan areas, while air traffic can bring visitors from across the United States. Growth in both channels gives the inbound recovery a wider base than the Canadian increase, which depended mainly on automobiles.</p>
<h2>Same-Day Crossings Shape the Economic Impact</h2>
<p>More than half of American automobile arrivals were same-day trips. Statistics Canada reported a 56.2% same-day share for U.S. drivers, compared with 65% among Canadian residents returning by automobile. Those proportions mean that a large part of April’s cross-border movement involved travellers who did not stay overnight.</p>
<p>That distinction matters when interpreting what a rising trip count means for local businesses. Same-day visitors can still spend on fuel, meals, shopping, entertainment and admission fees, particularly in communities close to major crossings. They are less likely, however, to create the hotel demand associated with multi-night tourism. The figures therefore offer better news for border retail corridors and day-trip attractions than the headline alone might suggest for the entire hospitality sector. A higher number of crossings is positive, but the mix of trip duration and transportation determines where the economic benefit is most likely to appear.</p>
<h2>The Increase Came From a Depressed Base</h2>
<p>April 2025 was an unusually weak comparison point for Canada–U.S. travel. During that month, Canadian residents returned from 2.3 million U.S. trips, down 29.1% from April 2024. U.S. residents made 1.3 million trips to Canada, a year-over-year decline of 8.9%.</p>
<p>Those steep drops explain why April 2026 can post positive growth without restoring the traffic lost over the previous two years. A 1.8% Canadian increase is meaningful because it ends a long run of declines, but it does not cancel a fall of nearly 30% in the prior comparison period. The broader historical context is equally important: Canadians made 39 million trips to the United States in 2024, accounting for 75% of all Canadian travel abroad. The United States remains deeply embedded in Canadian travel habits, yet the April figures suggest that the recovery toward earlier volumes is proceeding slowly and unevenly.</p>
<h2>March and May Point to a Developing Trend</h2>
<p>The April results sit between a weaker March and a stronger preliminary reading for May. In March 2026, Canadian-resident return trips from the United States were still down 6.4% year over year, while trips to Canada by U.S. residents were up 4.4%. April then delivered the first Canadian increase after 15 consecutive months of decline.</p>
<p>Statistics Canada’s early indicator for May showed further improvement. Canadian-resident return trips from the United States by air and automobile rose 9.5% from May 2025, while U.S.-resident trips to Canada by those modes increased 10.1%. The May numbers are preliminary and cover air and automobile traffic rather than every mode, so they should not be treated as directly identical to the complete April release. Even so, the sequence from March through May suggests that the border market was gaining momentum as spring progressed, with the American side remaining the stronger source of inbound growth.</p>
<h2>Overseas Travel Moved in a Different Direction</h2>
<p>The cross-border recovery did not extend evenly to Canada’s overseas visitor market. Canadian residents returned from 1.4 million trips to overseas countries in April, up 2.7% from a year earlier. At the same time, only 432,700 overseas residents arrived in Canada, a decline of 6.7%.</p>
<p>Most overseas arrivals, 87.9%, came by air. The year-over-year decrease was led by 20,800 fewer visitors from Europe, a 10.2% drop, and 8,200 fewer from Asia, a decline of 6.2%. The United Kingdom remained Canada’s largest overseas source market, while the United Kingdom, France and Mexico together represented 30.4% of overseas arrivals. These figures complicate any simple claim that Canadian tourism was broadly accelerating. U.S. demand strengthened, but overseas arrivals weakened, leaving the country more dependent on its nearest international market during the month. Destinations relying heavily on overseas guests may therefore have experienced conditions quite different from those near the U.S. border.</p>
<h2>Monthly Adjustments Offer a More Cautious Reading</h2>
<p>Year-over-year comparisons show how April 2026 differed from April 2025, but seasonally adjusted data provide another perspective by comparing April with March after accounting for recurring calendar and seasonal patterns. On that basis, Canadian-resident return trips from abroad rose 0.9%, and overseas-resident arrivals increased 0.3%.</p>
<p>U.S.-resident arrivals, however, fell 2.1% from the previous month after seasonal adjustment. That does not contradict the 6.9% year-over-year increase; the two figures answer different questions. American visits were stronger than in April 2025 but weaker than the seasonally adjusted level recorded in March 2026. This is why one monthly release should be read as a snapshot rather than a definitive turning point. The annual comparison supports the case for recovery, while the monthly movement shows that progress can still be uneven. Both measures are necessary to understand whether growth is sustained or simply reflects a low base and normal spring travel patterns.</p>
<h2>What Tourism Businesses Should Watch Next</h2>
<p>For Canadian tourism operators, the most encouraging signal is the breadth of the U.S. increase. More American residents arrived by road and air, and May’s preliminary data suggested that year-over-year growth continued. Border communities may feel the impact first because automobile arrivals accounted for most U.S. visits, while major cities and destinations served by airports stand to benefit if air growth holds.</p>
<p>The limits are equally clear. Canadian air travel to the United States remained down, overseas arrivals to Canada declined, and a large share of automobile traffic consisted of same-day trips. The counts also measure border crossings rather than unique individuals, meaning one person can be counted more than once if they enter Canada repeatedly during the month. The next complete releases will show whether spring’s improvement carried into the peak summer season. For now, April marks a genuine change in direction, but the data support cautious optimism rather than a declaration that cross-border tourism has fully normalized.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/12/border.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="667">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/77-of-gen-z-would-consider-leaving-canadas-biggest-cities-for-cheaper-housing-more-than-double-boomers</guid>      <title><![CDATA[77% of Gen Z Would Consider Leaving Canada’s Biggest Cities for Cheaper Housing—More Than Double Boomers]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 12:33:27 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/77-of-gen-z-would-consider-leaving-canadas-biggest-cities-for-cheaper-housing-more-than-double-boomers</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s largest cities have long offered the strongest concentration of jobs, universities, transit and entertainment. Yet for many young adults,]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s largest cities have long offered the strongest concentration of jobs, universities, transit and entertainment. Yet for many young adults, those advantages are being outweighed by the cost of securing a stable home. New findings show that 77% of Gen Z residents in the Toronto, Montreal and Vancouver regions would consider buying in one of Canada’s 15 most affordable cities if they could find local work or keep working remotely. That compares with just 34% of baby boomers.</p>
<p>The gap is not simply about youthful restlessness. It reflects a housing market in which even falling prices in some expensive regions have not restored affordability. For a generation still building careers, savings and family plans, leaving a major city is increasingly viewed not as surrender, but as a practical route to ownership and a more manageable life.</p>
<h2>The Headline Number Is Striking—but Conditional</h2>
<p>The generational divide is unusually wide. Alongside the 77% of Gen Z respondents open to relocating, 56% of millennials, 51% of Gen X and 34% of baby boomers said they would consider buying a primary residence in one of the 15 lower-cost cities identified by Royal LePage. Gen Z’s figure is therefore more than twice the boomer result, but it should not be read as evidence that three-quarters of young adults are preparing to pack immediately.</p>
<p>The question included an important condition: respondents had to be able to find a job locally or continue working remotely. The results came from an online panel of 900 adults in the greater Toronto, Montreal and Vancouver regions, completed from June 2 to June 4, 2026. Sampling was balanced within each region and weighted to reflect their relative populations. Because it was a non-probability web panel, the findings capture sentiment rather than a precise forecast of future migration. They are best understood as a measure of how seriously affordability has expanded the range of places young people are willing to call home.</p>
<h2>Why Softer Prices Have Not Solved Affordability</h2>
<p>Home prices have eased in two of Canada’s most expensive regions, but the starting point remains daunting. In the first quarter of 2026, the aggregate price was about $1.09 million in the Greater Toronto Area and $1.17 million in Greater Vancouver, despite year-over-year declines of 4.7% and 4.5%. Greater Montreal moved in the opposite direction, rising 3.3% to roughly $645,800. A moderate correction can help at the margins without suddenly making ownership realistic for an early-career buyer.</p>
<p>Royal LePage found that its affordability measure improved in 61 of 62 cities between 2024 and 2026. Even so, “improved” does not necessarily mean affordable. Its calculation assumed a 20% down payment, a three-year fixed mortgage at 4.64% and a 25-year amortization. On a $1.09-million GTA home, the down payment alone would exceed $218,000 under that model. Younger households may therefore see lower-priced regions as the only way to reduce both the monthly payment and the years required to assemble an initial deposit.</p>
<h2>Renters Are the Most Mobile—and the Most Exposed</h2>
<p>Renters showed greater interest in moving than established homeowners: 52% said they would consider buying in one of the 15 affordable cities if work arrangements allowed it. That makes intuitive sense. A renter may still have a lease, friends and a familiar neighbourhood, but usually does not face the added complications of selling a property, timing two transactions or surrendering a favourable mortgage. The practical barriers to leaving can be lower, even when the emotional barriers remain high.</p>
<p>Young Canadians are also disproportionately exposed to the rental market. Statistics Canada has reported that nearly two-thirds of people aged 15 to 29 rent and that this age group devotes a relatively larger share of income to shelter. For a 25-year-old paying major-city rent, the trade-off can become stark: remain close to career networks while saving slowly, or move somewhere a mortgage payment may resemble the rent on a small apartment. Relocation will not work for everyone, but the appeal grows when rent no longer feels like a temporary stage on the path to ownership.</p>
<h2>The Affordable Map Looks Very Different</h2>
<p>The most affordable destinations are not merely suburbs at the edge of Toronto or Vancouver. They stretch across the Prairies, northern Ontario, Quebec and Atlantic Canada. Lethbridge ranked first, with an aggregate home price of $338,700 and an estimated mortgage payment equal to 18.9% of monthly household income. Saint John followed at $265,900 and 19.6%, while Thunder Bay ranked third at $339,900 and 20.3%. Red Deer and Regina completed the top five, each requiring no more than 25% of monthly income under the report’s assumptions.</p>
<p>Those figures explain why a cross-country move can enter the conversation. The price of an entire home in Saint John was less than one-quarter of Greater Vancouver’s aggregate price in the first quarter of 2026. Still, the ranking is a comparison tool, not a complete household budget. It uses provincial median income rather than each buyer’s actual salary and assumes a 20% down payment. Property taxes, heating, insurance, transportation, moving expenses and differences in local wages can materially change the calculation once a household begins planning a real move.</p>
<h2>Jobs Remain the Gatekeeper</h2>
<p>Housing may start the search, but employment usually determines whether a move becomes real. The affordability question itself was conditional on finding local work or retaining a remote position. That caveat matters because lower home prices do not compensate for a large pay cut, an unstable job market or a career path concentrated in Toronto, Montreal or Vancouver. The flexibility created by widespread remote work earlier in the decade has also narrowed as more employers require regular office attendance.</p>
<p>Statistics Canada’s research on actual movers reinforces that point. Among households that moved to another province, 42.5% cited a new job or job transfer, making employment the most common reason. Another 27.6% cited a desire to be closer to family, while only 5.6% of all household moves crossed a provincial border. For Gen Z interprovincial movers specifically, school was cited by 61.1%. These figures show why stated willingness is much higher than completed migration. A cheaper listing can attract attention in minutes; recreating a career, support network and daily routine in another province is a far larger decision.</p>
<h2>Each Big City Has Its Own Exit Route</h2>
<p>Residents of the three major urban regions did not choose the same destinations. In the GTA, 55% were open to buying in a more affordable city. Edmonton was the leading choice at 16%, followed by Thunder Bay at 15%, with Charlottetown and Windsor-Essex tied at 14%. The mix suggests that some households are willing to travel far for a major price reset, while others prefer an Ontario market that preserves easier access to family and professional connections.</p>
<p>In Greater Montreal, 48% would consider relocating, with Sherbrooke attracting 29% and Trois-Rivières 25%. Those choices offer lower prices without requiring a move outside Quebec’s language, legal and cultural environment. Greater Vancouver posted the lowest overall relocation interest at 46%, even though it remained the most expensive region. Edmonton again ranked first at 18%, followed by St. John’s at 12%, with Charlottetown and Lethbridge at 10%. The pattern shows that affordability is only one layer of the decision; distance, identity, climate and the ease of maintaining family ties also shape where a move feels realistic.</p>
<h2>The Generational Gap Started Before Gen Z</h2>
<p>Gen Z’s frustration sits on top of a longer shift already visible among millennials. Statistics Canada found that 16.3% of millennials aged 25 to 39 were living in a census family with their parents in 2021, about double the 8.2% recorded for baby boomers at the same age in 1991. After excluding adults counted as owners simply because they lived in a parent-owned home, the adjusted homeownership rate was 49.9% for millennials, compared with 55.9% for boomers and 56.2% for Gen X.</p>
<p>The pressure was especially pronounced among people in their late 20s. In 2021, 31.1% of Canadians aged 25 to 29 lived with parents, rising to 48.6% in Toronto and 36.9% in Vancouver. Family wealth increasingly affects who can bridge the gap. Bank of Canada research found that the share of first-time-buyer mortgages co-signed by a parent rose from 4% in 2004 to about 11% in 2025. Among the co-signed borrowers studied, 74% would not have qualified for their existing mortgage without that parental backing.</p>
<h2>Cheaper Cities Could Inherit the Pressure</h2>
<p>A large movement of young buyers would create opportunities for smaller cities, but it could also reproduce the same affordability problem in new places. More residents can support local businesses, broaden the tax base and bring skilled workers into communities that have struggled to retain them. At the same time, an influx of buyers with savings or big-city salaries can push up prices faster than local incomes if construction, infrastructure and services do not keep pace.</p>
<p>CMHC’s housing-supply modelling makes that risk explicit: when one city adds homes and becomes more affordable, people may move there, creating additional demand and requiring even more construction. Nationally, CMHC estimates that Canada would need roughly 430,000 to 480,000 housing starts annually through 2035 to restore affordability, compared with a projected pace near 250,000. Starts did rise 6% in 2025, led by record rental construction and more medium-density “missing middle” housing, but ownership-oriented supply weakened in major markets. The 77% result is therefore a warning for both sides: expensive cities must become easier to remain in, while affordable cities must prepare to stay affordable as they grow.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Grande-Prairie-Alberta.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/homebuyers-cut-vacations-and-tap-retirement-savings-as-78-say-ownership-demands-more-sacrifice</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Homebuyers Cut Vacations and Tap Retirement Savings as 78% Say Ownership Demands More Sacrifice]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 12:30:33 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/homebuyers-cut-vacations-and-tap-retirement-savings-as-78-say-ownership-demands-more-sacrifice</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Homeownership has always demanded patience, but for many Canadians the down payment is now being assembled from pieces of life]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Homeownership has always demanded patience, but for many Canadians the down payment is now being assembled from pieces of life they expected to keep: a summer trip, a replacement car, evenings not spent at a second job, and money once reserved for retirement. New RBC findings show that 78% of Canadians believe buying a home requires more sacrifice today than it did for previous generations.</p>
<p>The pressure is especially visible among those hoping to purchase within two years. Large majorities expect to delay major purchases, scale back vacations or rebuild their budgets, while more than half foresee redirecting retirement savings toward a home. The result is a market in which ownership remains emotionally powerful, yet the route to it increasingly tests whether households can reach the front door without weakening the rest of their financial lives.</p>
<h2>Sacrifice Has Become the Price of Entry</h2>
<p>The sense that today’s buyers face a steeper climb is not limited to people actively searching listings. RBC found that 78% of Canadians believe ownership now requires more sacrifice than it did for earlier generations, rising to 83% among those intending to buy within two years. Nearly three-quarters of all respondents also said most first-time buyers experience some degree of financial shock. Those numbers suggest the struggle is no longer viewed as a temporary inconvenience caused by one bad season. It has become part of the national understanding of what buying a home entails.</p>
<p>That perception is easier to understand when set against current prices. The national average sale price reached $702,079 in May 2026, the first time it had moved above $700,000 in 23 months. A buyer does not need to be purchasing at the national average to feel the strain. Even a less expensive property can demand years of saving, a large mortgage and a cash reserve for closing. For many households, the question is no longer simply whether they can qualify, but what must be surrendered to make qualification possible.</p>
<h2>Vacations Are Turning Into Down-Payment Contributions</h2>
<p>Travel is one of the clearest casualties of the homeownership push. Among Canadians intending to buy within two years, 62% said they would postpone or scale back vacations, up from 55% in January. Another 69% expected to delay major purchases such as a vehicle or renovation, a sharp increase from 54% earlier in the year. What once looked like discretionary spending is increasingly being treated as down-payment money that cannot be replaced once it leaves the account.</p>
<p>The trade-off can feel deeply personal. A couple may skip a long-planned trip, keep an aging car for another winter or turn a family celebration into a smaller gathering, not because those experiences lack value, but because the home goal keeps moving ahead of them. At the same time, everyday costs continue to compete for the same dollars. Canada’s Consumer Price Index rose 3.2% year over year in May 2026, while grocery prices increased 4.3% and transportation costs rose 9%. Saving for a home therefore requires cutting optional spending while essential expenses keep making their own claim on household income.</p>
<h2>Buyers Are Rebuilding Their Entire Budgets</h2>
<p>For many prospective buyers, a few cancelled dinners are no longer enough. RBC found that 60% of those planning to purchase within two years expect to completely overhaul their spending and saving habits, up from 55% in January. Another 57% believe they will need a side hustle or second job. Those figures point to a much broader adjustment: homeownership is shaping not just what households buy, but how much they work, how they use their evenings and how much flexibility remains in their monthly budget.</p>
<p>Inflation is making that reset harder. Seventy-one per cent of near-term buyers said it is causing them to save less for a home. That creates a frustrating loop: households cut spending to build a deposit, but higher prices absorb part of the money they hoped to set aside. A second income stream can accelerate the process, yet it also adds fatigue and uncertainty. The buyer may reach the target sooner, but only by accepting a schedule that would be difficult to sustain after mortgage payments, property taxes, repairs and other ownership costs begin.</p>
<h2>Retirement Savings Are Being Pulled Into the Present</h2>
<p>The most consequential sacrifice may be the decision to use money originally intended for later life. Among people expecting to buy within two years, 53% said they would put some retirement savings toward the purchase, up from 49% in January. That choice can make the difference between remaining a renter and assembling a workable down payment, but it also changes the purpose of money that had been set aside to compound over decades.</p>
<p>Federal programs are designed to make that transfer easier. The Home Buyers’ Plan currently allows an eligible person to withdraw up to $60,000 from an RRSP for a qualifying home, with the amount generally repaid over as many as 15 years. Eligible buyers can also use a First Home Savings Account, which provides $8,000 of participation room in the first year an account is opened and a $40,000 lifetime contribution limit. The two programs can be used for the same qualifying purchase. They offer valuable tax advantages, but they do not erase the underlying tension: every dollar redirected toward a home must still be considered alongside retirement security and future cash-flow needs.</p>
<h2>The First Financial Shock Often Arrives at Closing</h2>
<p>The purchase price is only the most visible number. RBC found that 74% of Canadians believe most buyers experience some level of financial shock when purchasing their first home. One reason is that the transaction brings expenses that are easy to underestimate while attention is fixed on the down payment and monthly mortgage. Legal fees, land transfer or registration charges, inspections, adjustments for prepaid taxes and moving costs can arrive in a compressed period.</p>
<p>CMHC advises buyers to plan for closing costs equal to roughly 1.5% to 4% of the selling price. Applied to the May 2026 national average price of $702,079, that range would equal approximately $10,500 to $28,100, separate from the down payment. The exact total varies by province, municipality and property, but the example shows why a buyer who uses every available dollar to complete the purchase can feel squeezed immediately afterward. A successful offer may bring relief and excitement, followed quickly by the realization that appliances fail, roofs age and emergency savings are harder to rebuild once the mortgage begins.</p>
<h2>A Softer Market Does Not Automatically Mean an Affordable One</h2>
<p>There are signs of opportunity, but they do not remove the pressure. Among Canadians intending to buy within two years, 45% said now is the right time to purchase, compared with 27% of Canadians overall. Fifty-eight per cent of near-term buyers believed lower prices would allow them to buy their first or next home, while 54% said the same about lower interest rates. That optimism helps explain why some households are willing to make aggressive sacrifices rather than wait.</p>
<p>Yet a market can become more balanced without becoming inexpensive. Nationally, Canadians were divided over conditions: 27% described a buyer’s market and 36% a seller’s market. Regional views differed sharply, with respondents in British Columbia and Ontario more likely to see buyer-friendly conditions, while majorities in Quebec and Atlantic Canada described a seller’s market. Those differences matter because “Canada’s housing market” is not one experience. A buyer with more negotiating room may still face a price that consumes most available savings, while someone in a tighter region may be sacrificing heavily just to compete.</p>
<h2>The Fear of Missing the Window Adds New Pressure</h2>
<p>Prospective buyers are not only calculating affordability; they are trying to predict whether today’s opportunity will disappear. Fifty-three per cent of those planning to buy within two years said there may be only a small window to benefit from lower prices, and 49% expected interest rates to rise during 2026. At the same time, 64% of Canadians said it is impossible to know the perfect time to buy. The result is a decision shaped by two competing fears: purchasing before the household is ready or waiting until conditions become worse.</p>
<p>Economic uncertainty intensifies that tension. Among near-term buyers, 72% called it their biggest challenge, 75% said it was making them more cautious and 67% worried it would affect their plans. This is where sacrifice can become especially risky. Cancelling a vacation is reversible; exhausting cash reserves or taking on a payment with no margin is not. A household under timing pressure may focus on winning the property rather than preserving room for job changes, rate movements, family needs or unexpected repairs.</p>
<h2>The Strongest Purchase Plan Leaves Something Behind</h2>
<p>Confidence remains surprisingly thin for a decision of this size. Fewer than half of prospective buyers said they feel confident making homebuying decisions in the current market, and only 56% believed they had the information needed to make smart choices. At the same time, 82% of prospective buyers and homeowners approaching renewal said expert advice is essential. The gap suggests that many Canadians are ready to act emotionally before they feel fully prepared financially.</p>
<p>Policy changes can improve access without eliminating trade-offs. Insured 30-year amortizations are available to all first-time buyers and purchasers of new builds, while the insured-mortgage price cap was raised to $1.5 million in December 2024. Longer repayment periods can reduce monthly payments, but buyers still need to evaluate the total commitment, closing costs and the resilience of their budget. The most sustainable version of homeownership is not necessarily the largest mortgage a household can obtain. It is the purchase that still leaves room for retirement contributions, emergencies, ordinary pleasures and a life that does not have to remain permanently on hold.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/08/suburban-home-owner-couple-pet-dog-garden.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/most-canadians-now-see-china-as-a-major-threat-poll-finds</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Most Canadians Now See China as a Major Threat, Poll Finds]]></title>
      <pubDate>Tue, 23 Jun 26 12:25:15 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/most-canadians-now-see-china-as-a-major-threat-poll-finds</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s renewed effort to improve relations with Beijing is colliding with a powerful current of public unease. Newly reported federal]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s renewed effort to improve relations with Beijing is colliding with a powerful current of public unease. Newly reported federal polling found that roughly two-thirds of Canadians consider China a significant threat to the country, placing it just behind Russia and well ahead of Iran, India and Pakistan.</p>
<p>The findings reveal a complicated national mood rather than a simple rejection of China. Canadians remain concerned about cyberattacks, foreign interference and political intimidation, yet many also support expanding trade beyond the United States. That tension presents Ottawa with an increasingly difficult assignment: pursue economic opportunities with the world’s second-largest economy without appearing to minimize the security risks identified by Canada’s own intelligence agencies.</p>
<h2>The Headline Number—and What It Actually Measures</h2>
<p>Research commissioned by the Canadian Security Intelligence Service and conducted by EKOS Research Associates found that 66% of respondents considered China a significant threat to Canada. Russia ranked slightly higher at 70%, while Iran registered 34%, India 33% and Pakistan 21%. The same research found that 52% believed Canada had become more dangerous than it was five years earlier. Together, the numbers suggest that international instability is no longer viewed as something happening safely beyond Canada’s borders.</p>
<p>The wording matters. Respondents evaluated several countries individually rather than selecting only one enemy, meaning concern about China could exist alongside concern about Russia, India or Iran. The word “threat” can also cover many possibilities, from cyberespionage and election interference to economic coercion and military rivalry. It does not necessarily mean that two-thirds of Canadians expect an armed confrontation. The more defensible interpretation is that China is now widely regarded as a country capable of harming important Canadian interests, even among people who may still favour diplomatic contact or commercial cooperation.</p>
<h2>Concern About China Has Been Building for Years</h2>
<p>The latest result is not an isolated burst of anxiety. An earlier CSIS-commissioned study, conducted by EKOS in January 2025, asked Canadians to rank countries according to the threat they posed. China was placed first by 47% of respondents, compared with 27% who selected Russia. When first- and second-place rankings were combined, 74% put China in one of the top two positions. That study involved 2,045 respondents and was designed to track attitudes previously measured in 2018 and 2021.</p>
<p>Perceptions of the broader security environment were similarly unsettled. In the 2025 research, a majority said Canada had become more dangerous over the preceding five years. The latest 52% reading is therefore better understood as evidence of sustained apprehension than proof of a sudden surge. For many households, “national security” once evoked distant wars or airport screening. It now includes hacked municipal systems, stolen corporate research, manipulated social-media feeds and reports that people living in Canada have been pressured because of their political activities or family connections abroad.</p>
<h2>Cybersecurity Makes a Distant Rivalry Feel Local</h2>
<p>China’s cyber capabilities provide one of the clearest explanations for the public’s concern. The Canadian Centre for Cyber Security describes the People’s Republic of China as the most sophisticated and active state cyber threat facing Canada. Its assessment links Chinese state-backed operations to espionage, intellectual-property theft, malign influence and transnational repression. The agency says the scale, technical ability and ambition of the Chinese cyber program are unmatched among Canada’s state adversaries.</p>
<p>Those warnings are not limited to classified federal networks. In 2025, the Cyber Centre cautioned that provincial, territorial, Indigenous and municipal governments were continuing targets for Chinese cyberespionage. Local networks can contain residents’ personal information, infrastructure plans and records of discussions with other governments. A compromised router in a small public organization may sound less dramatic than a spy thriller, but it can provide access to communications and sensitive data. This is where an abstract geopolitical rivalry enters everyday life: through the systems used to deliver public services, protect research, operate businesses and store information about ordinary Canadians.</p>
<h2>Foreign Interference Changed the National Conversation</h2>
<p>Public concern also grew as Canadians learned more about attempts by foreign governments to influence domestic politics. The federal Foreign Interference Commission concluded in 2025 that China was the most active perpetrator of state-based interference targeting Canada’s democratic institutions. Its report described the use of diplomatic personnel, state agencies, online activity, community organizations and proxies to advance Beijing’s interests or suppress criticism of the Chinese Communist Party.</p>
<p>The commission nevertheless drew an important distinction between attempted interference and control of an election result. Justice Marie-Josée Hogue found no evidence that a foreign actor changed which party formed government in either the 2019 or 2021 federal election. A small number of individual ridings may have been affected, but the evidence did not permit a definitive conclusion. The broader harm was more difficult to dismiss. Interference can discourage political participation, place pressure on diaspora communities and weaken confidence in democratic institutions. For a Canadian resident worried that overseas relatives could face consequences for something said in Canada, the issue is personal rather than theoretical.</p>
<h2>Trade Interests Pull Canadians in the Other Direction</h2>
<p>Security concern has not eliminated the economic case for engaging China. China was Canada’s second-largest single-country merchandise trading partner in 2025, with two-way trade worth approximately $124.8 billion. Canadian exports accounted for $34.1 billion, while imports reached $90.6 billion. Farmers, seafood producers, resource companies, retailers and manufacturers all have a direct interest in whether goods continue moving between the two countries.</p>
<p>That commercial reality is reflected in public opinion. A June 2026 Research Co. poll found that 59% of Canadians believed the country should seriously consider expanding trade with China, while 28% disagreed. The finding emerged as Canada searched for markets beyond the United States during a period of tariff conflict and economic uncertainty. A Prairie farmer selling canola and an Ontario autoworker concerned about Chinese electric vehicles may therefore interpret the same relationship very differently. Canadians can regard China as a security risk while also believing that refusing to trade with it would be economically unrealistic. Those positions are uncomfortable, but they are not contradictory.</p>
<h2>Carney’s China Reset Faces a Trust Problem</h2>
<p>Prime Minister Mark Carney attempted to move the relationship onto more stable ground during a January 2026 visit to Beijing, the first by a Canadian prime minister since 2017. Canada and China announced a strategic partnership built around economic cooperation, energy, public safety, multilateral issues and people-to-people ties. They also reached a preliminary trade arrangement that sharply reduced Chinese tariffs on Canadian canola seed and eased barriers affecting several other agricultural products.</p>
<p>Many Canadians initially responded favourably to the economic outcome. Angus Reid Institute polling conducted shortly after the trip found that 65% considered the agreement good, compared with 22% who viewed it negatively. The proportion favouring cautious engagement with China had risen to 51%, while only 23% wanted China treated primarily as an enemy or threat. Those results differ sharply from the newer CSIS figures because the questions measure different ideas. Supporting a negotiated trade arrangement does not require trusting Beijing, just as identifying a security threat does not require ending diplomatic relations. Carney’s challenge is to persuade Canadians that engagement will be controlled rather than naïve.</p>
<h2>Different Polls Can Produce Very Different Threat Rankings</h2>
<p>Another national poll illustrates why individual percentages require context. In research conducted for Bloomberg News between January 31 and February 4, 2026, Nanos asked respondents to select the single country posing the greatest immediate threat to Canadian security. The United States was chosen by 55%, compared with 15% for China and 14% for Russia. That result reflected an extraordinary period of Canada–U.S. tension and forced respondents to choose only one answer.</p>
<p>The CSIS research used a broader rating approach, allowing multiple countries to be considered significant threats. Under that format, China reached 66% and Russia 70%. Neither result automatically invalidates the other. One measures which country was uppermost in Canadians’ minds at a particular moment; the other measures whether each country crossed a threshold of concern. Polls are snapshots shaped by wording, timing and the choices offered. The underlying message is that Canadians no longer organize the world neatly into permanent friends and enemies. Even the United States can be viewed as an immediate danger while China remains a persistent security concern.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Will Have to Practise Selective Engagement</h2>
<p>The findings do not provide the government with a mandate for either unconditional cooperation or complete separation. A more realistic approach would distinguish ordinary commerce from sectors involving sensitive technology, personal data, critical minerals, telecommunications, defence applications and strategically important research. Investment screening, stronger cybersecurity and protections for people facing foreign intimidation can operate alongside agricultural exports, diplomacy and collaboration on global problems.</p>
<p>Ottawa must also communicate those boundaries clearly. Canadians are more likely to accept engagement when they can see which activities are permitted, which are restricted and what consequences will follow when rules are broken. The Foreign Interference Commission warned that public confidence itself can be damaged when information is incomplete or institutional responses appear uncertain. China will remain too economically important to ignore and too strategically powerful to treat casually. The poll’s most significant message is therefore not that Canadians demand isolation. It is that cooperation with Beijing now carries a heavy burden of proof—and that economic gains alone may not be enough to earn public trust.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/Strengthened-Trade-Relations-with-China.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/poilievre-says-canada-has-too-many-awareness-months-dividing-people-by-race-and-gender</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Poilievre Says Canada Has Too Many Awareness Months Dividing People by Race and Gender]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 22:41:08 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/poilievre-says-canada-has-too-many-awareness-months-dividing-people-by-race-and-gender</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A calendar question at a West Vancouver town hall quickly became a much larger argument about Canadian identity. Conservative Leader]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A calendar question at a West Vancouver town hall quickly became a much larger argument about Canadian identity. Conservative Leader Pierre Poilievre said the country has accumulated too many cause-based awareness months and argued that governments should stop sorting people into political categories based on race, gender, sexual orientation or other personal characteristics.</p>
<p>His remarks came after a question comparing the attention given to Pride with the visibility of Men’s Health Month, and amid a separate discussion about a student who felt unfairly labelled a “colonizer.” The response drew applause in the room, but outside it reopened a familiar national divide: whether identity-focused commemorations encourage understanding or deepen the very divisions they are meant to address.</p>
<h2>The Town Hall Exchange That Sparked the Debate</h2>
<p>Poilievre made the remarks during a property-rights town hall at the Grosvenor Theatre in West Vancouver on Friday, June 19, 2026. The event was advertised by the Conservative Party and featured Poilievre alongside Stephen Curran and Thomas Isaac. During the gathering, he was asked whether Pride Month was overshadowing Men’s Health Month. Poilievre responded that there were now so many months devoted to particular causes that it had become difficult to keep track of them, before returning to his broader message that Canadians should be treated as individuals rather than representatives of demographic groups.</p>
<p>Coverage of the gathering also highlighted a young attendee’s concern about being described as a colonizer because of his background. That detail gave the exchange a more personal edge. Rather than discussing commemorative dates as an abstract government practice, Poilievre framed the issue around how identity language can make an individual feel blamed for events that happened before that person was born. Supporters applauded because the answer reflected a frustration they believe is often dismissed: that public institutions can promote inclusion while still making some people feel categorized or morally judged.</p>
<h2>Why June Feels Especially Crowded</h2>
<p>The timing made Poilievre’s argument easier to understand, even for Canadians who disagree with his conclusion. The federal commemorative calendar identifies June as National Indigenous History Month, Italian Heritage Month, Filipino Heritage Month and Portuguese Heritage Month. June also launches Canada’s broader Pride Season, which runs through the summer, and includes National Indigenous Peoples Day, Canadian Multiculturalism Day and several other commemorative dates. Health Canada separately recognizes June as Men’s Health Month and maintains a calendar containing many disease, disability and public-health campaigns.</p>
<p>Those labels do not all carry the same legal or institutional weight. Some were established through parliamentary motions or federal declarations, some through legislation, and others began with charities, professional associations or community groups. Health Canada explicitly notes that inclusion on its promotion calendar does not mean every listed event is formally endorsed by the department. That distinction matters because the phrase “awareness month” can make the calendar sound like a single government program when it is actually a patchwork. Still, the overlap is real, and it creates competition for media attention, corporate campaigns, school programming and political statements.</p>
<h2>The Equality Argument Behind Poilievre’s Position</h2>
<p>Poilievre’s answer rests on a straightforward principle: equal citizenship should come before group identity. In that view, governments protect unity by applying the same rules to everyone and judging people by their actions rather than their ancestry, sex or orientation. The Canadian Human Rights Act already prohibits discrimination on grounds including race, national or ethnic origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability and age. Poilievre’s political argument is that this legal commitment to equal treatment should also shape the language and rituals of public institutions.</p>
<p>The difficult part is that equal treatment does not automatically produce equal experiences. Human-rights bodies distinguish between direct discrimination and policies that appear neutral but create unequal effects. That is where the debate moves beyond slogans. Poilievre’s supporters tend to see identity-based programming as a risk to social cohesion, especially when it assigns collective guilt or turns personal characteristics into political credentials. Defenders of those programs argue that ignoring group-based patterns can preserve disadvantages that are already embedded in workplaces, schools, health care and policing. Both sides use the word equality, but they often mean different methods of achieving it.</p>
<h2>A Tension Inside Conservative Messaging</h2>
<p>Critics will point out that Poilievre and the Conservative Party have repeatedly participated in the same commemorative culture he is now questioning. As leader, he has issued statements marking Black History Month, Sikh Heritage Month, Italian Heritage Month and Portuguese Heritage Month. Those messages praised the achievements of particular communities, encouraged Canadians to learn their histories and described their contributions as part of the country’s shared national story. That record makes the new criticism more complicated than a simple rejection of all heritage observances.</p>
<p>The timing also followed fresh parliamentary activity. Arab Heritage Month became federal law after Bill S-227 received royal assent on June 18, 2026, one day before the West Vancouver event. A bill proposing Somali Heritage Month had been introduced in the House of Commons earlier in June, while Parliament was also considering measures involving Ukrainian, Caribbean and Christian heritage months. Poilievre can argue that celebrating a community is different from endlessly expanding an official calendar or dividing people into opposing camps. His opponents can answer that politicians often embrace these observances when courting communities, then criticize identity politics when speaking to another audience. That tension is likely to follow him.</p>
<h2>Why Supporters Defend Identity-Based Commemorations</h2>
<p>Many of Canada’s best-known heritage months were created because important parts of national history were routinely left out of classrooms, public ceremonies and mainstream media. The House of Commons unanimously recognized February as Black History Month in 1995 after a motion introduced by Jean Augustine, the first Black Canadian woman elected to Parliament. Asian Heritage Month was formally designated after a Senate motion in 2001 and a federal declaration in 2002. National Indigenous History Month is intended to highlight the histories, cultures, resilience and diversity of First Nations, Inuit and Métis peoples.</p>
<p>For supporters, these observances are not meant to reduce Canadians to race or gender. They are intended to widen the national story. A student may learn about the Komagata Maru, historic Black settlements in Nova Scotia, the legacy of residential schools or the legal battles that expanded women’s rights because a school, museum or public broadcaster creates dedicated programming. The strongest version of that argument is civic rather than partisan: people can share a national identity while learning that citizenship was not always experienced equally. The risk, however, is that education becomes ritualized branding—logos, flags and prepared statements—without deeper knowledge or policy change.</p>
<h2>What the Data Says About Unequal Treatment</h2>
<p>The case for continued attention to discrimination is supported by national data. Statistics Canada reported that, using pooled survey results from 2021 to 2024, 51 per cent of racialized people aged 15 and older said they had experienced discrimination or unfair treatment during the previous five years. The comparable figure for non-racialized people was 27 per cent. Police-reported hate crimes motivated by race or ethnicity increased to 2,377 incidents in 2024, while 658 incidents were recorded as targeting sexual orientation. Police data capture only incidents reported to and identified by authorities, but they still show that identity-based hostility has not disappeared.</p>
<p>The patterns also appear in essential services. In 2024, about 24 per cent of First Nations people living off reserve, 23 per cent of Inuit and 18 per cent of Métis reported unfair treatment, racism or discrimination from a health-care professional in the previous year. Statistics Canada has also found that 29.7 per cent of 2SLGBTQ+ people rated their mental health as fair or poor, compared with 9.1 per cent of people outside that population. These findings do not prove that an awareness month fixes the problem. They do explain why many communities reject the idea that race, gender and orientation have become irrelevant to public policy or daily life.</p>
<h2>Symbolism, Results and the Political Stakes</h2>
<p>Research offers a mixed verdict on awareness campaigns. Studies of health observances have found that some produce noticeable increases in internet searches and public interest, while many others generate little measurable change. Breast-cancer campaigns have repeatedly shown strong search effects, but broader reviews indicate that visibility is uneven and that knowledge does not always translate into behaviour. Campaigns are more likely to matter when they are sustained, clearly targeted and connected to services, funding, education or practical action. A coloured logo for four weeks is not the same as a measurable improvement.</p>
<p>That evidence leaves room for both sides of Poilievre’s argument. He is tapping into fatigue with symbolic politics, crowded calendars and messaging that can feel compulsory or accusatory. His critics are responding to a different concern: that removing public recognition can make already overlooked histories and inequalities easier to ignore. The most constructive question is therefore not whether Canada should recognize communities at all, but what each observance accomplishes. A month that teaches history, connects people with support or produces institutional change has a defensible purpose. One that exists mainly for political statements and corporate branding is far more vulnerable to Poilievre’s criticism.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/shutterstock_2620037229-scaled.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="2560" height="1707">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/joly-tells-chinese-ev-makers-to-build-where-you-sell-as-ottawa-sets-four-conditions</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Joly Tells Chinese EV Makers to ‘Build Where You Sell’ as Ottawa Sets Four Conditions]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 15:33:33 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/joly-tells-chinese-ev-makers-to-build-where-you-sell-as-ottawa-sets-four-conditions</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s courtship of Chinese electric-vehicle manufacturers is no longer simply about opening dealership doors. Industry Minister Mélanie Joly travelled to]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s courtship of Chinese electric-vehicle manufacturers is no longer simply about opening dealership doors. Industry Minister Mélanie Joly travelled to China in June to meet companies including BYD, Chery, Geely and Shanghai Launch Automotive Technology, carrying a message that Ottawa wants investment tied to Canadian production. The push follows Canada’s decision to admit up to 49,000 Chinese EVs annually at the 6.1 per cent most-favoured-nation tariff rate, replacing the 100 per cent surtax for vehicles within the quota.</p>
<p>Ottawa now faces a difficult balancing act: make advanced EVs more affordable, attract new factories and reduce reliance on the United States without hollowing out a sector that supports more than 500,000 Canadian workers. Joly’s answer is a four-part test designed to ensure that market access produces more than imported cars and showroom jobs.</p>
<h2>Majority Canadian Ownership Would Keep Control at Home</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s first condition is structural: any proposed Chinese EV manufacturing venture should be organized as a joint venture with majority Canadian ownership. That requirement is meant to ensure that a Canadian partner has more than a ceremonial role. A factory can create construction and assembly jobs while decisions about product design, sourcing, software and future investment remain elsewhere. Majority ownership gives Ottawa a clearer route to insist that strategic decisions, governance and a meaningful share of the economic value stay in Canada. It also fits the federal government’s broader claim that the new Canada-China automotive relationship should generate domestic manufacturing rather than merely restore imports. The distinction matters because Canada has already offered substantial support to build an EV and battery supply chain. A locally registered operation that only performs final assembly would not necessarily create the industrial capabilities taxpayers were promised.</p>
<p>The condition is also likely to be the hardest one to secure. BYD executive vice-president Stella Li said earlier in 2026 that the company was studying Canadian manufacturing but did not believe a joint venture would work, indicating that BYD would prefer to own and operate a plant itself. That position reflects the company’s highly integrated model, under which it produces important components including batteries, motors and semiconductors. Ottawa has already shown resistance to arrangements that appear too shallow. When a possible Stellantis-Leapmotor plan for Brampton surfaced, Joly rejected the idea of bringing vehicles into Canada largely as kits for local assembly. Even a majority-owned Canadian venture, however, would not automatically guarantee technology transfer. Analysts at the Asia Pacific Foundation of Canada have warned that ownership on paper could still leave the Chinese partner controlling platforms, battery architecture, source code and intellectual property. The real test will be whether Canadian ownership comes with Canadian capability.</p>
<h2>Canadian Labour Standards Would Put Workers at the Centre</h2>
<p>The second condition is that any Chinese-backed plant respect Canadian labour standards. On the surface, that may sound automatic: a factory in Ontario or another province would already be subject to employment, health-and-safety and labour-relations laws. Joly’s decision to state it explicitly is therefore political as well as legal. Ottawa is trying to reassure workers that new investment will not be built around imported employment practices, temporary workforces that bypass local hiring or a race to the bottom on wages and conditions. The government says Canada’s auto sector supports more than 500,000 workers, including approximately 125,000 direct manufacturing jobs, and contributes more than $16 billion a year to national GDP. For communities built around assembly and parts plants, the quality and permanence of jobs can matter as much as the number announced at a groundbreaking ceremony.</p>
<p>International experience explains why the issue has become a formal guardrail. In Brazil, labour authorities alleged that 163 Chinese workers employed by a contractor at a BYD factory construction site had been brought into the country irregularly and subjected to conditions that violated local law. BYD later pledged to comply with Brazilian labour requirements, while the contractor disputed the authorities’ characterization; legal proceedings and regulatory disputes followed. The Canadian condition is not a verdict on every Chinese automaker or overseas project, but it signals that Ottawa expects responsibility to extend through contractors and supply chains. In practical terms, a credible agreement would need transparent hiring, enforceable workplace protections, skills training and clear accountability for subcontractors. It would also have to win at least some confidence from Canadian unions and host communities. A factory that arrives with impressive production targets but weak local trust would struggle to deliver the durable industrial foothold Ottawa is seeking.</p>
<h2>Canadian Parts Must Be More Than a Symbolic Add-On</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s third condition requires Chinese EV ventures to use Canadian parts. This is the point that turns local assembly into industrial policy. Canada’s automotive economy is not built only around final assembly lines; it includes tooling companies, battery-material projects, software developers and major suppliers such as Magna, Linamar and Martinrea. The federal government says more than 60 per cent of Canadian-made auto parts and over 90 per cent of Canadian-made vehicles are exported to the United States. That deep integration has created wealth, but it has also left the industry exposed to American tariffs and policy shifts. Bringing Chinese manufacturers into Canada could diversify customers for domestic suppliers, but only if purchase orders flow to Canadian plants rather than arriving in shipping containers alongside nearly completed vehicles.</p>
<p>Joly has pointed to Magna’s arrangement with XPeng in Austria as one possible model. Magna began assembling two XPeng electric models at its Graz operation in 2025, giving the Chinese company localized European production and the Canadian supplier additional manufacturing work. The example demonstrates how an established contract manufacturer can help a foreign brand enter a market quickly. It also exposes the limits of assembly alone. Public announcements describe Magna as the assembler but do not identify a transfer of XPeng’s core software, battery technology or intellectual property. For Canada, a strong local-content rule would therefore need more precision than the phrase “use Canadian parts.” Ottawa would have to determine which components qualify, how much domestic value is required and whether batteries, power electronics, software, steel, aluminum and engineering services count. Without measurable thresholds, a few locally sourced seats or body panels could satisfy the optics while the highest-value systems remain imported. The condition will matter only if it creates repeat business, supplier investment and engineering knowledge that stay after the first model cycle ends.</p>
<h2>Secure Software and Protected Data Are the New Safety Test</h2>
<p>The fourth condition moves beyond traditional manufacturing: vehicle software must be secure and users’ data must be protected. Modern vehicles are connected computers that can collect location history, driving behaviour, contact information, entertainment choices and other personal data. They may also receive over-the-air software updates and communicate with manufacturers, mobile applications and outside service providers. Canada’s Privacy Commissioner has warned that connected-vehicle information can be transferred or stored in foreign jurisdictions, where it may become accessible under different legal and national-security regimes. Transport Canada has likewise made vehicle cybersecurity a policy priority, emphasizing risk management, safeguards, monitoring, incident response and recovery across a vehicle’s life cycle.</p>
<p>This requirement may be the most technically complex of the four because Ottawa has not yet publicly spelled out the compliance test for a Chinese-Canadian EV venture. A meaningful framework would have to answer practical questions: Where is Canadian driver data stored? Who can access it? Which company controls over-the-air updates? Can independent experts audit critical software? What happens when a vulnerability is discovered, and can a foreign parent company remotely disable or materially alter vehicle functions? Those questions apply to all connected automakers, not only Chinese brands, but Chinese investment attracts greater scrutiny because Canada is simultaneously weighing economic opportunity and national-security risk. Software security also connects back to ownership. A plant may be majority Canadian-owned and filled with Canadian parts while still depending on a foreign partner for code, cloud services and digital architecture. Ottawa’s final condition recognizes that the most valuable and sensitive part of a modern EV may not be stamped into metal at all. It may be the invisible system that controls the car and the information flowing through it.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/11/Chery-Tiggo-8-Pro.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.
]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/carney-welcomes-canada-croatia-drone-deal-as-bilateral-trade-jumps-500</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Carney Welcomes Canada–Croatia Drone Deal as Bilateral Trade Jumps 500%]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 15:07:20 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/carney-welcomes-canada-croatia-drone-deal-as-bilateral-trade-jumps-500</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A relationship once driven largely by cultural ties and tourism is becoming increasingly commercial, technological and strategic. Prime Minister Mark]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A relationship once driven largely by cultural ties and tourism is becoming increasingly commercial, technological and strategic. Prime Minister Mark Carney and Croatian Prime Minister Andrej Plenković are placing defence technology near the centre of their countries’ growing partnership, with Croatian drone manufacturer Orqa and Canadian company Remote Robotic preparing a strategic agreement involving artificial intelligence, unmanned systems and military training support.</p>
<p>The announcement arrives as both governments look for dependable partners in an increasingly unsettled global economy. However, the headline-grabbing 500% trade figure requires context: it originated from an earlier increase in Canadian exports to Croatia, rather than a recent fivefold jump in all two-way trade. Even so, newer aircraft, shipbuilding and technology deals show that commercial ties have advanced well beyond their historically modest base.</p>
<h2>A Croatian Visit With Bigger Commercial Stakes</h2>
<p>Plenković’s June 22–24 visit to Canada was designed as more than a ceremonial meeting between two NATO allies. His itinerary included talks with Carney in Ottawa, meetings with business leaders, engagement with Croatian communities in Ontario and an appearance at the University of Toronto’s Munk School. Defence, technology, tourism and economic cooperation were all identified as priorities.</p>
<p>The timing added an unusually public backdrop. Plenković was also scheduled to attend Croatia’s World Cup match against Panama in Toronto, giving the visit cultural and sporting significance alongside its diplomatic purpose. Yet the most consequential discussions were expected to happen away from the stadium. Croatian Economy Minister Ante Šušnjar and Tourism and Sports Minister Tonči Glavina accompanied the prime minister, while a Croatian-Canadian business forum was expected to bring together approximately 50 companies. That combination of political leaders, commercial representatives and diaspora organizations illustrates how both governments are trying to turn a historically friendly relationship into a more structured economic partnership.</p>
<h2>The Drone Partnership at the Centre of the Visit</h2>
<p>The planned agreement brings together Orqa, a Croatian company based in Osijek, and Remote Robotic, a Canadian enterprise robotics business headquartered in Mississauga. Croatian government reporting described it as a strategic defence-industry partnership involving sovereign artificial intelligence, advanced manufacturing of unmanned aircraft systems and support for Canadian Armed Forces training.</p>
<p>Public reporting ahead of the meeting described the agreement as scheduled to be signed under government auspices. That distinction matters because a company partnership is not necessarily the same as a completed Canadian government procurement contract. No publicly disclosed purchase quantity, contract price or delivery schedule accompanied the initial announcement. Its immediate significance is therefore industrial and strategic: a growing Croatian technology company is establishing a closer relationship with a Canadian operator that already works with drones, land robots and remote systems. For both sides, the agreement may provide a platform for future manufacturing, integration, training and commercialization opportunities.</p>
<h2>Why Orqa Has Attracted International Attention</h2>
<p>Orqa began as a Croatian technology startup focused on first-person-view equipment and unmanned aircraft components. It has since pursued expansion beyond Croatia through manufacturing and technology partnerships in several international markets. The company says its products and components are used in dozens of countries, including NATO member states, while its broader strategy emphasizes greater control over manufacturing and supply chains.</p>
<p>That approach fits a wider shift in defence technology. Governments increasingly want sensitive systems to rely on secure components, trusted suppliers and production networks that can be maintained during geopolitical disruptions. Orqa has responded by expanding its manufacturing ambitions and establishing partnerships outside Croatia, including arrangements connected to production in the United States and cooperation with Ukrainian industry. Its Canadian agreement follows that same model: rather than simply shipping a finished product overseas, the company is seeking local partners capable of providing integration, operational support and access to domestic institutions. For Croatia, that represents an export of specialized knowledge from a smaller European economy into a larger allied market.</p>
<h2>What “Sovereign AI” Means in This Context</h2>
<p>“Sovereign AI” has become a frequent phrase in government and technology announcements, but its meaning is broader than national ownership of an artificial-intelligence model. It generally refers to maintaining meaningful domestic or allied control over data, computing infrastructure, software, intellectual property and the systems used to deploy AI. In defence and public-safety settings, those considerations can be especially important.</p>
<p>Canada has already made technological sovereignty a central part of its industrial policy. Its Defence Industrial Strategy identifies digital systems, sensors, training, simulation and uncrewed autonomous systems as priority capabilities. The federal government has also announced more than $900 million for defence-related innovation, including a new drone innovation hub and support for dual-use technologies. Against that backdrop, cooperation with a Croatian company is not necessarily inconsistent with a “buy Canadian” approach. The government’s strategy also permits collaboration with trusted allies when partnerships strengthen Canadian production, expertise and supply-chain resilience. The key test will be how much development, employment, intellectual property and long-term support ultimately remain in Canada.</p>
<h2>The 500% Trade Figure Needs Important Context</h2>
<p>The claim that Canada–Croatia trade jumped 500% can easily be misunderstood. The documented figure dates to a 2019 visit by then-Croatian president Kolinda Grabar-Kitarović. In an interview after meeting Canadian leaders, she said then-prime minister Justin Trudeau had highlighted a 500% increase in Canadian exports to Croatia. That was not the same as saying total bilateral trade had recently risen fivefold.</p>
<p>The distinction is important because percentage increases can appear dramatic when they begin from a small base. Canada and Croatia have traditionally described their commercial relationship as modest but growing. More recent trade figures nevertheless show substantial progress. United Nations trade data indicate that Canadian merchandise exports to Croatia reached approximately US$216 million in 2025. Aircraft and spacecraft accounted for roughly US$181 million—more than four-fifths of the total. Large individual purchases can therefore transform annual trade figures between two comparatively small trading partners. The 500% figure captures genuine growth, but it should not be treated as a current measure of the entire relationship.</p>
<h2>CETA Helped Create a Clearer Path for Business</h2>
<p>Croatia has been an enthusiastic supporter of the Comprehensive Economic and Trade Agreement between Canada and the European Union. It became the third EU member state to ratify CETA nationally, doing so on June 30, 2017. The agreement provisionally entered into force later that year and reduced or eliminated barriers across a wide range of goods and services.</p>
<p>CETA does not guarantee that companies will find customers, but it gives businesses a clearer framework for tariffs, market access and commercial rules. That can be particularly valuable for smaller countries whose companies may have limited experience operating across the Atlantic. Croatian firms gain more predictable access to Canada, while Canadian companies can use Croatia as an entry point into an EU member state with connections to Central and southeastern Europe. The Orqa partnership shows how the relationship is moving beyond traditional merchandise exports. Instead of being centred only on products crossing a border, newer deals can include software, technical knowledge, training, maintenance and collaborative development.</p>
<h2>Aircraft and Ships Are Already Changing the Numbers</h2>
<p>Defence technology is only one part of the commercial story. Croatia Airlines has been renewing its fleet with Airbus A220 aircraft assembled in Mirabel, Quebec. Those aircraft help explain why aerospace products dominated Canadian exports to Croatia in 2025. A single fleet program can be worth far more than years of smaller consumer-goods transactions, producing a sudden rise in bilateral statistics.</p>
<p>Trade has also been flowing in the opposite direction. Croatia’s Treći maj shipyard in Rijeka has been building vessels for Algoma Central Corporation, a Canadian marine transportation company. Ships and floating structures became a major Croatian export category to Canada in 2025. Together, the aircraft and shipbuilding deals give the relationship a tangible human dimension: workers in Quebec assemble aircraft for a Croatian carrier, while shipbuilders on the Adriatic construct vessels for a Canadian operator. These transactions support skilled employment, supplier networks and long-term maintenance relationships that can continue well after the initial delivery.</p>
<h2>Defence Cooperation Fits Carney’s Diversification Strategy</h2>
<p>Carney’s government has repeatedly linked national security with economic resilience. Canada’s Defence Industrial Strategy aims to reduce dependence on vulnerable supply chains, expand domestic production and increase defence exports by 50%. The plan identifies approximately $180 billion in potential defence procurement and $290 billion in defence-related capital investment over the coming decade.</p>
<p>Partnerships with countries such as Croatia fit that strategy because Canada is attempting to work with a wider network of trusted allies rather than relying too heavily on one supplier or market. Croatia is a member of both NATO and the European Union, while Canada has been pursuing deeper security and industrial relationships with European partners. Croatian officials also said they expected Carney to discuss his concept for a multilateral defence bank during the visit, although its structure and Croatia’s possible involvement remained matters for discussion. Supporters may view these arrangements as practical diversification. Critics will still expect transparency, competitive procurement and evidence that Canadian taxpayers and workers receive measurable benefits.</p>
<h2>The Agreement Is a Starting Point, Not the Finish Line</h2>
<p>The political value of announcing a high-technology partnership is immediate, but its economic value will depend on execution. The most important unanswered questions include whether production will take place in Canada, how Canadian intellectual property will be protected, whether the companies will employ Canadian engineers and technicians, and whether the partnership produces firm commercial orders.</p>
<p>The same caution applies to broader trade claims. Aircraft and ship contracts have already lifted the value of commerce, but sustainable growth requires a wider range of companies to participate. Tourism offers another opportunity: Croatian reporting said arrivals and overnight stays by Canadian visitors increased 10% during the first five months of 2026 compared with the same period a year earlier. The diaspora can also help companies identify partners and navigate unfamiliar markets. If the drone agreement leads to manufacturing, research or exports—and if business-forum introductions produce additional deals—the Carney-Plenković meeting could mark a durable expansion of the relationship. For now, it is best understood as a credible opening rather than a guaranteed economic breakthrough.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/shutterstock_2768006635.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="730">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/trump-tariffs-hang-over-contract-fight-for-nearly-19000-canadian-auto-workers</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Trump Tariffs Hang Over Contract Fight for Nearly 19,000 Canadian Auto Workers]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 14:41:26 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/trump-tariffs-hang-over-contract-fight-for-nearly-19000-canadian-auto-workers</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A contract negotiation that would normally centre on wages, pensions and benefits is unfolding under a much larger threat. Unifor]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A contract negotiation that would normally centre on wages, pensions and benefits is unfolding under a much larger threat. Unifor has opened bargaining with Ford on behalf of workers whose plants are tied to a North American production system now strained by U.S. tariffs, delayed investments and uncertain trade rules. The union represents 18,900 employees across Ford, General Motors and Stellantis, including thousands who are laid off or attached to facilities with no current production.</p>
<p>The talks will test whether workers can secure economic gains while automakers face pressure to place more production in the United States. They will also reveal how much stability a labour agreement can provide when the biggest risks are being shaped not at the bargaining table, but in Washington, Ottawa and the approaching review of the Canada-U.S.-Mexico trade agreement.</p>
<h2>Bargaining Starts Earlier Than Usual</h2>
<p>Unifor formally opened negotiations with Ford on June 22, 2026, beginning a Detroit Three bargaining round covering nearly 19,000 Canadian workers. The existing agreements with Ford, General Motors and Stellantis do not expire until September 20, but the union moved the process forward by several weeks. It has set July 10 as the target for reaching a tentative agreement with Ford, giving both sides a compressed window to settle issues that normally take months to prepare and debate.</p>
<p>The early start reflects a calculation that the industrial climate may become more difficult rather than easier. U.S. vehicle tariffs remain in place, the CUSMA review is approaching, and several Canadian plants are idled or operating with fewer shifts. For a worker planning a mortgage payment, retirement date or return from layoff, the calendar matters. A settlement reached before the September expiry could offer some certainty. A prolonged dispute, however, would add another layer of risk to an industry already dealing with political decisions outside either side’s control.</p>
<h2>Ford Has Been Chosen to Set the Pattern</h2>
<p>The first negotiation matters because Unifor uses pattern bargaining. It seeks an agreement with one Detroit Three company and then asks the other two to match the core economic terms. Ford was selected as the 2026 target, meaning its deal could establish the benchmark for wages, pensions, benefits and income-security provisions at General Motors and Stellantis. Unifor says its long working relationship with Ford and the company’s continued commitment to Canadian operations made it the strongest starting point.</p>
<p>The Ford talks directly cover 5,150 Unifor members. They are connected to Oakville Assembly, engine operations in Windsor and Essex, parts-distribution centres and office units. The union’s total Detroit Three membership also includes 9,140 people at Stellantis and 4,610 at General Motors, with the totals counting active employees as well as some inactive and laid-off members. That structure gives the Ford table influence far beyond one company. A strong settlement could lift standards across the sector; a weak one could become the ceiling that nearly 14,000 additional workers are asked to accept.</p>
<h2>The Tariff Is Not a Simple 25 Per Cent Charge</h2>
<p>The Trump administration imposed a 25 per cent tariff on imported passenger vehicles, light trucks and specified automotive parts beginning in 2025. For vehicles that comply with CUSMA, however, the tariff applies to the value of the vehicle’s non-U.S. content rather than automatically to its full price. Qualifying auto parts have received different treatment while U.S. authorities develop a process for measuring and applying duties to their non-U.S. content. That makes the burden highly dependent on each model’s sourcing and production footprint.</p>
<p>Washington’s stated goal is to protect national security, rebuild the U.S. industrial base and encourage more vehicle and parts production inside the United States. Critics within the industry argue that the policy can also raise costs before new factories or supply chains are ready. The Alliance for Automotive Innovation, whose membership includes Ford and General Motors, warned that plants and supplier networks cannot be redirected overnight. For Canadian bargaining, the practical effect is clear: management can point to higher cross-border costs, while the union can point to the policy-driven risk of production being shifted south.</p>
<h2>Layoffs Have Made Job Security the Central Issue</h2>
<p>The negotiations begin with almost 6,000 workers laid off across Detroit Three operations, according to Reuters. Unifor’s own facility data illustrates the scale of the disruption. It lists 2,200 members at Stellantis’s Brampton Assembly Plant and 1,050 at GM’s Ingersoll Assembly operation, with no current production shown at either facility. Ford’s Oakville workforce is tied to a major plant refurbishment, while other facilities are working through changed production plans and uncertain launch schedules.</p>
<p>Oshawa provides another example of why the causes of job losses are contested. General Motors said a 2026 shift reduction would eliminate roughly 500 jobs as the plant returned to a two-shift schedule after post-pandemic pickup demand eased. Unifor said the wider impact could reach 1,200 jobs across the supply chain and blamed tariff-driven production decisions. GM said the change was not linked to tariffs and highlighted a $280-million investment in next-generation trucks. Those competing explanations will echo at the bargaining table, where the union wants enforceable security and companies want room to adjust output when demand changes.</p>
<h2>Unifor Is Rejecting Concessionary Bargaining</h2>
<p>Unifor has said it will not accept concessionary bargaining despite the difficult environment. Its stated priorities include wages, pensions, health benefits, income security and workplace improvements. Job protection is especially important because a wage increase offers limited comfort to an employee who does not know when a plant will restart. Income-security programs, layoff protections, product commitments and retirement provisions can therefore carry as much practical weight as the headline hourly rate.</p>
<p>The last bargaining round set a demanding reference point. In the 2023 Ford pattern agreement, production workers were scheduled to receive base-wage increases of nearly 20 per cent over three years, while skilled trades were set for 25 per cent, before cost-of-living adjustments. The deal included a $10,000 productivity and quality bonus for full-time employees, increased starting wages and cut the time needed to reach the top rate from eight years to four. Those gains do not guarantee a similar package in 2026. They do, however, explain why members may resist arguments that external uncertainty should require them to move backward.</p>
<h2>Automakers Are Caught Between Two Cost Pressures</h2>
<p>Ford, General Motors and Stellantis enter the talks facing demands from workers on one side and a changing trade regime on the other. Canada produced 1.28 million vehicles in 2024, according to the Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers’ Association. Its members export about 90 per cent of domestic production, and 93 per cent of those exports go to the United States. A policy that raises the cost of entering the U.S. market therefore reaches directly into Canadian decisions about shifts, model allocation and future investment.</p>
<p>The companies also operate on both sides of the border, so the tariffs do not create a simple Canada-versus-America divide. U.S. plants rely on imported components, Canadian factories use U.S. content, and the same automaker may benefit from one production shift while paying more elsewhere. The U.S. administration argues that this pressure will eventually produce more American manufacturing. Industry representatives counter that tariffs can reduce sales, raise consumer costs and weaken exports before new capacity is built. In bargaining, employers may seek flexibility to manage that uncertainty, while workers will want guarantees that flexibility does not become a one-way transfer of risk.</p>
<h2>The CUSMA Review Raises the Stakes</h2>
<p>The contract fight is occurring just as Canada, the United States and Mexico confront the first six-year review of CUSMA. The agreement took effect on July 1, 2020, and allows the three governments to review its operation and decide whether to extend it for another 16-year term. A failure to agree on an extension in 2026 would not immediately cancel the pact. Instead, annual reviews could continue through 2036, leaving years of uncertainty over the rules that guide North American investment.</p>
<p>That uncertainty became more concrete on June 17, when President Donald Trump said the United States might be better off without the agreement, while also leaving open the possibility that he could sign an extension. Automakers have urged renewal because their production systems were built around continental trade. The union cannot settle CUSMA or remove U.S. tariffs through a collective agreement, but both issues shape what companies are willing to promise. A product commitment that looks secure under tariff-free access can become more expensive if trade barriers remain or rules of origin become tougher.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Is Using Tariffs and Remission as Leverage</h2>
<p>Canada responded to the U.S. auto measures with 25 per cent counter-tariffs on targeted American-made vehicles. For CUSMA-compliant vehicles, the Canadian surtax generally applies to non-Canadian and non-Mexican content. Ottawa also created a performance-based remission system that lets automakers import a limited number of qualifying U.S.-assembled vehicles without the counter-tariff when they maintain Canadian production and investment commitments. The approach is designed to turn access to the Canadian market into leverage for domestic jobs.</p>
<p>The government has shown that the benefit can be reduced. In October 2025, Canada cut General Motors’ annual tariff-free quota by 24.2 per cent and Stellantis’s by 50 per cent after accusing the companies of scaling back Canadian manufacturing commitments. Ottawa’s 2026 economic update says reciprocal auto tariffs will remain and that it will explore further use of the remission framework to reinforce production and attract investment. Still, government policy cannot write a collective agreement or assign a new vehicle to an idle plant. It can change the incentives, while the union and automakers must negotiate what those incentives mean for actual workers.</p>
<h2>The Impact Extends Far Beyond Assembly Lines</h2>
<p>Canada’s automotive industry contributed $16.8 billion to national GDP in 2024 and directly employed more than 125,000 people, according to the federal government. It also supported approximately 427,000 additional jobs through parts production, transportation, dealerships, aftermarket services and other connected activity. That helps explain why a contract covering 18,900 union members can matter to far more households than the bargaining-unit total suggests.</p>
<p>An assembly plant operates like an anchor customer for an entire local economy. When a shift disappears, the effect can move quickly to seat makers, stamping companies, logistics firms, restaurants and small retailers near the plant. The reverse is also true: a new product program can support years of supplier orders and municipal revenue. Communities such as Oakville, Brampton, Oshawa, Ingersoll and Windsor therefore have a direct interest in the outcome. Workers are negotiating pay and benefits, but towns are watching for signs that companies still see Canadian facilities as long-term production sites rather than temporary pieces in a continental cost calculation.</p>
<h2>A Ford Deal Would Be Only the First Test</h2>
<p>The July 10 target is a bargaining deadline, not the expiry of the current contract and not automatically a strike date. If Unifor and Ford reach a tentative deal, members must review and ratify it. The union would then move to General Motors and Stellantis, using the Ford settlement as the pattern. Dates for those talks had not been announced when negotiations opened. If Ford talks miss the target, the bargaining committee has said it will assess progress and decide what steps are appropriate.</p>
<p>Even a successful Ford agreement would leave major questions unresolved. GM and Stellantis could resist parts of the pattern, governments could alter tariff or remission policies, and CUSMA negotiations could change the investment outlook. The most durable settlement would therefore need to do more than raise current compensation. It would have to protect income during disruptions, preserve retirement security and create credible incentives for future products. For nearly 19,000 workers, the immediate goal is a fair contract. The larger test is whether Canadian auto jobs can remain secure while the economic rules around them are being rewritten.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/12/Trumps-Golf-celeb.png" type="image/png" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/one-in-five-unemployed-young-canadians-has-been-jobless-for-at-least-six-months</guid>      <title><![CDATA[One in Five Unemployed Young Canadians Has Been Jobless for at Least Six Months]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 13:22:43 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/one-in-five-unemployed-young-canadians-has-been-jobless-for-at-least-six-months</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s latest employment rebound offered some welcome relief, but it did not erase a more troubling development beneath the headline]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s latest employment rebound offered some welcome relief, but it did not erase a more troubling development beneath the headline numbers. One in five unemployed Canadians between the ages of 15 and 24 has now been searching for work for at least six months. The average unemployment spell for this age group reached 17.3 weeks in May 2026, up sharply from 10.1 weeks in 2022.</p>
<p>For young people trying to secure a first summer job, begin a career or gain experience after graduation, months without work can become more than a temporary financial setback. It can mean postponed plans, growing gaps on a résumé and continued reliance on parents at a stage when independence is normally beginning. Although youth employment improved in May, the longer-term figures suggest that finding a foothold in Canada’s labour market remains unusually difficult.</p>
<h2>The Headline Improvement Does Not Tell the Whole Story</h2>
<p>Canada added 88,000 jobs in May 2026, producing the first significant monthly employment increase since November 2025. Employment among people aged 15 to 24 rose by 22,000, while their unemployment rate fell from 14.3% to 13.4%. Full-time youth employment jumped by 99,000 during the month, reversing a similarly sized decline recorded over the first four months of the year. Those numbers provided a noticeably stronger start to the summer hiring season than many economists and job seekers had expected.</p>
<p>The improvement, however, came after several years of deteriorating conditions. Youth unemployment averaged 10% in 2022 before rising to 13.8% in 2025. Since January 2024, the monthly rate has consistently remained above the 10.8% average recorded during the three years before the pandemic. The challenge has been especially severe for teenagers, whose unemployment rate approached 20% in 2025. Young adults aged 20 to 24, who are more likely to be leaving school and starting full-time careers, recorded an unemployment rate of 10.9% that year.</p>
<p>Duration may now be the more revealing measure. The average period of unemployment for young Canadians rose from 10.1 weeks in 2022 to 15.9 weeks in 2025 and then to 17.3 weeks in May 2026. The share unemployed for six months or longer more than doubled in just two years. A falling monthly unemployment rate is encouraging, but it can coexist with a group of job seekers who remain increasingly stuck. It can also decline when people stop actively looking, since official unemployment figures only count those available for work who have recently taken steps to find a job.</p>
<h2>Canada Has Entered a Low-Hiring Labour Market</h2>
<p>The current weakness is not primarily the result of companies suddenly dismissing large numbers of workers. The Bank of Canada has described the country as being in a “low hire–low fire” labour market: layoffs have remained relatively stable, but employers have become much more cautious about adding staff. By spring 2026, the ability of an unemployed Canadian to find work was close to its lowest level in three decades. Businesses facing slower demand, higher financing costs and trade uncertainty have often responded by leaving positions unfilled rather than cutting existing teams.</p>
<p>This creates a difficult environment for anyone seeking a first opportunity. Experienced employees are generally safer to retain because they already understand the organization, require less training and can contribute immediately. A young applicant may be capable and enthusiastic, yet hiring that person requires interviewing, onboarding, supervision and time from established employees. When a business is unsure about future sales, delaying an entry-level hire can appear less risky than investing in someone who still needs experience.</p>
<p>Job openings increased to 506,700 in the first quarter of 2026, their first quarterly rise since the second quarter of 2022. That improvement should not be dismissed, but vacancies remained far below their post-pandemic peak of nearly one million. Employers also reported fewer long-running vacancies, suggesting that they were having less difficulty filling the positions they did advertise. In practical terms, the balance of power shifted: companies could choose from more applicants and wait for candidates who closely matched their requirements.</p>
<p>For a young job seeker, that change can be felt through dozens of applications receiving only automated responses. There may be fewer dramatic layoff announcements than during a traditional recession, but the absence of hiring can be just as damaging to those standing outside the workforce. A labour market does not need to be rapidly shrinking to become inhospitable to new entrants.</p>
<h2>Education No Longer Guarantees an Easy First Step</h2>
<p>Higher education continues to improve employment and earnings prospects over a lifetime, but a degree is no longer a reliable ticket into an immediate professional role. In the first quarter of 2026, there were five unemployed people with a bachelor’s degree or higher for every vacancy requiring that level of education. The comparable ratio was 2.3 unemployed people per opening requiring a trade certificate or diploma. Vacancies requiring a bachelor’s degree also declined by 6.9% from a year earlier.</p>
<p>The mismatch helps explain why some graduates apply for positions traditionally considered below their level of education. Employers may receive applications from candidates with degrees for administrative, retail or customer-service roles, while graduates compete intensely for a smaller pool of professional openings. This does not necessarily mean that Canada has too many educated young people. It indicates that the number and type of available jobs have not kept pace with the qualifications entering the market.</p>
<p>Artificial intelligence is frequently blamed for the disappearance of junior office and technology positions. So far, the Canadian evidence is more complicated. Statistics Canada found that vacancies in occupations considered highly exposed to artificial intelligence declined at a rate broadly similar to vacancies in less-exposed occupations between late 2022 and the third quarter of 2025. The agency did not find clear evidence that AI exposure had already produced weaker overall employment or earnings growth across industries. Coding-intensive vacancies requiring three years of experience or less did fall sharply, but the broader decline in hiring began as the post-pandemic vacancy boom was unwinding.</p>
<p>There is also a surprisingly basic communication gap. A 2026 Canadian Federation of Independent Business study found that 62% of small businesses recruited through personal connections and referrals, while 73% of young job seekers relied mainly on online job boards. Only about half of the young respondents used personal networks. As a result, some applicants may be sending résumés into heavily crowded online systems while local employers quietly hire through employees, customers and community contacts.</p>
<h2>Six Months Without Work Can Leave a Lasting Mark</h2>
<p>The immediate cost of unemployment is easy to understand: no paycheque, less savings and fewer choices. For young adults, the wider effects can include delaying a move away from home, postponing further education or accepting work unrelated to their training. A six-month gap can also change the tone of a job search. Applications that began with optimism may gradually become less targeted as the pressure to earn an income grows.</p>
<p>Economic research suggests that longer unemployment spells can make the next job harder to obtain. Field experiments have found that otherwise similar applicants receive fewer interview callbacks when their résumés show longer periods without work. Employers may interpret a lengthy gap as a signal about ability or motivation, even when the original cause was a weak economy. That creates a damaging cycle: the longer someone remains unemployed, the more difficult it may become to persuade an employer to provide the opportunity needed to end the spell.</p>
<p>Early unemployment can also produce what economists call “scarring.” A young person who misses the first rung of a career ladder loses more than several months of wages. That worker also misses training, references, professional contacts and the salary increases that commonly accompany early career progression. Someone who enters a field two years late may continue earning less than a similar worker who secured a relevant position immediately, even after both are employed.</p>
<p>The burden is not distributed evenly. Young people whose families can provide housing, transportation and financial help may have time to continue searching for a suitable position. Those without that support can be pushed more quickly into unstable work, debt or prolonged inactivity. The unemployment statistic may treat both applicants the same, but their ability to withstand six months without income can be dramatically different.</p>
<h2>Better Connections Could Matter as Much as More Training</h2>
<p>Canada already operates youth employment programs, wage subsidies, summer-job initiatives and work-integrated learning programs. The strongest evidence supports opportunities that connect education directly with real employers. Statistics Canada found that bachelor’s graduates who participated in co-ops, internships, practicums or other work-integrated learning were less likely to be overqualified three years after graduation. Among the graduates studied, 32% of participants were overqualified for their jobs, compared with 49% of non-participants. Participants also earned about 7% more.</p>
<p>A federal evaluation of the Student Work Placement Program reached similarly positive conclusions. It found that placements helped students improve communication, critical-thinking, problem-solving and time-management skills. Thirty-six per cent of interviewed students had been offered a job in their field, while 95% of participating students and employers reported being satisfied with the placements. These programs can give employers a relatively low-risk way to evaluate inexperienced workers while giving students the references and practical experience that ordinary entry-level postings increasingly demand.</p>
<p>Expanding such programs alone will not solve the problem. The same federal evaluation found that administration, onboarding and supervision created additional burdens for employers. The CFIB reported that more than two-thirds of small businesses were unaware of available government hiring supports, while those familiar with them often found the application process poorly timed or overly complicated. Better-designed subsidies could help, but they must be simple enough for a small restaurant, retailer, contractor or professional office to use.</p>
<p>The May employment rebound shows that Canada’s youth labour market is capable of improving. The concern is that thousands of young people have already spent months waiting for that improvement to reach them. Reducing long-term youth unemployment will require more than encouraging applicants to submit additional résumés. It means creating genuine entry points, making employers easier to find and ensuring that a temporary period without work does not become a permanent disadvantage.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Job-Loss-Work.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Photo Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canada-ranks-last-in-g7-and-32nd-of-35-oecd-countries-for-income-growth-analysis</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada Ranks Last in G7 and 32nd of 35 OECD Countries for Income Growth: Analysis]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 12:06:51 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canada-ranks-last-in-g7-and-32nd-of-35-oecd-countries-for-income-growth-analysis</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s economy may be getting larger, but the income generated for each resident has been growing at a troubling pace.]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s economy may be getting larger, but the income generated for each resident has been growing at a troubling pace. A new C.D. Howe Institute analysis, based on World Bank data, places Canada last among G7 countries and 32nd among 35 OECD economies for growth in inflation-adjusted gross national income per person over the decade ending in 2023.</p>
<p>The finding captures a frustration already familiar to many households: more economic activity has not consistently translated into stronger purchasing power or a visibly higher standard of living. Still, the ranking requires careful interpretation. It measures average national income per person, not individual wages or household disposable income, and it reflects a period shaped by commodity shocks, rapid population growth, weak investment, the pandemic and shifting global trade conditions.</p>
<h2>What the Ranking Actually Measures</h2>
<p>The comparison is based on real gross national income per capita, expressed in constant 2021 international dollars using purchasing power parities. GNI starts with the value of production inside Canada, then adds income Canadians receive from abroad and subtracts income paid to foreign residents. Dividing that total by the population produces an average per-person measure. Purchasing-power adjustments make cross-country comparisons more meaningful by accounting for differences in local prices rather than simply converting currencies at market exchange rates.</p>
<p>That makes the measure useful, but not all-encompassing. It does not show how income is distributed, whether a particular worker received a raise or how much a family has left after taxes, rent and debt payments. C.D. Howe’s underlying analysis says Canada’s real GNI per person rose only about 2 per cent cumulatively over the decade ending in 2023. The same work puts Canada’s 2023 level at roughly $45,800 in constant international dollars—about 74 per cent of the U.S. level and below the average for high-income economies.</p>
<h2>Canada’s Earlier Advantage Has Faded</h2>
<p>The weak decade represents a reversal rather than a permanent feature of the Canadian economy. Statistics Canada found that from 1997 to 2015, real GNI per capita grew faster in Canada than in the United States. Canada benefited from rising commodity prices, which improved its terms of trade: exports such as oil and other resources could purchase more imported machinery, electronics and consumer goods. That advantage helped national income rise even while Canadian labour productivity was already trailing the United States.</p>
<p>Conditions changed sharply after the global financial crisis and the mid-2010s commodity-price shock. Statistics Canada reports that Canadian real GNI per capita growth slowed to an annualized 1.22 per cent after 2015, compared with 2.17 per cent in the United States. By the third quarter of 2025, Canada’s real GNI per person relative to the United States was about 10 per cent below its late-1990s position. The comparison suggests that resource wealth can lift purchasing power, but it cannot permanently substitute for stronger productivity, investment and business formation.</p>
<h2>A Growing Economy Hid Weak Per-Person Results</h2>
<p>Headline GDP can rise while the economic share available per resident stagnates or falls. Canada experienced that divide clearly in 2023 and 2024. Statistics Canada reported that real GDP per capita declined 1.3 per cent in 2023 and another 1.4 per cent in 2024, even though the overall economy continued to expand. Rapid population growth added workers, consumers and total output, but production did not rise quickly enough to create comparable gains on a per-person basis.</p>
<p>This does not mean immigration itself is inherently harmful to living standards. Newcomers expand the labour force, start businesses, fill shortages and contribute to future growth. The problem emerges when housing, machinery, transportation, public infrastructure and business investment do not expand at a similar pace. The OECD estimated that Canada’s population grew by close to 3 per cent in both 2023 and 2024, much faster than most peer economies. Population growth slowed substantially in 2025, and real GDP per capita increased 0.2 per cent in the first quarter of 2026 even as total GDP was flat, illustrating how demographic changes can alter the per-person calculation.</p>
<h2>Productivity and Investment Sit at the Centre</h2>
<p>Productivity is often misunderstood as a demand for employees to work harder. Economists use it to describe how much output is produced for each hour of labour, reflecting the tools, technology, skills, infrastructure and organization available to workers. The OECD found that Canadian labour productivity growth averaged only 0.5 per cent annually from 2019 to 2023. Since 2000, Canada has also diverged markedly from the United States, where firms have generally invested more aggressively in technology and production systems.</p>
<p>Weak capital investment is a major part of the gap. The OECD reported that investment per worker in Canada in 2023 was only 85 per cent of its 2014 level. Statistics Canada’s latest capital-stock figures show that non-residential capital grew just 1.4 per cent in 2024, slower than residential capital. For a technician, nurse, construction worker or factory employee, productivity growth can come from better software, more efficient equipment, improved training or faster transportation—not from rushing through a shift. Without those supports, adding more workers can expand total GDP while leaving output and income per person under pressure.</p>
<h2>Housing Became an Economic Capacity Test</h2>
<p>Housing is usually discussed as a cost-of-living issue, but it also affects productivity and income growth. Expensive or scarce housing can prevent workers from moving to cities where their skills are most valuable, force longer commutes and make it harder for employers to recruit. The OECD has linked Canada’s affordability problem to insufficient supply, restrictive density rules, slow approvals and a mismatch between the homes being built and the homes households need. Rapid migration amplified those pressures during the highest-growth years.</p>
<p>The scale is substantial. CMHC estimated in 2025 that Canada would need to build roughly 430,000 to 480,000 homes annually for a decade to restore affordability to 2019 levels—approximately double the prevailing pace. There has been progress: housing starts increased 6 per cent in 2025, led by record rental construction in several cities. Yet CMHC warned in 2026 that ownership-oriented construction, especially condominiums in Toronto and Vancouver, had weakened. Better housing supply alone will not fix national income growth, but it can reduce one of the largest barriers preventing population and employment growth from translating into higher living standards.</p>
<h2>The Household Experience Is More Complicated</h2>
<p>A weak GNI-per-person ranking does not mean every Canadian household saw the same result. National income is an average, while families experience the economy through wages, taxes, benefits, housing costs, interest payments and job security. Statistics Canada reported that median after-tax income for families and unattached individuals was $75,500 in 2024 and was relatively unchanged from 2023 after inflation. The national poverty rate was also broadly stable at 11 per cent, representing about 4.5 million people.</p>
<p>Results varied within that total. Median after-tax income rose for families, including couples with children, while it was essentially unchanged for unattached individuals. Seniors also recorded gains, helped by both market income and transfers. These differences explain why broad economic statistics can coexist with sharply different personal experiences. A homeowner who renewed a mortgage at a higher rate, a renter facing a large increase and a retiree receiving indexed benefits may all interpret the same year differently. GNI per capita is therefore best understood as a warning about the economy’s capacity to generate rising prosperity, not a complete description of every household budget.</p>
<h2>Tax Reform Is One Proposal, Not the Whole Answer</h2>
<p>C.D. Howe argues that Canada’s tax structure is an important contributor to weak performance. Its 2026 proposal would lower personal and corporate income-tax rates, simplify credits and shift some revenue toward consumption or payroll taxes. The authors estimate that their revenue-neutral package could eventually add about $140 billion in non-residential capital and raise GDP by roughly $79 billion, or 2.5 per cent. Those figures are modelled projections, not guaranteed outcomes, and shifting taxes could create winners and losers depending on how credits and protections are designed.</p>
<p>Other institutions emphasize a broader reform package. The OECD has called for stronger competition, fewer internal trade barriers, more business investment, better research commercialization, faster housing approvals and improved workforce skills. The federal government has responded with measures including a Productivity Super-Deduction, expanded research incentives and legislation aimed at easing federal barriers to interprovincial trade and labour mobility. Supporters argue these steps can attract capital and help firms scale. Critics may reasonably question their cost, implementation speed and whether targeted incentives are as effective as simpler, economy-wide rules.</p>
<h2>The Next Few Years Will Show Whether the Slide Has Stopped</h2>
<p>There are reasons for concern, but the ranking should not be read as proof of irreversible decline. Canada continues to benefit from a strong macroeconomic framework, an educated workforce and a well-capitalized banking system. Real GDP grew 1.7 per cent in 2025, and per-capita GDP edged higher in early 2026. Those developments are more encouraging than the declines recorded in 2023 and 2024, although one or two quarters do not establish a durable turnaround.</p>
<p>The more meaningful test will be whether business investment, output per hour and real household incomes begin rising together. A sustainable improvement would also require housing and infrastructure to keep pace with the population, while trade uncertainty and U.S. tariffs remain major external risks. Canada’s ranking is ultimately less about national prestige than compounding: a small annual growth gap, repeated for a decade, produces a large difference in purchasing power and opportunity. Closing that gap will require policies that survive election cycles, private-sector investment that extends beyond real estate and a clearer focus on what each worker and resident can produce and earn.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Report-All-Income.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="667">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/federal-court-orders-sobeys-parent-to-hand-over-records-in-grocery-competition-probe</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Federal Court Orders Sobeys Parent to Hand Over Records in Grocery Competition Probe]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 11:28:33 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/federal-court-orders-sobeys-parent-to-hand-over-records-in-grocery-competition-probe</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A court order centred on commercial leases may sound technical, but its consequences could reach the neighbourhood grocery aisle. On]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A court order centred on commercial leases may sound technical, but its consequences could reach the neighbourhood grocery aisle. On June 22, 2026, the Competition Bureau said it had obtained new Federal Court orders requiring Empire Company Limited—the parent of Sobeys and several other grocery banners—to provide records, written information and oral testimony.</p>
<p>The move expands an investigation that initially focused on property controls in the Halifax Regional Municipality into a broader examination of Empire’s practices across Canada. The Bureau is assessing whether restrictions tied to commercial real estate have made it harder for rival grocers to open or compete. It has emphasized that the investigation is ongoing and that no conclusion of wrongdoing has been reached.</p>
<h2>The Investigation Has Become National</h2>
<p>The Bureau’s first publicly announced court orders in this matter arrived in June 2024. Those orders sought information from Empire and George Weston Limited, the parent of Loblaw, with the initial focus placed on property controls in the Halifax Regional Municipality. Two years later, the Empire inquiry has widened. The latest orders are intended to help investigators understand the scope of the company’s practices across Canada, including how property controls are negotiated and how they may affect competition in different local markets.</p>
<p>That expansion matters because Empire operates through a large family of recognizable banners, including Sobeys, Safeway, IGA, FreshCo, Foodland and Farm Boy. A national investigation can therefore examine whether similar contractual approaches appear in communities with very different populations, store choices and real-estate conditions. Still, broader scrutiny should not be confused with a finding against the company. The orders give investigators access to information; they do not establish that Empire broke competition law.</p>
<h2>A Court Order Is an Evidence-Gathering Tool</h2>
<p>Section 11 of the Competition Act allows a judge to issue an order when the Competition Commissioner is conducting an inquiry and a person or company has, or is likely to have, information relevant to it. Depending on the order, the recipient may be required to produce records, submit detailed written answers under oath or provide oral testimony. The law also states that such an order can have effect anywhere in Canada, making it a powerful tool in a national investigation.</p>
<p>That legal distinction is important. The Federal Court has not ruled that Empire’s conduct was anti-competitive; it has authorized compulsory information gathering. The Bureau must still study the documents, answers and testimony, define the relevant local markets and assess whether any restrictions created meaningful barriers for rivals. Its June 22 announcement did not disclose a penalty, settlement or Competition Tribunal case. It explicitly said there is no conclusion of wrongdoing at this stage.</p>
<h2>What Property Controls Actually Do</h2>
<p>Property controls are restrictions attached to commercial real estate. The Bureau’s guidance focuses on two main forms. An exclusivity clause is usually written into a lease and can stop a landlord from renting nearby space to a competing business or limit the products another tenant may sell. A restrictive covenant is tied more directly to the land and can prevent a buyer or future owner from using a property for a competing type of business.</p>
<p>In practical terms, a shopping plaza could appear to have room for another food retailer while its agreements prevent that space from being used for one. The Bureau considers these controls capable of insulating an incumbent from competition, but it does not say every restriction is automatically unlawful. A narrowly designed clause may sometimes support competition when it is genuinely necessary for a company to make a new investment or enter a market. Investigators therefore look at factors such as duration, geographic reach, product coverage and whether less restrictive alternatives were available.</p>
<h2>Why Real Estate Can Decide Who Gets to Compete</h2>
<p>A grocery store cannot usually be placed in just any vacant unit. A viable location must be suitable for the retailer’s format, customers, deliveries and operating needs. That is why the Bureau’s guidance asks whether competitors have other feasible commercial sites, whether they would be less effective in those locations and whether existing barriers compound the effect of a property control. A restriction that looks modest on paper can become much more significant when suitable sites are scarce.</p>
<p>Consider a small community with one full-service supermarket and only one realistic property for a second store. If a covenant blocks grocery use at that site, shoppers may technically be free to choose another retailer, but the nearest meaningful alternative could be far away. In a dense city, the same clause may have less impact if several comparable locations are available. This local-market reality helps explain why a national investigation still requires detailed records and testimony rather than a simple count of clauses.</p>
<h2>Crowsnest Pass Shows Why the Bureau Is Concerned</h2>
<p>The Bureau has already identified one concrete Empire-related example. In January 2025, it announced that Empire had agreed to remove a property control in Crowsnest Pass, Alberta. According to the Bureau, Empire’s IGA was the community’s only grocery store, and a restriction in place since 2017 protected it from competition and ensured it would remain the only store of its kind in the area.</p>
<p>Removing the restriction allowed another grocery competitor to move forward with plans for a second store. For residents, the issue was not an abstract debate over lease wording; it affected whether another place to buy food could enter the community. That potential market opening became possible only after the control was removed. The Crowsnest Pass outcome does not prove that every Empire property control has the same purpose or effect. It does, however, illustrate why investigators want to see how clauses were negotiated, where they apply and whether they limited realistic entry in other markets.</p>
<h2>A Concentrated Market Raises the Stakes</h2>
<p>The Bureau’s 2023 grocery market study described Canadian food retailing as concentrated, with most sales occurring through five major groups: Loblaw, Sobeys, Metro, Costco and Walmart. Its survey of 1,000 Canadians also showed how routinely households interact with this market. Eighty-one per cent said they bought groceries one to three times a week. Forty-nine per cent reported shopping at Loblaw-operated stores and 28 per cent at Sobeys-operated stores, with respondents able to name more than one retailer.</p>
<p>The scrutiny comes at a sensitive time for household budgets. Statistics Canada reported that food purchased from stores cost 4.3 per cent more in May 2026 than a year earlier, marking the 16th consecutive month in which grocery inflation outpaced headline inflation. That does not mean property controls caused the latest price increases; food prices also respond to supply, weather, transportation and other costs. The competition concern is narrower: fewer realistic store options can weaken pressure on retailers to compete on price, quality, service and selection.</p>
<h2>Pressure Is Already Changing Industry Practice</h2>
<p>The policy environment around property controls has shifted since the original Halifax-focused investigation. In June 2025, the Bureau said it was monitoring Loblaw’s public commitment to eliminate restrictive covenants and waive or narrow certain exclusivity clauses, including in Halifax and in communities where it operated the only grocery store. Empire’s removal of the Crowsnest Pass restriction provided another example of an existing control being changed after regulatory scrutiny. The Bureau also published final guidance explaining its enforcement approach to such arrangements.</p>
<p>Provincial action has followed as well. Manitoba passed legislation in June 2025 aimed at preventing new grocery property controls and dealing with existing restrictions. These developments do not resolve the national investigation into Empire, but they show that lease language once treated largely as a private commercial matter is now receiving public-policy and enforcement attention. Grocers, landlords, property sellers and developers may all face questions about whether restrictions are necessary, proportionate and compatible with the Competition Act.</p>
<h2>What Could Happen Next</h2>
<p>The immediate next step is compliance with the Federal Court orders and the Bureau’s review of the information it receives. The new material is expected to help investigators examine how Empire negotiates property controls and evaluate their potential effects in markets across Canada. Because competition analysis is highly fact-specific, a clause that raises concern in a one-store town may not produce the same result in a large urban market with numerous viable sites.</p>
<p>If the Bureau ultimately concludes that a property control meets the legal tests for anti-competitive conduct, its guidance says it may seek an order stopping the clause from being used or enforced, measures designed to restore competition, and, in some circumstances, administrative monetary penalties. Those outcomes are possibilities, not predictions, and the Bureau has not announced a timeline or said what result it expects. For shoppers, the significance of the new orders is therefore less about an immediate change at checkout and more about whether Canada’s competition watchdog can uncover—and remove—real-estate barriers that keep new grocery choices from opening.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/09/Sobeys.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="714">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/metrolinx-writes-off-504-million-in-go-signalling-work-it-no-longer-needs</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Metrolinx Writes Off $504 Million in GO Signalling Work It No Longer Needs]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 11:26:10 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/metrolinx-writes-off-504-million-in-go-signalling-work-it-no-longer-needs</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A modernization project meant to replace some of Toronto’s oldest railway technology has produced a major financial write-off at Metrolinx.]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A modernization project meant to replace some of Toronto’s oldest railway technology has produced a major financial write-off at Metrolinx. In its draft 2025–26 annual report, the provincial transit agency says it is removing $504 million in Union Station Rail Corridor signalling assets from its books after newer GO Expansion plans made much of the work incompatible with the railway Metrolinx now intends to build.</p>
<p>The disclosure is not simply about outdated equipment. It traces how a decade-long project, launched before the final shape of GO’s high-frequency network was settled, collided with a much broader redesign involving electrification, new train-control technology, rebuilt tracks and reconfigured platforms. Some completed work will still be used, but the scale of the write-off raises difficult questions about planning, sequencing and accountability.</p>
<h2>What the $504-Million Write-Off Actually Means</h2>
<p>A write-off does not mean Metrolinx is cutting a fresh $504-million cheque this year. The money was spent or committed over time and recorded as capital work because the signalling assets were expected to provide service for years. Once Metrolinx determined that significant portions would not have permanent service potential under the newer GO Expansion design, those amounts could no longer remain on the balance sheet as useful capital assets. The 2025–26 financial statements therefore recognize the loss now, even though much of the underlying spending occurred in earlier years.</p>
<p>That distinction matters, but it does not make the outcome painless. Public infrastructure is funded on the expectation that completed designs, cables, equipment and systems will support future service. Removing their value from the books is an admission that the expected benefit will not be fully realized. Metrolinx says a usable portion of the completed work has been retained for GO Expansion, so the entire original program was not physically discarded. Still, the $504-million adjustment shows that the overlap between the old project and the future network was far smaller than planners once expected.</p>
<h2>The Project Began With a Genuine Modernization Problem</h2>
<p>The original case for replacing Union Station’s signalling system was strong. The 6.4-kilometre Union Station Rail Corridor is a dense web of tracks, platforms, signals and switches used by GO Transit, UP Express, VIA Rail and freight trains. When Metrolinx described the system in 2019, some of its electro-mechanical interlocking technology dated to the late 1920s and early 1930s. Operators still relied on banks of relays, physical levers and equipment housed in historic control towers to safely route trains through Canada’s largest passenger rail facility.</p>
<p>The scale was immense even before GO Expansion. Metrolinx said the corridor contained roughly 180 signals and 250 track switches and handled about 900 train trips a day at that time. Its planned modernization involved 258 track circuits, 35.4 kilometres of conduit and more than 305 kilometres of cable. The federal government announced in 2014 that the signalling project was valued at $365.5 million, with installation expected to begin in 2015 and finish in 2019. The technical need was real; the problem was that the railway Metrolinx ultimately decided to build demanded a different solution.</p>
<h2>GO Expansion Changed the Railway Beneath the Project</h2>
<p>GO Expansion is not a routine signal replacement. Its stated goal is to transform GO from a largely commuter-focused railway into a two-way, all-day regional rapid-transit system, with trains every 15 minutes or better on core portions of five corridors. That vision requires added tracks, station reconstruction, electrification, new rolling stock and a train-control system capable of safely managing far more frequent service. At Union Station, Metrolinx is also rebuilding platforms and changing track layouts so more trains can pass through the network’s central bottleneck.</p>
<p>Those elements are tightly connected. A signalling design is based on where tracks, switches and platforms will sit, how trains will accelerate and brake, and how dispatchers will separate movements. Change the physical railway or operating plan, and equipment installed for the earlier layout may no longer fit. The 2022 GO On-Corridor agreement placed track, signalling, electrification, train control and operations inside one integrated program. Alstom said its scope included an ERTMS train-control system new to the North American market. That broader architecture made compatibility—not merely age—the decisive issue for the older work.</p>
<h2>The Warning Came After a Decade of Work</h2>
<p>According to the draft annual report, Metrolinx began the Union corridor signalling upgrades in 2013 and paused the project in 2023 when it identified a risk that the system would not be compatible with GO Expansion. At that point, advanced track layouts were still being developed, so the agency said it could not yet determine exactly which assets would retain long-term service potential. That uncertainty delayed the final accounting decision while designers refined the future network.</p>
<p>By 2026, Metrolinx had enough information to conclude that large portions of the previous work would not be permanently useful. The result was the $504-million write-off, with only the reusable portion carried into the newer program. The timeline is what makes the disclosure especially striking: the project remained incomplete after roughly ten years, then reached the point where much of its value depended on a different project’s unfinished design. It illustrates a classic infrastructure risk—building one layer of a system before the operating model and connected physical layout are sufficiently settled.</p>
<h2>The Number Is Large Even by Metrolinx Standards</h2>
<p>The signalling adjustment accounts for about 89 per cent of the $567 million in total capital-asset write-offs disclosed for 2025–26. Global News reported that the $504 million represents roughly one per cent of Metrolinx’s capital-asset balance, which helps explain why the agency can absorb the accounting hit without threatening day-to-day operations. Yet one per cent of a very large public infrastructure portfolio is still a substantial amount of taxpayer-backed investment.</p>
<p>Another comparison shows its scale. Metrolinx’s 2025–26 business plan projected $585.6 million in fare revenue from 77.4 million riders. The signalling write-off is therefore close to an entire year of projected fare revenue, although capital funding and passenger fares serve different purposes and cannot simply be exchanged. It is also well above the project’s publicly announced $365.5-million value in 2014, reflecting how spending and scope evolved over the years. These comparisons do not prove that every dollar was wasted, but they make clear why the disclosure deserves more than a technical footnote in an annual report.</p>
<h2>It Arrives Amid Wider GO Expansion Uncertainty</h2>
<p>The write-off is not occurring in isolation. The draft annual report shows that Metrolinx spent less on GO Expansion in 2025–26 than budgeted, with actual spending below $1.7 billion compared with a plan above $2.2 billion. It also identifies uncertainty around government funding for the full GO Expansion program, including electrification. Metrolinx says it is prioritizing work that remains useful under multiple delivery scenarios, an approach intended to avoid creating more assets that could become obsolete if the program’s scope or timing changes again.</p>
<p>The same report warns that future write-downs could be required for GO Expansion, Union Station and projects that have been paused pending government direction. That does not mean additional losses are certain. However, the warning reveals the pressure planners face: continuing work can protect schedules, but advancing designs too far before funding and end-state decisions are fixed can create expensive rework. The $504-million charge is therefore both a backward-looking loss and a caution about decisions still being made.</p>
<h2>The Accountability Question Is About Sequencing</h2>
<p>The write-off does not, by itself, establish misconduct or prove that the original modernization should never have begun. Union Station’s legacy system needed replacement, and infrastructure programs often evolve as demand forecasts, technology and government priorities change. The sharper question is whether enough of the future track and operating plan was known before so much signalling work advanced—and whether decision-makers had clear checkpoints for stopping, redesigning or integrating it earlier.</p>
<p>Ontario’s Auditor General has previously pushed Metrolinx to strengthen project gating, design review, consultant oversight and board visibility into major capital risks. Follow-up reports noted the creation of a gating process, technical-compliance reviews and a Capital Oversight Committee. Infrastructure Ontario also describes the progressive GO Expansion model as a way to refine design, scope, risk and pricing collaboratively before full construction. The signalling write-off will test whether those controls are now strong enough. Taxpayers need a transparent explanation of what was built, what remains usable, when incompatibility first became likely and how similar overlap will be prevented.</p>
<h2>Riders Still Need a New Signalling System</h2>
<p>The accounting loss does not mean Metrolinx has abandoned signalling modernization. Its current Union Station materials still describe signalling and track upgrades as essential to increasing capacity, improving reliability and supporting GO Expansion. The agency says the completed Union Station program is intended to allow as many as 80 trains per hour through the station during peak periods—four times the current level. In March 2026, Metrolinx also announced that new signalling work would begin along the Lakeshore lines as GO Expansion moved into another major construction phase.</p>
<p>For riders, the near-term reality remains weekend closures, overnight work and temporary schedule changes while tracks, stations, bridges and systems are rebuilt. More than 300 weekly train trips have been added since April 2024, but the largest promised benefits still depend on completing the integrated railway. The crucial unanswered questions are now practical: how much of the old work survives, how much replacement work must be purchased, what the revised schedule will be and whether the new design can be protected from another major shift. The write-off closes one accounting chapter, but the cost and timing of the replacement story are still unfolding.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/06/Toronto-to-Niagara-Falls-–-GO-Train-Seasonal-Weekend-Service.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadas-inflation-hits-3-2-as-gas-jumps-33-and-tomatoes-soar-45</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada’s Inflation Hits 3.2% as Gas Jumps 33% and Tomatoes Soar 45%]]></title>
      <pubDate>Mon, 22 Jun 26 11:17:51 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadas-inflation-hits-3-2-as-gas-jumps-33-and-tomatoes-soar-45</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A routine stop at the gas station or grocery store became noticeably more expensive in May. Canada’s annual inflation rate]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A routine stop at the gas station or grocery store became noticeably more expensive in May. Canada’s annual inflation rate climbed to 3.2%, its highest level in more than two years, as gasoline prices surged and fresh produce costs moved sharply higher. Tomatoes stood out with a 45.2% year-over-year increase, turning an everyday staple into one of the month’s most striking price stories.</p>
<p>The headline number was uncomfortable, but the details were not uniformly alarming. Gasoline accounted for much of the acceleration, while shelter inflation continued to cool and the Bank of Canada’s preferred measures of underlying price pressure remained close to 2%. The result was an inflation report that captured both sides of Canada’s affordability problem: sudden external shocks and persistent pressure on household essentials.</p>
<h2>The Headline Number Moved Above the Bank’s Range</h2>
<p>Canada’s Consumer Price Index rose 3.2% in May 2026 compared with May 2025, accelerating from 2.8% in April. That was stronger than the 3% increase economists surveyed by Reuters had expected and marked the highest annual reading in 29 months. Prices also rose 1% from April on an unadjusted basis, the largest monthly increase in 15 months. After seasonal patterns were removed, the monthly gain was a more moderate 0.5%, but it still showed that price pressure had strengthened.</p>
<p>The distinction between monthly and annual inflation matters. A 3.2% annual rate does not mean the cost of everything jumped 3.2% in a single month, nor does it mean every household experienced the same increase. It means the overall price level of the representative CPI basket was 3.2% higher than one year earlier. For households, that can feel more severe because the fastest increases were concentrated in highly visible purchases—fuel and food—that are bought frequently and are difficult to postpone.</p>
<h2>Gasoline Did Most of the Heavy Lifting</h2>
<p>Gasoline prices rose 33.2% year over year in May, up from a 28.6% increase in April. Statistics Canada linked the acceleration to supply uncertainty created by the Middle East conflict and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz, which pushed crude oil and refined-fuel costs higher for a third consecutive month. Canadians paid the highest gasoline prices recorded since June 2022, another period when geopolitical disruption created intense anxiety about global energy supplies.</p>
<p>That increase had an outsized effect because transportation carries roughly 18.5% of the current CPI basket. The transportation component rose 9% from a year earlier, making it one of the strongest drivers of the national result. The impact is easy to understand at the household level: a commuter, tradesperson or rural family often cannot quickly reduce driving when fuel prices spike. Even so, the 33.2% figure is a national index change, not a guarantee that every driver’s bill rose by precisely that amount. Regional taxes, local competition, vehicle efficiency and driving habits all shape the actual cost.</p>
<h2>Why Tomatoes Became a 45% Shock</h2>
<p>Tomato prices climbed 45.2% from a year earlier, helping push fresh-vegetable inflation to 9%. Statistics Canada attributed the tomato increase to tighter supply from Mexico following poor weather and a reduction in planted acreage after the introduction of U.S. tariffs. Broccoli, cauliflower and lettuce also contributed to the rise. Fresh vegetables increased 5.5% in May alone after falling 3.9% in April, the largest month-over-month increase for the month of May since 2008.</p>
<p>For shoppers, produce inflation can feel especially abrupt because prices change quickly and are displayed plainly on store shelves. A tomato used in sandwiches, salads, sauces and school lunches is not a luxury product that can always be replaced without changing a meal plan. Still, the 45.2% increase should be understood as an average movement in the national price index. Individual varieties, package sizes, regions and retailers may show smaller or larger changes. The broader lesson is that weather, trade policy, fuel costs and planting decisions can converge rapidly in the produce aisle.</p>
<h2>The Grocery Bill Is Still the Bigger Affordability Story</h2>
<p>Food purchased from stores rose 4.3% year over year in May, marking the 16th consecutive month in which grocery inflation exceeded the overall inflation rate. Fresh fruit prices increased 5.3%, fresh vegetables rose 9%, and the broader food category advanced 3.8%, up from 3.5% in April. These increases matter because food is purchased repeatedly. A household can delay replacing an appliance or vehicle, but it cannot indefinitely postpone buying milk, bread, fruit or vegetables.</p>
<p>The pressure also sits on top of a much higher price level than Canadians faced before the recent inflation cycle. Statistics Canada reported that the overall CPI was 19.9% higher in 2025 than five years earlier, even though annual-average inflation had slowed to 2.1% that year. Grocery prices increased an average of 3.5% in 2025, faster than the 2.2% rise recorded in 2024. That is why a slower inflation rate does not automatically feel like relief: inflation measures how quickly prices are rising, while families continue paying the accumulated increases already built into the weekly bill.</p>
<h2>Shelter Costs Finally Offered Some Relief</h2>
<p>Shelter inflation slowed to 1.7% in May from 1.8% in April, providing an important offset to the jumps in transportation and food. Rent prices were still 3.5% higher than a year earlier, but that was the slowest annual rent increase since January 2022. The mortgage interest cost index edged down 0.2% year over year, while the homeowners’ replacement cost index fell 2.5%. Other owned-accommodation expenses, including real estate commissions, declined 2.1%.</p>
<p>Those figures do not mean housing suddenly became inexpensive. A renter signing a new lease or a homeowner renewing a mortgage may still face a payment far above what the same household paid several years ago. The improvement is mainly in the pace of change. Because shelter represents about 28% of the current CPI basket, even a small deceleration can materially restrain the national inflation rate. In May, that cooling prevented the gasoline and grocery shocks from pushing the headline figure even higher and showed why the composition of inflation can matter as much as the top-line number.</p>
<h2>Core Inflation Told a Calmer Story</h2>
<p>The most reassuring part of the report was that measures designed to look through extreme price movements remained close to the Bank of Canada’s target. CPI-median held at 2.1%, while CPI-trim remained at 2%. Excluding gasoline entirely, inflation rose to 2.2% from 2% in April. That increase deserves attention, but it was far below the 3.2% headline rate and suggested that the fuel shock had not yet spread broadly across the full consumer basket.</p>
<p>The Bank of Canada had already kept its policy rate at 2.25% on June 10, saying there was limited evidence that higher energy costs were passing through widely to other consumer prices. It also noted that the economy was operating with excess supply, a condition that can reduce businesses’ ability to raise prices. Policymakers therefore face a balancing act. Reacting too aggressively to a temporary oil shock could weaken an already soft economy, while ignoring persistent spillovers could allow inflation expectations to rise. May’s data strengthened the case for vigilance, not necessarily an immediate rate increase.</p>
<h2>The Same Inflation Rate Does Not Feel the Same Everywhere</h2>
<p>Prices accelerated in every province in May, with gasoline identified as the main driver across the country. Statistics Canada noted that the effect was larger in Atlantic Canada because fuel makes up a greater share of household expenditures there. That helps explain why a single national number can produce very different reactions. A household with two long commutes and oil-based heating may feel a much sharper squeeze than an urban household that relies on public transit and has a fixed housing payment.</p>
<p>The CPI basket itself reflects average spending patterns, not any one family’s budget. Under the 2026 basket update, transportation carries a weight of about 18.5%, food about 16.9% and shelter about 28.3% at link-month prices. Those weights determine how strongly each category influences the national result. They also reveal why gasoline can lift headline inflation quickly even when core measures remain steady. Personal inflation varies with income, location, housing tenure, diet and transportation needs, so the national 3.2% figure is best viewed as a benchmark rather than a perfect description of every household’s experience.</p>
<h2>What Comes Next Depends Heavily on Oil</h2>
<p>The near-term inflation outlook may improve if the recent decline in oil and gasoline prices continues. Reuters reported that pump prices were already reversing in June after an interim peace agreement between the United States and Iran eased some supply concerns. Because May’s increase was heavily concentrated in gasoline, a sustained energy-price pullback could lower the next headline reading without requiring a broad slowdown in the rest of the economy.</p>
<p>That possibility does not eliminate the risks. Grocery inflation remained above the headline rate, fresh produce was vulnerable to weather and trade disruptions, and inflation excluding gasoline accelerated slightly. The Bank of Canada has said total inflation could hover near 3% in the near term before gradually returning toward 2%, and its next rate decision is scheduled for July 15, 2026. The central question will be whether May was primarily a temporary energy shock or the beginning of wider price pressure. For households, meaningful relief will require more than one softer CPI report; it will require essential costs to stabilize long enough for incomes to catch up.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/01/increased-inflation.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="694">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/seven-in-10-canadians-say-young-adults-arent-getting-enough-help-to-find-careers-survey</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Seven in 10 Canadians Say Young Adults Aren’t Getting Enough Help to Find Careers: Survey]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 15:18:45 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/seven-in-10-canadians-say-young-adults-arent-getting-enough-help-to-find-careers-survey</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Choosing a career has never been a single decision, yet many young Canadians are expected to make high-stakes choices while]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Choosing a career has never been a single decision, yet many young Canadians are expected to make high-stakes choices while the ground shifts beneath them. Entry-level hiring remains difficult, artificial intelligence is changing job descriptions, and familiar routes from school to stable employment are becoming less predictable.</p>
<p>At the same time, career support can still amount to a brief conversation, a résumé workshop or a list of online postings. Those tools have value, but they rarely provide the workplace exposure, trusted relationships and personalized direction needed to turn an interest into a realistic career path. Growing concern about the transition into work is therefore not simply a criticism of young people, schools or employers. It reflects a broader recognition that navigating today’s labour market has become a complicated task—and that too many young adults are being asked to manage it largely on their own.</p>
<h2>The Seven-in-10 Result Points to a Systemic Concern</h2>
<p>Seven in 10 respondents said Canada may not be doing enough to help young adults between 18 and 29 find careers, according to national research commissioned by Meridian Credit Union and conducted by Leger. Concern was even higher among respondents aged 25 to 34, with 75 per cent questioning whether sufficient support is available. The results came from an online poll of 1,521 Canadian adults conducted from April 17 to April 20, 2026. The size of the response suggests the issue extends well beyond parents worrying about their own children. Canadians who recently navigated the transition themselves appear especially conscious of how difficult it can be.</p>
<p>The results also reveal concern about the programs intended to close the gap. Sixty-five per cent of respondents aged 18 to 24 expressed doubts about the effectiveness of existing skills-training programs, as did 52 per cent of those aged 25 to 34. That does not necessarily mean available programs are ineffective. It may mean they are difficult to discover, too general, disconnected from employers or unable to address the practical obstacles that prevent young adults from completing them. A course can teach a technical skill, but it cannot automatically provide transportation, professional contacts, confidence or a clear path to a first job.</p>
<h2>A Difficult Youth Job Market Raises the Stakes</h2>
<p>Young Canadians received some encouraging employment news in May 2026, when the unemployment rate for people aged 15 to 24 declined by 0.9 percentage points to 13.4 per cent. Youth employment increased by 22,000 during the month, including a notable rise in full-time positions. Even after that improvement, however, youth unemployment remained well above the pre-pandemic average of 10.8 per cent. Statistics Canada noted that the rate has consistently exceeded that earlier benchmark since January 2024.</p>
<p>Students searching for summer work have faced particularly difficult conditions. The unemployment rate among returning students aged 15 to 24 was 18 per cent in May 2026. That was an improvement from 20.1 per cent a year earlier, when students experienced the slowest start to a summer job season since 2009, excluding the pandemic years. These figures help explain why career guidance matters before a young person reaches a crisis point. When vacancies are limited, unsuccessful applications can easily be interpreted as evidence that an entire career choice was wrong. Strong guidance can help distinguish between a temporary hiring slowdown, a weak application strategy, a missing credential and a genuine mismatch between an individual’s goals and the opportunities available.</p>
<h2>The Bigger Problem May Be Navigation, Not Motivation</h2>
<p>Only one in six respondents in the Meridian research believed young adults lack the skills needed to succeed in the job market. That is a striking contrast with the much larger number who believed Canada may not be providing enough career support. The difference suggests many Canadians do not see young people as unwilling or incapable. Instead, they see a generation struggling to identify which skills are valuable, where those skills can be learned and how they translate into real employment.</p>
<p>International evidence supports that interpretation. The OECD has found that young people’s career expectations are increasingly concentrated in a relatively narrow group of traditional, high-status occupations, even as employers report shortages in other sectors. The organization also warns that many modern job titles are difficult to interpret, leaving students surrounded by more information but not necessarily more clarity. A young person may recognize familiar careers such as teacher, lawyer or nurse while knowing little about less visible occupations in logistics, advanced manufacturing, energy, cybersecurity or specialized construction. Better support would not pressure students toward a particular field. It would help them compare wages, working conditions, training requirements, local demand and advancement prospects before committing substantial time or money.</p>
<h2>Young Applicants and Small Employers Are Missing Each Other</h2>
<p>Part of the employment problem may be a basic mismatch in how employers recruit and how young adults search. Research from the Canadian Federation of Independent Business found that 62 per cent of small businesses primarily recruit through personal connections and referrals from people they trust. Meanwhile, 73 per cent of young job seekers rely mainly on online job boards, while only about half draw on their personal networks. Openings can therefore exist without reaching the candidates who need them.</p>
<p>This imbalance is especially consequential for young adults whose families have limited professional networks in Canada or little connection to growing industries. A student whose parent works in construction, finance or health care may hear about entry-level openings through everyday conversation. Another equally capable student may never learn that the position exists. Mentorship can help close that divide, yet an earlier RBC-Ipsos poll found that only 39 per cent of Canadians aged 14 to 29 had a career mentor they could rely on. Networking should not mean asking young adults to collect contacts without direction. Effective programs can introduce them to employers, alumni, tradespeople and working professionals while also teaching them how to ask informed questions, follow up respectfully and build relationships over time.</p>
<h2>Practical Experience Can Turn Uncertainty Into Direction</h2>
<p>Work experience does more than strengthen a résumé. It allows a young person to learn what an occupation actually feels like before making a long-term commitment. A placement can reveal whether the work is collaborative or independent, physically demanding or desk-based, highly structured or constantly changing. Even an experience that rules out a career can be valuable if it prevents years of training toward a role that does not fit.</p>
<p>Governments and employers have increasingly recognized this bridge between education and employment. Ottawa announced plans to create approximately 175,000 youth jobs and skills-building opportunities in 2026, including up to 100,000 Canada Summer Jobs positions, 55,000 work-integrated learning placements and more than 20,000 opportunities through the Youth Employment and Skills Strategy. Small-business research also found that co-op students and interns moved into permanent roles at a rate of 73 per cent among participating firms. The challenge is scale and access. A short placement with repetitive duties may add little, while a paid position that includes mentoring, meaningful tasks and regular feedback can build both competence and confidence. Quality experience should therefore be treated as part of career development—not simply inexpensive temporary labour.</p>
<h2>Support Remains Uneven Across Communities</h2>
<p>Career services exist throughout Canada, but awareness and access are inconsistent. An OECD review found that only 19 per cent of Canadian adults had used a career service during the previous five years, compared with an average of 39 per cent across the countries included in its analysis. People with less education, older workers and residents of rural areas were less likely to use those services, even though they can face greater risks from automation, changing skill requirements and limited local employment options.</p>
<p>Federal evaluations show why a one-size-fits-all approach is unlikely to work for young adults. Participants in the Youth Employment and Skills Strategy described transportation costs, childcare needs, financial pressure, mental-health challenges and limited program visibility as barriers to participation. Black and racialized youth, rural residents and those with less formal education emphasized the value of on-the-job training. New immigrants and young people with disabilities identified a need for personalized guidance, Canadian work experience and appropriate workplace accommodations. These are not problems that can be solved by directing everyone to the same website. A rural apprentice may need transportation to a job site, while a newcomer may need help translating overseas experience for Canadian employers. Equal access sometimes requires different forms of support.</p>
<h2>Effective Career Help Must Keep Pace With a Changing Economy</h2>
<p>Career guidance cannot be built around the assumption that occupations will remain unchanged for decades. Canadian research released in 2026 found that 57 per cent of employed people aged 18 to 24 believed artificial intelligence was affecting their long-term career opportunities. Among young adults who reported an impact, 49 per cent said they felt less secure, were reconsidering their career path or were thinking about moving to another industry. Guidance must therefore go beyond choosing a single occupation. It should help young people develop transferable abilities, understand how technology is changing specific tasks and identify where human judgment, communication and practical expertise remain important.</p>
<p>Canada is also making a major attempt to open clearer routes into skilled trades. The federal government has announced a $6-billion plan intended to recruit, train and hire between 80,000 and 100,000 new Red Seal workers over five years. Proposed measures include paid placements leading to apprenticeships, support for first-year apprentice wages and financial help during classroom training. Large investments can expand opportunity, but young people still need someone to explain how programs connect, which trade suits their strengths and what completing an apprenticeship requires. The strongest system would begin before graduation, include direct contact with employers and continue through training and the first years of work. Career support should not be a rescue service used after plans collapse. It should be a normal part of preparing for adult life.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/01/distrust-of-corporations-women-job-career.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-slaps-10-tariff-on-canned-vegetables-but-exempts-u-s-suppliers</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa Slaps 10% Tariff on Canned Vegetables—but Exempts U.S. Suppliers]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 14:33:34 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-slaps-10-tariff-on-canned-vegetables-but-exempts-u-s-suppliers</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A grocery-aisle staple has become the latest front in Canada’s effort to shield domestic industry from turbulent global trade. Ottawa]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A grocery-aisle staple has become the latest front in Canada’s effort to shield domestic industry from turbulent global trade. Ottawa has imposed a provisional 10 per cent surtax on certain imported canned vegetables, arguing that a surge of foreign supply and trade diversion could seriously damage Canadian growers and processors. Yet products originating in the United States are exempt, as are goods from Mexico, Israel, Chile and qualifying developing countries.</p>
<p>The decision creates an unusual policy balance. It offers immediate protection against some overseas competitors while leaving major treaty partners outside the tariff wall. For processors, the measure may provide breathing room during a difficult period. For importers and households, it raises questions about sourcing, competition and grocery prices. Much now depends on an independent trade tribunal, which must decide whether the evidence justifies longer-lasting protection.</p>
<h2>What Ottawa’s New Tariff Actually Does</h2>
<p>The measure took effect on June 19, 2026, and adds a 10 per cent surtax to covered canned vegetable imports from countries that do not qualify for an exemption. It is provisional rather than permanent, meaning Ottawa has acted before the Canadian International Trade Tribunal finishes its investigation. Federal rules permit that step in critical circumstances when waiting could cause damage that would be difficult to repair. The safeguard can remain in force for no more than 200 days, and it must end earlier if the tribunal concludes that imports are not causing or threatening serious injury.</p>
<p>That distinction matters because this is not a retaliatory tariff aimed at one government. It is a safeguard designed to slow selected imports while investigators assess conditions in the Canadian market. Ottawa says the goal is to stabilize the industry rather than punish trading partners. The government has also directed the tribunal to consider household affordability and food security, acknowledging that a policy intended to protect processors can also affect importers, retailers and shoppers.</p>
<h2>Only Certain Canned Products Are Covered</h2>
<p>The headline may sound broad, but the product list is specific. The underlying inquiry covers corn, peas, green beans, wax beans, peas-and-carrots mixes, mixed vegetables, white beans, black beans, red beans, pinto beans and chickpeas. The goods can be packaged for retail shelves, restaurants, industrial buyers or other commercial uses. They may be whole, sliced, diced, cooked, preserved, seasoned or sold in bulk, provided they fit the legal description and relevant customs classifications.</p>
<p>Several familiar products are outside the case. Fresh and dried vegetables are excluded, as are ready-to-eat meals in which vegetables are not the primary component. Purées, powders, juices, spreads, dips and pastes are also excluded. Frozen vegetables are part of the tribunal’s wider investigation, but Ottawa’s June 19 provisional surtax applies only to canned vegetables. That difference is important for grocery buyers and food-service companies because two products containing the same crop can receive different customs treatment depending on how they are processed and packaged.</p>
<h2>Why American Suppliers Are Exempt</h2>
<p>The United States exemption is not presented by Ottawa as a favour to Washington. The federal government says the exclusions reflect Canada’s international trade obligations. Along with the United States, originating goods from Mexico, Israel, Chile and qualifying developing countries are outside the provisional measure. Canada’s trade laws require special tests for certain free-trade partners before a safeguard can be applied, including whether their exports represent a substantial share of imports and whether they contribute importantly to the alleged injury.</p>
<p>That legal structure produces a politically awkward result. Canadian processors receive protection from some global suppliers, while American companies can continue shipping covered canned vegetables without the extra 10 per cent charge. Supporters can argue that Canada is defending its industry while respecting signed agreements. Critics can respond that excluding major nearby suppliers weakens the measure and shifts business toward exempt countries rather than toward Canadian plants. Both interpretations are plausible. The final impact will depend less on the headline rate than on where importers can source comparable products, at what price and in what volume.</p>
<h2>Trade Diversion Is Ottawa’s Central Concern</h2>
<p>Ottawa’s case is built around trade diversion: goods that face new barriers in one market can be redirected into another. The March order launching the inquiry said several World Trade Organization members had imposed, or were considering, restrictions on vegetable imports. The government argued that these developments appeared to be sending more product toward Canada. Domestic industry representatives have similarly described a sudden increase in low-priced frozen and canned vegetables that is disrupting established sales and production planning.</p>
<p>Trade diversion can be damaging even when foreign exporters have broken no rules. Unlike an anti-dumping case, a safeguard inquiry does not require proof that goods were sold below fair value or supported by an improper subsidy. The question is whether increased imports, including fairly traded imports, have become a principal cause of serious injury or a threat of it. That is a demanding threshold. The tribunal must examine import volumes, prices, domestic output, sales, employment, profitability and other evidence rather than assume that greater competition automatically qualifies as injury. Until that analysis is complete, Ottawa’s trade-diversion claim remains an allegation under formal review.</p>
<h2>A Domestic Industry Under Long-Term Pressure</h2>
<p>Canada’s fruit and vegetable preserving and specialty food sector is larger and more varied than the image of a single canning line suggests. Farm Credit Canada estimates that it includes roughly 630 establishments, concentrated most heavily in Ontario and Quebec and dominated by small and medium-sized businesses. The category covers frozen foods as well as canned, pickled and dehydrated products, so its statistics are broader than the vegetables named in the tariff. Even so, they illustrate the competitive environment faced by processors.</p>
<p>Import dependence has risen markedly. FCC reported that imported products represented 47 per cent of domestic supply in 2014, climbed to 56 per cent in 2024 and eased to 54 per cent in 2025. The sector’s margins improved in 2025 but remained only about 55 to 60 per cent of their 2019 level. Those figures help explain why producers sought government action. A processor operating on thin margins may have little room to absorb lower selling prices, higher labour costs or more expensive packaging. At the same time, import share alone does not prove serious injury, which is why the tribunal’s independent review is central.</p>
<h2>The Stakes Extend Beyond Factory Gates</h2>
<p>Canning links farms, processing plants, transportation companies, packaging suppliers and retailers. When a processor reduces contracts, the effect can reach growers before a crop is planted because many processing vegetables are produced to meet predetermined specifications and volumes. Statistics Canada reported that Ontario and Quebec together accounted for more than four-fifths of Canada’s vegetable farm-gate value in 2024, making the issue especially relevant in regions where farms and plants are clustered close together.</p>
<p>The industry also faces pressure from its own inputs. Federal briefing material has said that roughly 80 to 85 per cent of food-grade steel cans are imported, largely from the United States. That means Canadian processors can be exposed to cross-border price increases even when the vegetables themselves are grown domestically. A tariff on finished canned vegetables may therefore protect one side of the business while input costs remain vulnerable. Supporters see the safeguard as a way to preserve processing capacity and local farm demand. Skeptics may ask whether a border charge can solve productivity, scale, packaging and investment challenges that have developed over many years.</p>
<h2>What Shoppers Could Notice at the Grocery Store</h2>
<p>A 10 per cent border charge does not automatically produce a 10 per cent increase on a grocery shelf. Importers may absorb part of the cost, negotiate with suppliers, switch countries or reduce margins. Retailers may also blend higher-cost inventory with products bought earlier or sourced from exempt countries. Because American, Mexican and qualifying developing-country goods are excluded, buyers retain several tariff-free options. That flexibility could limit the effect on the average price of canned corn, peas or beans.</p>
<p>Still, research suggests that food tariffs can reach consumers relatively quickly. A Bank of Canada study of Canada’s 2018 counter-tariffs estimated average pass-through of about 70 per cent for food-store items after six quarters, although results varied widely. A separate 2026 Bank study found that goods hit by Canada’s 25 per cent counter-tariffs in 2025 rose about 6 per cent more than untariffed goods before falling after the tariffs were removed. Those episodes are not identical to this safeguard, but they show why affordability is part of the tribunal’s mandate. Low-cost canned foods are especially important when household budgets are tight.</p>
<h2>The Exemptions Could Reshape Supply Chains</h2>
<p>Importers facing the surtax have a clear incentive to reconsider where covered vegetables originate. A Canadian buyer purchasing canned chickpeas or beans from a non-exempt country may compare the new landed cost with offers from the United States, Mexico, Chile, Israel or eligible developing economies. If equivalent products are available, trade may shift toward exempt suppliers. That would reduce the tariff burden for the buyer but could also limit how much additional market share Canadian processors gain.</p>
<p>Rules of origin will matter. Shipping a product through an exempt country is not enough; it must qualify as originating there under the applicable trade rules. Importers will need accurate classification and origin documentation, while border officials will determine whether the surtax applies. This creates administrative work even for companies that ultimately pay no additional duty. It also means the policy’s results may be uneven across products. A processor competing mainly with a non-exempt source could receive meaningful relief, while another competing heavily with U.S. supply might notice little change. The measure is therefore best understood as targeted and conditional, not as a complete wall around Canada’s canned vegetable market.</p>
<h2>The Tribunal Will Decide Whether Protection Continues</h2>
<p>The Canadian International Trade Tribunal began its inquiry in March and is scheduled to report by September 9, 2026. It is an independent, quasi-judicial body that examines trade injury and advises the federal government. The review period begins on January 1, 2023, giving the tribunal several years of import and industry data to study. It must determine whether increased imports are a principal cause of serious injury or a threat of serious injury to Canadian producers of like or directly competitive goods.</p>
<p>An affirmative finding would not automatically lock in the current 10 per cent rate. The tribunal must recommend the most appropriate remedy, taking Canada’s trade obligations, food affordability and food security into account. Possible tools can include additional duties, tariff-rate quotas or other import restrictions, depending on what the government ultimately accepts and implements. The March order asked for recommendations capable of addressing injury over a three-year period. A negative finding would end the provisional surtax on the date of the decision. That makes the June action a temporary bridge, not the final verdict on whether the industry deserves extended protection.</p>
<h2>A Test of Canada’s New Trade Strategy</h2>
<p>The canned vegetable decision reflects a broader shift toward faster, more defensive trade policy. Governments facing tariffs, industrial subsidies and redirected exports are increasingly treating processing capacity and food supply as questions of economic security. Ottawa’s move shows a willingness to use a World Trade Organization-recognized safeguard before an inquiry is complete, while limiting the measure to the maximum provisional period and preserving treaty-based exclusions.</p>
<p>The outcome will offer lessons well beyond one grocery category. If the tariff stabilizes Canadian production without noticeably raising prices, other industries may view safeguards as a useful response to sudden import surges. If supply simply moves toward exempt countries, or if consumers face higher costs without new domestic investment, the policy may look less effective. The central challenge is not choosing between producers and consumers as if only one can benefit. It is determining whether short-term protection gives viable businesses time to adjust, invest and compete. By September, the tribunal’s evidence should provide a clearer answer than the initial political debate, and Ottawa will have to decide whether temporary relief should become a longer-term trade remedy.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/shutterstock_2509909693.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="666">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-briefing-warns-trump-could-hit-six-more-canadian-industries-with-tariffs</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa Briefing Warns Trump Could Hit Six More Canadian Industries With Tariffs]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 12:16:26 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-briefing-warns-trump-could-hit-six-more-canadian-industries-with-tariffs</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories, Tariffs, Trump</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s tariff risk map is widening again. After targeting metals, vehicles, lumber and other strategic goods, the Trump administration was]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s tariff risk map is widening again. After targeting metals, vehicles, lumber and other strategic goods, the Trump administration was reported to be considering national-security investigations into six additional industrial categories: large-scale batteries, cast-iron products and fittings, plastic piping, industrial chemicals, power-grid equipment and telecommunications hardware.</p>
<p>The potential measures would be pursued under Section 232 of the U.S. Trade Expansion Act, which allows Washington to restrict imports considered a threat to national security. Consideration of an investigation is not the same as a finalized tariff order, and no specific rates were attached to the reported discussions. Still, the warning matters because the affected products sit deep inside North America’s manufacturing, construction, energy and communications systems. A duty on an obscure component can eventually reach factories, municipal projects, utility bills and household costs.</p>
<h2>Large-Scale Batteries Could Put Billions in Investment at Risk</h2>
<p>Canada has spent years trying to become more than a supplier of raw battery minerals. Governments and companies have announced investments covering mineral processing, battery materials, cell production, vehicle assembly and recycling. Federal figures placed announced Canadian electric-vehicle supply-chain investments between October 2020 and April 2024 at approximately $46.1 billion. One of the largest projects is the NextStar Energy battery-cell plant in Windsor, Ontario, backed by Stellantis and LG Energy Solution as part of an investment exceeding $5 billion.</p>
<p>A new U.S. tariff would threaten more than batteries installed in electric cars. Large-scale battery systems are also becoming essential to electricity grids, data centres and renewable-energy projects because they can store power and release it when demand rises. The United States installed approximately 58 gigawatt-hours of battery storage in 2025, with another major increase expected in 2026. Canadian plants were developed with access to that expanding North American market in mind.</p>
<p>For workers in Windsor and communities hosting suppliers, the danger would be less dramatic than an immediate plant closure but still significant. Tariffs can delay purchasing agreements, reduce production volumes or persuade companies to place their next investment inside the United States. Canadian manufacturers could absorb part of the duty through lower margins, while American customers could seek domestic or overseas alternatives. Either outcome would weaken the economics behind projects that were built around a relatively open continental market.</p>
<h2>Cast-Iron Products and Fittings Face Pressure Beyond the Steel Mill</h2>
<p>Cast-iron products and fittings rarely receive the attention given to automobiles or steel mills, yet they are essential to water systems, commercial buildings, industrial plants and energy infrastructure. Fittings such as couplings, flanges, elbows and connectors allow pipes to change direction, join equipment and withstand pressure. A construction site may need only a small number of these parts, but work can stop completely when the correct fitting is unavailable.</p>
<p>The threatened category would arrive as Canadian metal producers and fabricators are already dealing with extensive U.S. restrictions. More than 90 per cent of Canada’s steel and aluminum exports have historically been sold to the United States, reflecting supply chains developed over decades. Current American metal duties have placed pressure not only on large producers but also on smaller businesses that cut, shape, coat and assemble metal products for individual customers.</p>
<p>The experience of adjacent manufacturers offers a warning. In 2025, a Nova Scotia steel fabricator told Reuters that a 50 per cent U.S. tariff had made selling into the American market effectively impossible. Cast-iron fittings are a distinct product category, but manufacturers could face the same basic calculation: raise prices and risk losing customers, or absorb the tariff and sacrifice already-thin margins. Importers may also hold less inventory when trade rules are uncertain, increasing the chance that builders and repair crews encounter longer waits for specialized components.</p>
<h2>Plastic Piping Tariffs Could Reach Municipal Construction Projects</h2>
<p>Plastic pipes and fittings carry drinking water, sewage, natural gas and irrigation supplies while also serving mining, telecommunications and industrial facilities. Canada’s plastic pipe, fitting and profile-manufacturing industry generated approximately $3 billion in revenue in 2023, although that represented a decline of roughly 10.7 per cent from the previous year. The broader Canadian plastic-products sector exported about $13 billion worth of goods in 2024, demonstrating how deeply these materials are embedded in international trade.</p>
<p>Unlike luxury consumer products, piping is usually purchased because a building, subdivision or public system cannot function without it. A municipality replacing an aging water main may require thousands of metres of pipe built to specific pressure and safety standards. Contractors cannot always switch products quickly because engineering approvals, building codes and project designs may specify particular materials, dimensions or manufacturers.</p>
<p>A U.S. tariff could therefore create several possible consequences. Canadian producers might reduce prices to preserve contracts, American distributors might pass the additional cost to contractors, or purchasers might delay projects while looking for alternatives. None of those outcomes would be limited to the factory floor. Higher material costs can influence bids for housing developments, wastewater systems and road reconstruction.</p>
<p>The timing is especially sensitive because Canadian manufacturers already face volatile resin costs, transportation expenses and uneven construction demand. Even the possibility of future tariffs can make long-term supply agreements harder to negotiate. For a sector built on high volumes and carefully controlled costs, relatively modest changes at the border can determine whether an order remains profitable.</p>
<h2>Industrial Chemicals Would Spread the Impact Across the Economy</h2>
<p>Industrial chemicals are sometimes described as an industry behind other industries. They become ingredients in automotive components, fertilizers, paints, adhesives, insulation, packaging, electronics, pharmaceuticals and construction materials. According to the Chemistry Industry Association of Canada, the country’s industrial-chemical sector recorded approximately $33.7 billion in shipments and $26.8 billion in exports during 2024. The sector directly employed about 21,200 people and supported a much larger network of transportation, engineering, maintenance and service jobs.</p>
<p>That reach makes an industrial-chemical tariff particularly difficult to contain. A duty imposed on a chemical crossing the border may eventually appear in the price of several downstream products. A resin used in vehicle parts, for example, can affect a chemical plant, a moulding company, an auto-parts supplier and an assembly operation. The cost can move through the chain even when the final product itself is not directly covered by the original tariff.</p>
<p>Canada and the United States have built highly integrated chemical supply chains around pipelines, rail systems and manufacturing clusters in Alberta, Ontario and Quebec. Materials may cross the border for processing before returning as a different chemical or finished product. Replacing those relationships is not as simple as ordering from another website; industrial customers must test materials, verify performance and obtain regulatory or safety approvals.</p>
<p>Tariffs could encourage some American companies to purchase domestically, but limited capacity or specialized requirements may leave them paying more instead. Canadian producers would face the competing risks of lost orders and declining margins. The result could be lower investment in facilities that require enormous upfront spending and must operate at high capacity to remain competitive.</p>
<h2>Power-Grid Equipment Tariffs Could Deepen an Existing Shortage</h2>
<p>Transformers, switchgear, circuit breakers and other grid components are becoming some of the most sought-after industrial products in North America. Electricity demand is rising as data centres expand, factories electrify and utilities replace aging infrastructure. Canadian electrical-equipment manufacturers exported approximately $4 billion worth of products in 2024, although that total includes more than power-grid machinery alone.</p>
<p>A tariff on grid equipment could be unusually counterproductive because American utilities are already struggling with long lead times. U.S. demand for certain large generator transformers has risen sharply since 2019, while prices for major transformer categories have increased by about 80 per cent over five years. Some customized equipment can take as long as four years to obtain. The United States also imports more than 80 per cent of the large power transformers used domestically, leaving projects vulnerable to trade restrictions and supply disruptions.</p>
<p>For a utility planner, a delayed transformer is not an interchangeable inconvenience. Equipment must be engineered for specific voltages, loads and safety requirements. Delays can postpone new housing connections, renewable-energy projects, factory expansions or the restoration of damaged infrastructure.</p>
<p>Canada and the United States also operate interconnected electricity systems, with 34 active international transmission lines. That physical integration makes the idea of treating Canadian grid equipment as a security threat especially complicated. Washington may hope tariffs stimulate domestic manufacturing over time, but the immediate effect could be higher project costs and longer waits. Canadian producers, meanwhile, could lose access to their largest nearby market precisely when North American electricity investment is accelerating.</p>
<h2>Telecom Equipment Could Become the Next Strategic Trade Battleground</h2>
<p>Telecommunications equipment occupies a politically sensitive space because it supports mobile networks, internet traffic, emergency services, businesses and government communications. The potential tariff category would involve physical products such as communications hardware, radio equipment, network components and related devices rather than the software and digital services that make up much of Canada’s technology economy.</p>
<p>Canadian information and communications technology companies exported approximately $7.6 billion in physical ICT goods to the United States in 2024. The figures also reveal an area of vulnerability: exports from the “other communications equipment” manufacturing category were about 6.1 per cent lower than in 2019. That suggests some manufacturers would enter a new tariff fight without the rapid growth or financial cushion enjoyed by larger parts of the technology sector.</p>
<p>Many Canadian telecom-hardware businesses compete through specialized engineering rather than massive production volumes. A mid-sized company may design and test equipment in Canada while relying on components, assembly facilities and customers spread across the continent. Moving production to satisfy U.S. policy demands could require new facilities, supplier certifications and substantial capital.</p>
<p>American officials could argue that domestic communications manufacturing is important to security and supply-chain resilience. Canadian officials, however, would have a strong case that trusted Canadian suppliers strengthen rather than weaken continental security. If tariffs move ahead, Ottawa would likely seek exemptions while helping affected companies find alternative markets. Diversification may reduce long-term dependence, but it cannot quickly replace the scale, proximity and shared technical standards of the United States.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/10/trump-987654.png" type="image/png" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/5-canadian-stocks-that-could-provide-huge-returns-in-the-next-1-3-months</guid>      <title><![CDATA[5 Canadian Stocks that Could Provide Huge Returns in the next 1-3 Months]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 12:11:27 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/5-canadian-stocks-that-could-provide-huge-returns-in-the-next-1-3-months</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <category><![CDATA[Finance]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[There is no genuinely risk-free way to chase outsized stock-market gains over only one to three months. Short holding periods]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There is no genuinely risk-free way to chase outsized stock-market gains over only one to three months. Short holding periods leave little time to recover from an earnings miss, commodity shock or broader selloff. Still, some Canadian companies offer a more attractive balance than speculative small caps: established businesses, visible cash flow, strong balance sheets and near-term catalysts that could change how the market values them.</p>
<p>This selection was built around recent operating momentum, defensive characteristics and developments that may support a rerating over the next quarter. “Minimal risk” is therefore relative, not literal. Each company can fall, and none should be treated as a guaranteed trade. Their advantage is that the underlying businesses provide a better cushion than stocks whose entire appeal depends on hype. The assessment reflects information available on June 19, 2026.</p>
<h2>Element Fleet Management: A Quality Business the Market May Be Underestimating</h2>
<p>Element Fleet Management stands out because its growth is tied less to consumer spending than to the everyday need for companies to operate vehicles efficiently. The Toronto-listed fleet manager oversees more than 1.5 million vehicles worldwide and earns money from financing, servicing and managing those fleets. In the first quarter of 2026, net revenue rose 17% year over year to a record US$324 million, adjusted diluted earnings per share increased 24%, and adjusted free cash flow per share climbed 25%. Its adjusted operating margin reached 56.2%, while adjusted return on equity improved to 20.3%. Those are unusually strong figures for a business built around long-term commercial relationships rather than a fashionable consumer trend.</p>
<p>The near-term opportunity comes from a mismatch between business performance and market expectations. Element’s shares declined after the results despite the record numbers, suggesting investors remain concerned about funding costs, credit provisions and the pace of growth. That creates room for a rebound if the next update confirms that margins and cash generation are holding up. The company is also buying back shares, including 2.29 million shares in the first quarter at an average price of C$33.33. Buybacks can amplify per-share growth when executed below long-term fair value. The main risks are higher borrowing costs, a large client problem or weaker fleet demand, but recurring service revenue and investment-grade credit ratings provide a meaningful cushion.</p>
<h2>Empire Company: Defensive Earnings with a Fresh Catalyst</h2>
<p>Empire Company, the owner of Sobeys, Safeway, FreshCo, Farm Boy and other grocery banners, offers a less dramatic but more defensive setup. Food retail is not immune to recessions, yet grocery demand is far steadier than demand for cars, travel or luxury goods. Empire’s fiscal fourth-quarter results, released on June 18, showed net earnings of C$212 million, or C$0.94 per share, compared with C$173 million and C$0.74 a year earlier. Adjusted earnings per share grew 27%, while quarterly sales increased 2.2% to approximately C$7.81 billion. Full-year sales reached C$31.95 billion, giving the company scale that smaller retailers cannot easily match.</p>
<p>The potential catalyst is a combination of stronger earnings, capital returns and expansion of the FreshCo discount format. Empire plans to open its first FreshCo stores in Atlantic Canada during fiscal 2027, extending a banner that has already gained traction in Ontario and Western Canada. Management also intends to renew its normal-course issuer bid, seeking authority to repurchase up to 10.75 million Class A shares, equal to roughly 9.6% of the public float. That does not mean the entire amount will be purchased, but it gives the company considerable flexibility to support per-share earnings. Risks include fierce price competition, labour and distribution expenses, food inflation and execution problems. Even so, a national grocery network and reliable demand make Empire one of the more credible short-term rerating candidates on the TSX.</p>
<h2>Dollarama: Momentum, Pricing Power and an International Growth Option</h2>
<p>Dollarama has become one of Canada’s most dependable retail growth stories by selling inexpensive essentials at a time when households remain highly price-conscious. Its first quarter of fiscal 2027 delivered a 21.4% increase in sales to C$1.85 billion. Canadian comparable-store sales rose 5.6%, supported by a 3.5% increase in transactions and a 2% increase in average transaction size. Net earnings advanced 10.4% to C$302.3 million, while diluted earnings per share increased 13.3% to C$1.11. The company also opened 28 net new Canadian stores during the quarter and repurchased nearly two million shares for C$339.1 million.</p>
<p>The short-term case rests on continued earnings-estimate increases and evidence that Dollarama can repeat parts of its Canadian playbook abroad. The acquisition of Australia’s The Reject Shop added 410 stores, and the company has begun renovating locations and introducing new layouts and merchandise. That expansion creates a substantial growth runway, while the core Canadian operation continues to benefit when consumers trade down to lower-priced products. The stock rose sharply after the latest earnings beat, so valuation is the clearest risk: excellent businesses can still deliver poor short-term returns when expectations become too high. Australia initially reduces consolidated margins and adds integration risk. Nevertheless, strong traffic, store growth, international optionality and aggressive buybacks give Dollarama several ways to keep earnings moving higher.</p>
<h2>Topaz Energy: Energy Upside Without the Full Cost of Drilling</h2>
<p>Topaz Energy offers a different type of energy exposure. Instead of carrying the full cost and operational risk of drilling wells, it collects royalties from production on its acreage and earns infrastructure revenue. That structure can produce high margins and relatively modest capital requirements, although the company remains exposed to oil and natural-gas prices. In the first quarter of 2026, royalty production averaged 24,609 barrels of oil equivalent per day, above the high end of its previous guidance range. Total oil and liquids production was 7% higher than a year earlier, royalty production revenue reached C$71.2 million, and free cash flow was C$78.7 million. Net debt also declined by 5% during the quarter.</p>
<p>Topaz raised its quarterly dividend to C$0.35 per share and said its projected 2026 dividend should remain sustainable below US$55 per barrel for crude oil and at extremely weak natural-gas pricing. Management based that assessment on infrastructure revenue, hedging and its diversified royalty base. The company expects 2026 royalty production to track near the upper end of its range and estimates only C$4 million to C$5 million of capital spending before acquisitions. That low-capital model is the key downside buffer. Firm oil prices, stronger operator activity or another acquisition could lift sentiment quickly. The risks are still real: commodity prices can reverse, operators control drilling decisions, and acquisitions can add debt. Topaz is not a bond substitute, but it offers a more insulated route into energy than many smaller producers.</p>
<h2>CAE: A Defence and Aviation Turnaround with Measurable Cost Savings</h2>
<p>CAE combines two businesses that can move in different directions: civil aviation training and defence simulation. That diversification matters because softer airline-training demand can be offset by stronger military spending. For fiscal 2026, CAE reported C$4.9 billion in revenue and adjusted earnings per share of C$1.20. Its fourth quarter produced C$1.33 billion in revenue and C$0.42 in adjusted earnings per share, although adjusted operating performance was lower than a year earlier and restructuring expenses weighed on reported profit. Earlier in the year, the defence segment delivered its best adjusted operating margin in more than six years, while net debt to adjusted EBITDA fell to 2.3 times, ahead of the company’s fiscal year-end target.</p>
<p>The catalyst is CAE’s transformation plan. Management is targeting C$125 million to C$150 million in annual run-rate savings by fiscal 2030 and C$950 million to C$1 billion of adjusted segment operating income by that year. Most of those gains lie beyond a three-month window, but markets frequently reprice turnaround stories before the full savings appear. Evidence of early execution, new defence contracts or stabilization in civil training could therefore move the shares materially. The downside is that fiscal 2027 has been positioned as a reset year, and cost-cutting programs can disappoint or take longer than planned. CAE also faces contract-timing, airline-cycle and geopolitical risks. Still, its installed training base, defence exposure and improving leverage make it a more credible turnaround candidate than a speculative technology or mining stock.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/02/Dollarama.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="1000">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadian-space-giant-makes-620-million-push-into-u-s-defence-market</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canadian Space Giant Makes $620-Million Push Into U.S. Defence Market]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:55:38 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadian-space-giant-makes-620-million-push-into-u-s-defence-market</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A familiar Canadian name is making an unusually bold move south of the border. MDA Space has agreed to buy]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A familiar Canadian name is making an unusually bold move south of the border. MDA Space has agreed to buy Colorado-based Blue Canyon Technologies from RTX’s Raytheon business for US$620 million in cash, equal to roughly C$874 million. The deal would add American manufacturing capacity, defence customers and hundreds of specialized employees to the company behind generations of Canadarm technology.</p>
<p>The attraction is bigger than one satellite manufacturer. Governments are pouring money into communications, surveillance, missile warning and other space-based systems, while U.S. agencies increasingly want suppliers capable of producing spacecraft quickly and at scale. For MDA, Blue Canyon offers a faster route into that market than building a comparable operation from scratch. It also creates a test of whether a Canadian space champion can expand inside one of Washington’s most protected and competitive industries.</p>
<h2>A Deal Built Around Access, Not Just Assets</h2>
<p>The headline price is US$620 million, not C$620 million. MDA values the transaction at approximately C$874 million and plans to acquire all of Blue Canyon Technologies in an all-cash purchase from Raytheon. The agreement is expected to close by the end of 2026, provided regulators approve it and the usual closing conditions are met. Blue Canyon would bring more than 400 employees and two manufacturing facilities in the Denver-area aerospace cluster, giving MDA an immediate operating base close to major U.S. military, civil-space and commercial customers.</p>
<p>That physical presence may be the most important part of the transaction. MDA already sells technology internationally, but the U.S. defence market places a premium on domestic facilities, security credentials and a record of delivering government programs. Blue Canyon supplies all three. Instead of approaching Washington mainly as a foreign vendor, MDA would own an established American spacecraft business with local workers, production lines and customer relationships. The acquisition is therefore less like buying a collection of machines and more like purchasing a bridge into a market that can be difficult for outsiders to enter.</p>
<h2>What Blue Canyon Brings to MDA</h2>
<p>Founded in 2008, Blue Canyon designs and builds small satellites, spacecraft buses, components and mission systems. A spacecraft bus is the underlying platform that provides functions such as power, communications, thermal control and pointing, allowing a customer’s payload to do its job in orbit. The company says its technology has supported more than 85 launched spacecraft and that over 3,500 of its products are operating in space. That flight history matters because government customers tend to favour hardware with demonstrated reliability over untested designs.</p>
<p>Blue Canyon also adds capabilities that fit neatly beside MDA’s growing satellite business. Its portfolio includes high-precision guidance, navigation, control and stabilization technologies, as well as modular spacecraft that can be configured for different missions. MDA currently builds larger satellite platforms and components, including its Aurora digital satellite line. Bringing more precision hardware and small-spacecraft expertise under the same corporate roof could reduce reliance on outside suppliers and allow the combined company to bid on broader packages. Management has said roughly three-quarters of Blue Canyon’s revenue and opportunity pipeline is linked to defence, making the purchase a direct expansion into national-security work rather than a general bet on commercial space.</p>
<h2>Why Washington’s Space Market Is So Attractive</h2>
<p>Military power increasingly depends on what happens hundreds or thousands of kilometres above Earth. Satellites support secure communications, navigation, weather monitoring, intelligence and early warning, and the United States is spending heavily to make those networks larger and more resilient. Recent contract activity shows the scale of the opportunity. In 2025, the U.S. Space Force selected three launch providers for a national-security program worth a combined US$13.5 billion through 2029. Later that year, the Space Development Agency awarded contracts worth about US$3.5 billion for 72 missile-warning and tracking satellites.</p>
<p>Those awards do not guarantee business for MDA or Blue Canyon, but they show why proven spacecraft manufacturers are valuable. American agencies are moving toward constellations made up of many smaller satellites, refreshed more frequently than traditional billion-dollar spacecraft. That model rewards companies able to manufacture standardized platforms quickly while adapting them for specific payloads. Blue Canyon already participates in U.S. government programs and was among the vendors selected for the Space Force’s 10-year Space Test Experiments Platform 2.0 contracting vehicle. MDA is effectively betting that demand for repeatable spacecraft production will remain strong as space becomes a permanent part of defence planning rather than a specialized side program.</p>
<h2>From Canadarm Icon to Integrated Space Contractor</h2>
<p>For many Canadians, MDA is still associated with the robotic arm shown beside astronauts and space shuttles. That legacy is real: the first Canadarm debuted on the space shuttle Columbia in November 1981, and MDA also built Canadarm2 for the International Space Station. The company’s history, however, extends well beyond robotics. It has worked on Earth-observation systems, communications satellites and more than 450 missions, while growing into Canada’s largest space technology developer and manufacturer.</p>
<p>The Blue Canyon purchase shows how far MDA’s ambitions have moved from being a specialist supplier. In January 2026, the company was selected for the U.S. Missile Defense Agency’s SHIELD contracting program, allowing it to compete for future task orders. It has also introduced defence-focused platforms and expanded its satellite-manufacturing capabilities. Owning Blue Canyon would deepen that shift by adding complete small spacecraft, American production and a workforce accustomed to defence requirements. The strategic goal is to become a company that can provide more of a mission—from components and satellite buses to integrated spacecraft and supporting services—rather than contributing one celebrated piece of technology to someone else’s program.</p>
<h2>The Financial Bet Behind the Expansion</h2>
<p>This is a substantial purchase for MDA. The company reported C$1.63 billion in revenue for 2025, then generated C$464 million in the first quarter of 2026. At the end of that quarter, it held a C$299 million net cash position and had C$1.2 billion of total liquidity. Even with that balance-sheet strength, MDA is not paying for Blue Canyon from cash alone. The acquisition was fully committed and financed at signing through senior secured debt, which will raise leverage after the transaction closes.</p>
<p>Management expects pro forma net debt to adjusted EBITDA to remain within its target range of 1.5 to 2.5 times. It also says Blue Canyon is profitable and cash-generating and should increase adjusted EBITDA and adjusted earnings per share in 2027. Those are encouraging projections, but they remain projections. The business must continue winning contracts, retaining skilled employees and delivering complex spacecraft without costly delays. Investors will also watch whether higher interest expense absorbs part of the expected earnings benefit. The deal is designed to accelerate growth, yet its success will ultimately be judged by cash generated from completed programs, not the size of the acquisition announcement.</p>
<h2>The Security Hurdle a Canadian Buyer Must Clear</h2>
<p>Buying an ordinary American manufacturer is very different from acquiring a company that handles sensitive defence work. Blue Canyon holds U.S. facility security clearances, while MDA is headquartered in Canada. That creates foreign ownership, control or influence concerns under the American industrial-security system. MDA has indicated that the business will operate through a mitigated structure intended to preserve access to classified opportunities while protecting U.S. national-security information.</p>
<p>Such arrangements can involve independent directors, government security committees, technology-control plans and restrictions on communications or operational links with foreign affiliates. The exact structure is subject to review by U.S. authorities, and it may limit how freely MDA can combine Blue Canyon with its Canadian operations. That is the trade-off at the centre of the deal: MDA wants the market access that comes with an established cleared contractor, but Washington will require safeguards preventing sensitive information from flowing where it should not. Regulatory approval is therefore not a routine footnote. It is one of the conditions that will determine how much strategic value MDA can actually extract from the purchase.</p>
<h2>What the Deal Could Mean for Canada</h2>
<p>The acquisition gives a Canadian-headquartered company a larger role in the world’s most lucrative government space market, but the immediate expansion is American. Blue Canyon’s employees and manufacturing sites are in Colorado, and classified work will need to remain inside a tightly controlled U.S. structure. Canadians should therefore be cautious about assuming the purchase will automatically shift hundreds of jobs, contracts or sensitive technologies north of the border.</p>
<p>The potential Canadian benefit is more indirect. Stronger access to U.S. programs could increase MDA’s scale, strengthen its supplier base and support continued investment in satellite platforms developed across the wider company. MDA entered the deal with more than 4,000 employees globally and a Canadian industrial footprint spanning robotics, satellite systems and geointelligence. A successful U.S. expansion could make the company a more credible prime contractor when Canada and allied governments seek sovereign communications, surveillance or space-domain capabilities. It could also expose Canadian engineers and suppliers to a larger flow of commercial and unclassified work. Still, those gains depend on contracts being won and on security rules allowing meaningful collaboration; ownership alone does not guarantee either outcome.</p>
<h2>The Numbers That Matter After the Announcement</h2>
<p>MDA says Blue Canyon will add US$3.5 billion, or roughly C$4.9 billion, to its opportunity pipeline. That figure is eye-catching because MDA’s firm backlog stood at about C$3.7 billion at the end of March 2026. The two numbers are not equivalent. Backlog represents contracted work that has not yet been recognized as revenue, while a pipeline includes potential contracts that may be delayed, reduced, awarded to competitors or never awarded at all. Treating the pipeline as guaranteed future sales would overstate the deal’s certainty.</p>
<p>The milestones worth watching are more practical: regulatory clearance, retention of Blue Canyon’s technical workforce, conversion of identified opportunities into signed orders and evidence that the combined company can deliver programs on schedule. Debt levels and interest costs will matter as well, especially if government procurement timelines stretch out. MDA’s long operating history and Blue Canyon’s flight heritage make the strategic logic credible, but space manufacturing remains a difficult business with technical, political and budget risks. The purchase could transform MDA into a more formidable North American defence-space supplier. It could also become an expensive lesson if market access proves easier to buy than contracts are to win.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/MDA-Ltd.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/conservatives-accuse-carney-of-skipping-100-question-periods-while-spending-nearly-1-million-on-in-flight-meals</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Conservatives Accuse Carney of Skipping 100 Question Periods While Spending Nearly $1 Million on In-Flight Meals]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:37:56 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/conservatives-accuse-carney-of-skipping-100-question-periods-while-spending-nearly-1-million-on-in-flight-meals</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A cake covered in vanilla icing and rainbow sprinkles became the unlikely centrepiece of Ottawa’s latest accountability fight. Conservative MPs]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A cake covered in vanilla icing and rainbow sprinkles became the unlikely centrepiece of Ottawa’s latest accountability fight. Conservative MPs brought it to Parliament to mark what they called Prime Minister Mark Carney’s 100th missed Question Period—a milestone they argued reflected an unwillingness to face regular scrutiny in the House of Commons.</p>
<p>Days later, the opposition intensified its attack with a separate figure: $962,633.24 in catering expenses connected to 14 international trips aboard government aircraft. The number came from a Department of National Defence response to a parliamentary written question, but it requires important context. The spending covered catering and associated services for travelling delegations and flight crews, not meals consumed by Carney alone. Together, however, the two figures have given Conservatives a powerful narrative about visibility, spending and political priorities.</p>
<h2>The Cake That Turned Attendance Into a Headline</h2>
<p>Conservative MP Eric Duncan arrived at Parliament with a cake bearing the message “Happy 100 Question Periods Missed!” in both official languages. The prop was deliberately lighthearted, but the accusation behind it was serious. Conservative House leader Andrew Scheer said Carney had been absent from 100 of the 136 Question Periods held since he became prime minister. The opposition presented the total as evidence that Carney was becoming increasingly difficult to question inside the country’s most visible forum for government accountability.</p>
<p>Carney was attending the G7 summit in France when the Conservatives said he reached the 100-absence mark. Scheer acknowledged that representing Canada at an international summit was a legitimate reason to miss Parliament. The criticism instead focused on the many other occasions when Conservatives said the prime minister was in Ottawa or nearby. The cake made the complaint instantly understandable: while detailed debates about parliamentary procedure rarely attract widespread attention, a decorated dessert commemorating 100 absences created an image that could travel quickly across television, social media and political fundraising appeals.</p>
<h2>How Conservatives Arrived at the Number 100</h2>
<p>According to the Conservatives’ calculations, Carney missed 100 of 136 Question Periods and was in Ottawa—or sufficiently close to attend—during 64 of those absences. That second figure is central to their case. International travel, emergencies and major government business can take any prime minister away from Parliament. The opposition argues that absences are harder to justify when the prime minister is working within a short distance of the Commons chamber.</p>
<p>The calculation is nevertheless a partisan count rather than an official attendance statistic issued by the House of Commons. It also treats every Question Period as a separate opportunity for the prime minister to appear, even though cabinet ministers and parliamentary secretaries routinely answer questions connected to their portfolios. Carney has previously defended his approach by emphasizing the strength of his ministerial team and saying that he answers questions in numerous settings. That defence addresses how the government operates, but it does not fully answer the Conservatives’ political argument: a prime minister may delegate responses legally, yet voters can still expect the person leading the government to appear regularly for direct questioning.</p>
<h2>What Question Period Requires—and What It Does Not</h2>
<p>The House of Commons sets aside up to 45 minutes for oral questions on each sitting day. The proceedings normally begin at approximately 2:15 p.m., except on Fridays, when they start at about 11:15 a.m. Opposition leaders receive the first opportunities to question the government, followed by MPs from the other recognized parties, government benches, smaller parties and independent members. Its rapid exchanges make Question Period one of Parliament’s most recognizable rituals.</p>
<p>The rules do not require the prime minister to personally answer every question—or even to be present at every Question Period. Questions may be directed to a specific minister, but the government decides who responds. The Speaker cannot force the prime minister or any particular cabinet minister to provide the answer. Parliamentary rules also permit members to be away when occupied with official, public or other parliamentary business. That means the attendance dispute is mainly about political accountability rather than a violation of parliamentary procedure. Conservatives are not alleging that Carney broke a formal attendance rule; they are arguing that he has fallen below the level of public scrutiny expected from a prime minister.</p>
<h2>What the $962,633.24 Catering Figure Covers</h2>
<p>The catering controversy emerged from written Question Q-1111, submitted by Conservative MP Scot Davidson on April 23, 2026. Davidson requested information about flights involving the prime minister since Carney was sworn in, including aircraft, passenger, catering and meal details. The Department of National Defence provided its response on June 10. Conservatives subsequently said the records showed $962,633.24 in catering expenses associated with 14 international trips during Carney’s first year.</p>
<p>Describing that amount simply as Carney’s personal “meal bill” would be misleading. Government flight catering can include food and non-alcoholic beverages for the prime minister, ministers, advisers, officials, security personnel, journalists, aircraft crews and other members of a delegation. The reported category may also include delivery, handling, storage, cleaning, disposal of international food waste, administrative charges, security fees and applicable taxes. A single trip can involve several long flight segments and dozens of passengers. Those details do not make the cost immune from criticism, but they change what the number represents: it is a delegation-wide operational expense rather than nearly $1 million worth of food ordered for one passenger.</p>
<h2>The Flights and Menus Behind the Optics</h2>
<p>Conservative MPs told the House that one of the 14 trips generated approximately $175,000 in catering expenses. The broader criticism had been building since May, when the Canadian Taxpayers Federation published records covering trips to London, Rome and Brussels in 2025. Those three journeys reportedly produced a combined catering bill of about $195,400, including approximately $93,780 for the Rome trip. The federation compared the total with ordinary household grocery spending to illustrate the scale of the expense.</p>
<p>The menus proved even more politically potent than the totals. Records described dishes such as beef tenderloin with bordelaise sauce, Scottish salmon, veal, charcuterie, a smoked Gouda omelette and desserts including crème brûlée and cheesecake. One catering description—“luxury Normandy butter cup”—was repeatedly quoted by opposition MPs. Such wording can make an operational invoice sound like the menu of an exclusive restaurant. At the same time, menu descriptions alone do not establish how much each dish cost, who consumed it or what portion of the invoice came from food rather than service charges. The expense total and the menu optics are related, but they are not interchangeable evidence.</p>
<h2>Why Government Aircraft Are Not Ordinary Commercial Flights</h2>
<p>Prime ministers do not generally choose government aircraft simply for comfort. National Defence says longstanding government policy requires the prime minister to use government aircraft for official and personal travel because of security considerations. The Royal Canadian Air Force provides pilots, secure communications, logistical coordination and reliable transportation that can operate around diplomatic schedules and rapidly changing security requirements. Aircraft and crews may also have to be repositioned before or after the prime minister’s journey.</p>
<p>International catering is affected by conditions that travellers rarely encounter when buying a meal on a commercial airline. Food may have to be purchased at foreign airports with limited approved vendors, prepared according to food-safety requirements and delivered through secure areas. Costs can include airport charges, local taxes, waste disposal and handling fees. National Defence has previously explained that larger delegations of more than 50 passengers and higher prices in Europe or Asia can substantially raise invoices. These factors help explain why dividing the total by 14 trips does not produce a meaningful estimate of what Carney personally ate. They do not, however, eliminate the government’s responsibility to demonstrate that suppliers, menus and passenger numbers were managed economically.</p>
<h2>How the Liberals Have Defended Carney’s Travel</h2>
<p>When Conservatives raised the earlier $195,400 total in May, Industry Minister Mélanie Joly defended Carney’s international activity by arguing that Canadians should value a prime minister who travels to secure investment and jobs during a difficult global period. As the nearly $1-million figure reached the Commons in June, Liberal ministers again emphasized the economic purpose of the trips. They pointed to 13 agreements announced around the G7 meetings that the government said could generate more than $5 billion in investment from several allied countries.</p>
<p>That response presents the dispute as a question of return on investment: international access, commercial agreements and diplomatic influence may produce benefits far exceeding flight expenses. Yet it does not directly explain why the catering total reached $962,633.24 or whether cheaper arrangements were available. In several parliamentary exchanges, ministers shifted toward broader government programs, economic policy or Conservative motives instead of supplying a trip-by-trip defence of the invoices. That leaves the government with two different tasks. It must justify why Carney travelled, but it must also show that the cost of supporting those journeys was reasonable. Success abroad does not automatically settle questions about spending controls aboard the aircraft.</p>
<h2>Why the Affordability Backdrop Makes the Story More Powerful</h2>
<p>The controversy is unfolding at a time when food costs remain an immediate concern for millions of Canadians. Statistics Canada reported that approximately 9.8 million people—24 per cent of the population—lived in households experiencing some level of food insecurity in 2024. Food Banks Canada recorded nearly 2.2 million food-bank visits in March 2025, the highest monthly total in its history and roughly double the level reported in March 2019.</p>
<p>Prices have continued to reinforce that sense of pressure. Grocery prices were 3.8 per cent higher in April 2026 than a year earlier, while national rent prices had risen 30.8 per cent over the five years beginning in April 2021. Against that backdrop, phrases such as “luxury butter,” tenderloin and crème brûlée are politically combustible. A catering charge can be operationally explainable and still look extravagant to a household reconsidering the contents of a grocery cart. Conservatives have repeatedly translated the flight total into decades of groceries for a family. Such comparisons are rhetorical rather than like-for-like accounting, but they connect a complicated government expense to a financial experience that Canadians immediately recognize.</p>
<h2>What Greater Transparency Could Resolve</h2>
<p>The most useful response would be a standardized public breakdown for each government flight: the route, number and categories of passengers, duration, number of meals served, food cost, alcohol cost if applicable, service fees, taxes and foreign-airport charges. A per-passenger and per-meal calculation would make it easier to distinguish unavoidable security and logistical costs from menu choices or contracts that deserve scrutiny. Comparisons with similar trips by previous prime ministers would also be more meaningful if aircraft type, delegation size, destination and flight length were held constant.</p>
<p>Attendance could be clarified in a similar way. A public calendar showing when the prime minister attended Question Period, travelled, participated remotely or performed conflicting official duties would provide more context than a raw absence total. The Conservatives’ two headline numbers are real in the sense that one reflects their attendance calculation and the other comes from disclosed government expenses. What those numbers prove remains contested. For critics, they show a prime minister insulated from Parliament while enjoying costly travel. For the government, they reflect delegated cabinet responsibility and necessary international work. Detailed records—not cakes, menu adjectives or defensive talking points—would give Canadians the clearest basis for deciding between those interpretations.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/06/shutterstock_2768006633.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="716">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/liberals-call-privacy-critics-tinfoil-hat-after-rushing-surveillance-bill-through-commons</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Liberals Call Privacy Critics ‘Tinfoil Hat’ After Rushing Surveillance Bill Through Commons]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:27:43 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/liberals-call-privacy-critics-tinfoil-hat-after-rushing-surveillance-bill-through-commons</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A battle over digital policing turned personal as Parliament prepared for its summer break. After the Liberal government accelerated Bill]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A battle over digital policing turned personal as Parliament prepared for its summer break. After the Liberal government accelerated Bill C-22, the Lawful Access Act, through its final Commons stages, Government House Leader Steven MacKinnon dismissed Conservative objections as conspiracy-driven “paranoia” and said he hoped the “tinfoil hats” would fade. The remark came after privacy regulators, civil-liberties researchers and major technology companies had also raised concerns about the bill’s reach. Bill C-22 is intended to help police and intelligence agencies obtain digital evidence more quickly, but it also creates a framework for secret technical-capability orders and metadata-retention requirements. The Commons passed it on June 18, 2026, after a late-night committee process left dozens of proposed amendments undebated. The dispute now moves to the Senate, where the central question remains: how much surveillance infrastructure should Canada build in the name of lawful access?</p>
<h2>A Late-Night Finish That Fuelled the Backlash</h2>
<p>The controversy was intensified by the way Bill C-22 cleared the Commons. On June 17, MPs approved a government motion by 166 votes to 150 that imposed a deadline on the public safety committee’s work. By that point, the committee had spent roughly 25 hours examining the bill clause by clause and had adopted about a dozen amendments, but many more remained on the table. The imposed timetable required the committee to finish that night, resulting in the remaining clauses and amendments being disposed of shortly before midnight without full debate.</p>
<p>The next day, the House agreed to deem the amended bill concurred in at report stage, read a third time and passed on division. There was no separate recorded third-reading vote on Bill C-22 itself. That sequence gave critics an unusually vivid example of what “rushing” legislation looks like: a complex digital-surveillance framework moving from unfinished committee scrutiny to passage just before the Commons rose for the summer. Liberals countered that opposition tactics had made ordinary progress impossible and warned that processing the remaining amendments at the existing pace could have delayed completion for years.</p>
<h2>What Bill C-22 Would Actually Change</h2>
<p>Bill C-22 contains three broad parts. The first rewrites sections of the Criminal Code and related laws governing how police, public officers and CSIS identify service providers, seek subscriber information, examine computer data and request certain records held abroad. One new tool is a confirmation-of-service demand. It allows an officer, based on reasonable suspicion, to require a telecom provider to confirm whether it serves a specified account, identifier or subscriber. A separate production order would let a judge require a service provider to disclose defined subscriber information.</p>
<p>The second part creates the Supporting Authorized Access to Information Act. This is the most disputed portion because it establishes a system under which electronic service providers can be required to maintain technical capabilities that facilitate lawful access. It also permits metadata-retention obligations and imposes confidentiality rules around government orders. The third part requires a parliamentary review after the legislation has operated for three years. In practical terms, the bill is not one single “wiretap power.” It is a package combining new investigative procedures, provider obligations, secrecy provisions, oversight mechanisms and future regulations that will determine how the framework works in practice.</p>
<h2>The Government’s Case: Crime Has Moved Faster Than the Law</h2>
<p>The Liberal government argues that Canada’s investigative rules were built for an era before smartphones, cloud storage and encrypted global platforms. Police may possess an IP address, telephone number or online identifier connected to an extortion attempt, child-exploitation investigation or national-security threat, yet still lose valuable time determining which company holds the relevant account. Government MPs have described Canada as the only G7 or Five Eyes country without a modern lawful-access regime and say the gap leaves investigators dependent on voluntary cooperation, foreign partners or legal workarounds.</p>
<p>Supporters also stress that obtaining communications content would still generally require judicial authorization. The government says Bill C-22 does not authorize mass surveillance, direct government access to company systems or unrestricted browsing through emails and social-media activity. Its stated purpose is to ensure providers can respond when a lawful order already exists and to create faster routes for obtaining basic identifying information. That distinction matters. A detective trying to identify the account behind a threatening message is not automatically seeking the message history itself. The government’s position is that modern investigations can stall before officers even reach the stage of applying for a conventional search warrant.</p>
<h2>The Privacy Commissioner Saw Improvements — and Serious Gaps</h2>
<p>Privacy Commissioner Philippe Dufresne did not treat Bill C-22 as identical to its heavily criticized predecessor, Bill C-2. He welcomed several changes, including a narrower confirmation-of-service power, explicit consideration of privacy and cybersecurity when orders are made, and a role for the Intelligence Commissioner in reviewing ministerial orders. That qualified support is important because it shows the debate is not simply divided between people who support policing and people who oppose it. Canada’s privacy watchdog recognized legitimate operational goals while still asking Parliament to tighten the language.</p>
<p>Dufresne recommended turning “subscriber information” into a closed list of specific identifiers, such as a name, address, telephone number and IP address. He also urged Parliament to limit who could be compelled to produce that information and to define “publicly available information” so it excludes material in which a person still has a reasonable expectation of privacy. Those concerns are concrete rather than theoretical. A public-facing profile, leaked database and casually shared location record may all be technically accessible, yet they do not carry the same privacy implications. The Commissioner’s intervention undercut the suggestion that every objection came from partisan obstruction or online conspiracy culture.</p>
<h2>Encryption Became the Bill’s Most International Flashpoint</h2>
<p>Apple, Google and Meta were among the companies warning that Bill C-22’s technical-capability regime could be used to force changes that weaken encrypted products. Their concern centred on secret ministerial orders and broad future regulations. End-to-end encryption is designed so that only the communicating users possess the keys needed to read content. A platform cannot simply produce readable messages it was never technically capable of decrypting. Building a special route around that design can create a vulnerability that criminals, hostile states or hackers may also try to exploit.</p>
<p>The government amended the bill to state that it must not be interpreted as compelling a provider to decrypt encrypted information. That was a meaningful clarification, but critics argue it may not resolve every scenario in which a provider could be ordered to redesign a service or add a new access capability before encryption is applied. The international stakes are not abstract. Apple previously withdrew an advanced encrypted cloud-backup feature from the United Kingdom after receiving a secret access order there. In Canada, several privacy-focused services warned that incompatible obligations could force them to restrict products or reconsider operating in the country.</p>
<h2>Metadata Can Reveal More Than Its Name Suggests</h2>
<p>The word “metadata” can sound like harmless technical housekeeping, but it can describe the patterns surrounding communications: when a device connected, which service was used, how accounts interacted or where a signal originated. A single record may reveal little. Thousands of records collected over months can map routines, relationships and movement with striking precision. That is why mandatory retention became one of Bill C-22’s most contentious features, even though the government says access to retained information would still require lawful authority.</p>
<p>The original bill allowed retention requirements lasting up to one year. A government amendment reduced the maximum to six months. Another amendment added review by the National Security and Intelligence Review Agency within 30 days of an order. Those changes narrowed the framework, but they did not settle the deeper objection: the data of large numbers of people who are not suspected of crimes could still be stored so that records exist if investigators later seek them. For a small provider built around collecting minimal information, a retention order could also mean creating a database it deliberately never maintained, increasing both compliance costs and the damage possible from a breach.</p>
<h2>Experts Objected to Powers Designed and Used in Secret</h2>
<p>A joint analysis by the University of Toronto’s Citizen Lab and the Canadian Civil Liberties Association argued that Bill C-22’s scope, secrecy and technical obligations create constitutional and cybersecurity risks. The researchers were especially concerned that broad orders could require providers to alter their systems without meaningful public or technical scrutiny. They also questioned provisions dealing with voluntarily disclosed and publicly available information, arguing that private companies should not be able to waive customers’ constitutional privacy interests simply by handing information to police.</p>
<p>The analysis also criticized the compressed timetable. Citizen Lab noted that an Australian law involving a comparable technical-access regime underwent 173 amendments, while the Commons committee studying Bill C-22 was initially given only a few weeks. That comparison does not prove Canada must copy Australia, but it illustrates the amount of legislative detail such systems can require. Technology rules often produce consequences through definitions, exceptions and regulations rather than headline powers. A phrase that seems narrow in a political speech can apply to hundreds of services once written into law. That is why critics viewed the unfinished amendment debate as part of the substance of the privacy problem, not merely a procedural complaint.</p>
<h2>The ‘Tinfoil Hat’ Remark Changed the Political Story</h2>
<p>MacKinnon defended the fast-track decision by accusing Conservatives of obstruction and portraying their arguments as a wall of conspiracy theory and paranoia. He said he hoped the “conspiracies and the tinfoil hats” would disappear and claimed the Liberals had become the party most clearly identified with law and order. The comment gave the government a forceful closing message, but it also bundled very different critics together: opposition politicians, the federal Privacy Commissioner, university researchers, civil-liberties lawyers and global technology firms.</p>
<p>That rhetorical choice may prove more durable than the final Commons debate. Governments often face pressure to frame security legislation as a binary choice between action and weakness. Yet lawful access has repeatedly crossed party lines in Canada. In 2012, a Conservative public safety minister was criticized for suggesting opponents of an earlier bill stood with child abusers; Liberals were then among those objecting. The roles have now partly reversed. For Canadians trying to judge the current proposal, the most useful test is not which party sounds tougher. It is whether each power is necessary, proportionate, reviewable and written narrowly enough to prevent expansion beyond its stated purpose.</p>
<h2>The Senate Now Inherits the Unfinished Questions</h2>
<p>Bill C-22 received first reading in the Senate on June 18 but had not reached second reading as of June 19. Senators can study the legislation, hear witnesses and propose amendments before deciding whether to pass it. That stage may become especially significant because the Commons committee ended with unresolved proposals still before it. The Senate cannot erase the earlier process, but it can examine whether the new six-month retention limit, encryption language and review requirements are strong enough.</p>
<p>Even if the bill becomes law, the argument will not necessarily end. The legislation requires a parliamentary review after three years, and courts could eventually be asked to assess particular provisions under the Charter’s protection against unreasonable search and seizure. Much will also depend on regulations and on the content of ministerial orders that may not be visible to the public. For an ordinary Canadian, the immediate effect may be invisible: no new icon on a phone and no obvious change to daily browsing. The long-term effect will be structural, shaping what information services must preserve, what capabilities they must build and how quietly government agencies can require those changes.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/05/shutterstock_2609096995.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="667">
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/cra-is-changing-how-canadians-submit-disability-tax-credit-applications-starting-july-14</guid>      <title><![CDATA[CRA Is Changing How Canadians Submit Disability Tax Credit Applications Starting July 14]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:16:25 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/cra-is-changing-how-canadians-submit-disability-tax-credit-applications-starting-july-14</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[For many Canadians, a Disability Tax Credit application is already a careful handoff between a household, a medical practitioner and]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For many Canadians, a Disability Tax Credit application is already a careful handoff between a household, a medical practitioner and the Canada Revenue Agency. Beginning July 14, 2026, one familiar submission route will disappear. New DTC applications and related documents will no longer be accepted through the general “Submit documents” feature in CRA accounts, unless the agency has specifically asked for more information on an existing case.</p>
<p>Applicants will instead need to use the dedicated digital DTC application process or mail a completed paper Form T2201. A second deadline follows on September 8, when CRA will stop accepting versions of the paper form issued before 2023. The changes do not rewrite the eligibility rules, but they make the choice of form, submission channel and timing more important.</p>
<h2>What Changes on July 14</h2>
<p>The July 14 change is mainly about routing. Until now, some applicants or representatives could scan a completed T2201 and upload it through the broad “Submit documents” area of a CRA account. Starting on that date, the agency says that option will no longer accept DTC applications or ordinary supporting material. A scanned paper form sitting on a computer will not become an online filing simply because it is uploaded through My Account; the paper route will require printing and mailing.</p>
<p>There is one important exception. The upload feature may still be used when CRA has already opened a case and specifically requests additional information. In that situation, the agency will provide instructions and a case reference number. That distinction matters for a family responding to a follow-up letter: the door is not completely closed, but it is reserved for documents CRA has asked to receive. For a brand-new application, the practical choice becomes dedicated digital submission or traditional mail.</p>
<h2>The Digital Route Becomes the Main Online Option</h2>
<p>The dedicated digital process divides the work between the applicant and the medical practitioner. The applicant, or a legal representative, completes Part A through a CRA account. Part A can also be completed by phone, which preserves an option for people who have difficulty navigating online services. Once Part A is submitted, CRA generates a reference number that connects the applicant’s information with the practitioner’s certification.</p>
<p>That reference number is more than a receipt. It is valid for up to 12 months, can be used only once for a digital Part B submission, and must match the applicant’s last name and date of birth. The practitioner then completes Part B through CRA’s medical-practitioner portal. When the matching process is completed, the application is automatically sent to CRA and its status can appear in the account’s progress tracker. For a caregiver helping an older parent, this can remove the awkward step of carrying a thick paper package back and forth between home, a clinic and a mailbox.</p>
<h2>Paper Applications Are Still Allowed, but the Rules Tighten</h2>
<p>Canadians who prefer paper are not being forced online. They may still complete Form T2201 and mail it to a CRA tax centre, but the package has to be complete, current and physically signed. CRA’s instructions say Part A and Part B must be submitted together. Missing names, dates of birth, social insurance numbers or handwritten signatures can cause a form to be returned rather than reviewed.</p>
<p>The version date now carries extra weight. CRA says paper applicants should use the current 23e or 23f version, and that forms issued before 2023 will no longer be accepted as of September 8, 2026. Someone who has kept an old blank copy in a filing cabinet could therefore spend time gathering medical information only to have the package rejected. The safest step is to download a fresh form directly before the appointment. Applicants should also keep a full copy, since the details in the mailed original could be difficult to reconstruct later.</p>
<h2>Eligibility Rules Are Not Being Rewritten</h2>
<p>The submission change does not create a new test for disability. DTC eligibility continues to depend on the effects of a severe and prolonged impairment, not simply the name of a diagnosis. CRA generally looks for a marked restriction in a basic activity of daily living, qualifying life-sustaining therapy, or significant limitations in two or more categories whose combined effect is comparable to a marked restriction.</p>
<p>The thresholds are specific. A marked restriction can mean being unable to perform an activity, or taking at least three times as long as a person of similar age without the impairment, even with appropriate therapy, medication and devices. The limitation generally must be present at least 90% of the time and last, or be expected to last, for at least 12 continuous months. That is why two people with the same medical condition can receive different decisions. One may manage most daily activities independently, while another may face persistent limitations in walking, dressing, mental functions or another recognized category.</p>
<h2>The Medical Practitioner’s Description Remains Crucial</h2>
<p>A DTC application is not approved simply because a practitioner signs it. CRA makes the final decision, but it relies heavily on the functional information recorded in Part B. Doctors and nurse practitioners can certify all impairment categories, while other professionals have defined areas: optometrists for vision, audiologists for hearing, psychologists for mental functions, physiotherapists for walking, and occupational therapists for walking, feeding or dressing, among others.</p>
<p>Concrete descriptions are therefore more useful than a diagnosis alone. A practitioner may draw on the patient’s reported symptoms, medical history, direct observation and knowledge of how the impairment affects everyday functioning. For example, “arthritis” by itself says little about eligibility; an explanation of how often walking is restricted, how long basic movement takes and what assistance is required gives CRA information tied to the eligibility test. Practitioners may charge for completing the form, and the applicant is responsible for that fee, although CRA notes that it may qualify as a medical expense on a tax return.</p>
<h2>Timing and Completeness Can Affect the Wait</h2>
<p>DTC applications can be submitted at any time of year, but CRA advises applying before filing the related income tax return. When the form and return arrive together, the agency reviews the DTC request before assessing the return, which can slow the tax assessment. Missing information can add further delay, and CRA may write directly to the practitioner for clarification or supporting records.</p>
<p>The human cost of delays can be significant. In December 2025, the Office of the Taxpayers’ Ombudsperson said some applicants had waited as long as 15 weeks for a DTC decision, compared with an eight-week service standard. It also cited waits of up to 50 weeks for certain related T1 adjustments covering earlier tax years. Those figures do not mean every application will take that long, but they explain CRA’s emphasis on complete forms and the dedicated digital channel. Applicants can monitor a submitted case through CRA’s progress tracker and should respond quickly when the agency requests more information.</p>
<h2>The Financial Stakes Extend Beyond One Tax Credit</h2>
<p>For 2026, the federal disability amount is $10,341, producing a maximum federal tax reduction of $1,448. Because the DTC is non-refundable, it reduces income tax otherwise payable rather than guaranteeing a cash payment. An unused portion may sometimes be transferred to a supporting family member. Eligibility can also be recognized for prior years, up to a maximum of 10 years from the date CRA receives the application, potentially leading to adjustments and refunds where tax was previously paid.</p>
<p>Approval can unlock or support access to other programs. These include the Registered Disability Savings Plan, the Canada workers benefit disability supplement, the Child Disability Benefit and the Canada Disability Benefit. The amounts can be substantial: the Child Disability Benefit can reach $3,480 per eligible child from July 2026 to June 2027, while an RDSP may receive up to $3,500 in matching grants in one year and up to $70,000 over a beneficiary’s lifetime. That broader financial impact makes submission errors more than a paperwork inconvenience.</p>
<h2>What Applicants Should Do Before the Deadlines</h2>
<p>Anyone preparing a new application should first decide which complete route will be used. For digital filing, Part A should be started through the dedicated DTC option in the individual CRA account or by phone, followed by delivery of the reference number to the practitioner. For paper filing, the newest T2201 should be downloaded, both parts completed in the same format, every required field checked and the entire signed package mailed. Mixing a digital Part A with a paper Part B can prevent CRA from processing the application.</p>
<p>People who already have DTC approval generally do not need to reapply merely because the submission system is changing. A new T2201 is usually required only when an eligibility period is expiring or CRA asks for another application. Existing status and expiry information can be checked in My Account. After July 14, applicants should also resist the instinct to upload a scanned form through “Submit documents.” That feature remains relevant mainly when CRA sends a follow-up request and provides the reference needed to respond.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/01/CRA.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock.
]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-quietly-reviews-journalism-funding-while-trump-pressures-canada-over-streaming-rules</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Ottawa Quietly Reviews Journalism Funding While Trump Pressures Canada Over Streaming Rules]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:11:55 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/ottawa-quietly-reviews-journalism-funding-while-trump-pressures-canada-over-streaming-rules</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A policy discussion that began quietly inside Ottawa is colliding with a much louder confrontation from Washington. The Carney government]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A policy discussion that began quietly inside Ottawa is colliding with a much louder confrontation from Washington. The Carney government has been consulting selected media organizations about the future of federal journalism supports, even as the Trump administration attacks Canadian rules requiring large streaming platforms to help finance domestic programming.</p>
<p>The two files are separate, but they now meet at the same pressure point: who should pay for Canadian news and culture when advertising revenue is shrinking and foreign platforms dominate digital distribution. Ottawa is weighing tax credits, grants and program redesign while also retreating from a CRTC decision that angered U.S. officials and streaming companies. The outcome could reshape newsroom funding, subscription costs and Canada’s leverage in approaching continental trade talks.</p>
<h2>A Review Conducted Out of Public View</h2>
<p>Canadian Heritage’s broader review was not announced through the department’s normal public-consultation list. Instead, officials conducted targeted engagement beginning in the spring with news companies, magazine publishers and Indigenous media organizations. The department confirmed that 12 stakeholder meetings were held to collect views on the future direction of programs supporting journalism. Officials were still analyzing submissions in mid-June, and no final decisions had been made.</p>
<p>That process matters because it reaches beyond a routine program evaluation. A Canadian Heritage official told a Senate committee that the government was examining all of its direct supports to journalism and considering the most effective way to deliver them. The programs include the Local Journalism Initiative, the Canada Periodical Fund and the Canadian Journalism Labour Tax Credit. For a small publisher deciding whether it can afford another municipal reporter, even a technical change in eligibility, administration or timing can determine whether a community meeting is covered at all.</p>
<h2>Ottawa’s Support System Has Become a Policy Patchwork</h2>
<p>Federal support for journalism is no longer a single program. It is a layered system built over several years as print advertising collapsed and digital platforms captured more of the market. The Local Journalism Initiative funds reporting positions in underserved communities and has $20.8 million allocated for 2026–27. The Canada Periodical Fund, which supports eligible magazines, community newspapers and digital periodicals, received $73.5 million in the government’s latest spending plan.</p>
<p>The largest labour measure is the refundable Canadian Journalism Labour Tax Credit. Eligible organizations can currently claim 35% of qualifying newsroom wages, on up to $85,000 per employee, producing a maximum credit of $29,750 for one worker. Ottawa also relies on private-platform money: Google agreed to contribute $100 million annually through the Online News Act framework, with the funds distributed by the Canadian Journalism Collective. Taken together, these mechanisms help keep reporters employed, but their different rules also create a complicated landscape in which outlets may qualify for one stream, several streams or none.</p>
<h2>The Tax Credit Could Expand Beyond Print</h2>
<p>The government is simultaneously considering a major expansion of the labour tax credit. It currently applies to original written news, leaving broadcasters and organizations that produce only audio or audiovisual journalism outside the program. A Finance Canada consultation proposes adding work such as videography, sound recording, editing, post-production and the presentation of news bulletins or segments. Submissions remain open until July 31, 2026.</p>
<p>The change could modernize a program designed when the legal distinction between a newspaper, podcast, television report and digital video was easier to draw. It could also make large radio and television owners eligible for support that was previously concentrated on written-news organizations. The existing 35% rate is temporary and scheduled to return to 25% on January 1, 2027, adding another unresolved question about the program’s size. Ottawa has not published an expected cost for extending the credit to audio and audiovisual news, meaning the government is debating both who belongs inside the system and how generous that system should be.</p>
<h2>The News Business Is Still Shrinking</h2>
<p>The review is unfolding against financial data that explain why publishers keep asking for help. Statistics Canada reported that newspaper publishers generated $1.6 billion in operating revenue in 2024, a 17.9% decline from 2022. Advertising revenue fell even faster, dropping 26.1% to $722.8 million. Publishers responded by cutting operating expenses, including a 17.6% reduction in spending on salaries, wages, commissions and benefits.</p>
<p>The damage is especially visible outside major cities. The Local News Research Project counted 603 local news outlets that closed in 388 Canadian communities between 2008 and October 1, 2025. Only 264 new outlets launched and remained in operation over the same period. Those numbers translate into ordinary civic gaps: fewer reporters at school-board meetings, less scrutiny of municipal contracts and fewer people available to verify rumours during an emergency. Funding cannot restore every lost business model, but withdrawing or poorly redesigning support could accelerate the thinning of coverage in places where no competing newsroom remains.</p>
<h2>The CRTC Rule That Triggered Washington</h2>
<p>The confrontation with Washington intensified after the CRTC released a new Canadian programming expenditure framework on May 21, 2026. Online streaming groups with at least $25 million in annual Canadian broadcasting revenue would face a 15% spending requirement, including the existing 5% base contribution. Canadian private broadcasters would be assigned a 25% requirement, down from previous obligations that generally ranged from 30% to 45%.</p>
<p>The CRTC said the framework would stabilize more than $2 billion in annual support for Canadian and Indigenous programming, including French-language content and news. Larger streaming groups earning at least $100 million in Canada would face more specific obligations, including minimum spending on partnerships with Canadian broadcasters and independent producers. The regulator described the design as an effort to update a broadcasting system whose foundational law had last been comprehensively reworked before modern streaming existed. To supporters, it asked powerful global distributors to participate in the market they profit from. To critics, it imposed a heavy, prescriptive cost on services already financing productions in Canada.</p>
<h2>Trump Administration Turns Culture Into a Trade Fight</h2>
<p>The U.S. response was swift. Pete Hoekstra, President Donald Trump’s ambassador to Canada, accused the CRTC of targeting and taxing American companies, creating discriminatory trade barriers and worsening the investment climate. U.S. industry groups representing major studios and technology companies also urged Ottawa to reverse course. Their pressure landed as Canada, the United States and Mexico prepared for the scheduled six-year review of CUSMA on July 1, 2026.</p>
<p>Canada does retain a broad cultural-industries exception under CUSMA, covering publishing, film, music and broadcasting. That protection is not an absolute shield from consequences. The agreement also permits another party to take a measure of equivalent commercial effect in response to a Canadian cultural measure that would otherwise conflict with the pact. Whether the streaming framework actually violates Canada’s trade obligations remains disputed, and retaliation would raise legal and proportionality questions. Politically, however, the rule handed the Trump administration another demand to place beside tariffs, autos and other irritants in an already strained relationship.</p>
<h2>Carney Government Chooses a Taxpayer-Funded Bridge</h2>
<p>Ottawa changed direction less than two weeks after the CRTC decision. On June 3, Culture Minister Marc Miller announced $600 million in federal support for the audio and audiovisual sectors and directed the regulator to review its new framework. The government said the obligations could raise costs for streaming and broadcasting companies and that those expenses could eventually be passed to Canadian consumers through higher prices.</p>
<p>The government plans to issue new policy directions focused on affordability, consumer choice and continued support for Canadian stories, local news, French-language production and Indigenous programming. It also said the federal investment would provide money that creators and broadcasters otherwise expected from the CRTC framework, with the amount to be adjusted once new rules are finalized. In practical terms, Ottawa is using public funds as a bridge while it redesigns the platform contribution system. That may reduce immediate trade friction and subscription-price risk, but it also shifts more of the burden from multinational services to the federal treasury—and ultimately makes Parliament responsible for defending the spending.</p>
<h2>The Real Test Is Independence, Transparency and Reach</h2>
<p>Public assistance does not automatically place editors under government control, but the design of that assistance determines whether the public trusts it. Ottawa already uses safeguards. The Local Journalism Initiative is administered by not-for-profit organizations rather than directly by ministers, and the government says that structure is intended to protect press independence. Eligibility for journalism tax measures also involves an independent advisory board that assesses whether organizations meet statutory criteria and provides recommendations to the government.</p>
<p>The quiet nature of the wider review nevertheless creates a transparency problem. A credible redesign should disclose who was consulted, what evidence was submitted, how small and Indigenous outlets were represented, and whether large broadcasters would receive a disproportionate share of new support. It should also separate editorial eligibility from political preference and publish measurable goals, such as newsroom jobs preserved or underserved communities covered. Ottawa is trying to protect journalism while managing affordability and an aggressive U.S. administration. The hardest part will be proving that its solution strengthens independent reporting rather than simply replacing one unstable source of money with another.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/10/Shutterstock_1081337402.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/carney-government-gives-cabinet-power-to-authorize-pesticides-health-canada-deemed-unsafe</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Carney Government Gives Cabinet Power to Authorize Pesticides Health Canada Deemed Unsafe]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:05:12 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/carney-government-gives-cabinet-power-to-authorize-pesticides-health-canada-deemed-unsafe</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A major change to Canada’s pesticide law has shifted some of the country’s most sensitive regulatory decisions from scientific officials]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A major change to Canada’s pesticide law has shifted some of the country’s most sensitive regulatory decisions from scientific officials to the federal cabinet. Bill C-30, which received royal assent on June 18, allows cabinet to authorize or reinstate certain pesticides after the health minister concludes that their environmental risks are unacceptable.</p>
<p>The change is narrower—and still more consequential—than the political shorthand suggests. Cabinet cannot override a finding that a pesticide poses unacceptable risks to human health. It can, however, set aside an environmental-risk decision when ministers believe the product is needed to protect national or regional economic security or Canada’s food supply. Supporters describe the authority as an emergency tool for crop failures and severe supply disruptions. Critics see a pathway for political and commercial considerations to overrule scientific conclusions.</p>
<h2>What the New Law Actually Changes</h2>
<p>Canada’s Pest Control Products Act has long identified the prevention of unacceptable risks to people and the environment as the health minister’s primary objective. Before a pesticide can be registered, Health Canada’s Pest Management Regulatory Agency assesses its risks, its effectiveness and the conditions under which it would be used. A product generally qualifies only when officials have reasonable certainty that its approved use will not harm human health, future generations or the environment.</p>
<p>Bill C-30 retains that primary objective but adds a new consideration. The minister must now take account, where appropriate, of national economic security, regional economic security and national food security. More significantly, the law creates two routes through which cabinet—the Governor in Council in formal legal language—can intervene after an unfavourable environmental decision. That represents a meaningful transfer of authority. Scientists still conduct the assessment and state whether the environmental risk is acceptable, but elected ministers can reach a different final outcome when broader economic or food-supply concerns are invoked.</p>
<h2>Cabinet Can Step In After a Scientific Rejection</h2>
<p>The first pathway concerns emergency pest outbreaks. When the minister refuses to register a product, or refuses to expand an existing registration, because its environmental risks are unacceptable, cabinet may authorize the product for the emergency control of a “seriously detrimental infestation.” Cabinet must consider the intervention necessary to protect economic or food security, but the legislation does not itself identify a particular crop, pest or pesticide that qualifies.</p>
<p>The second pathway applies to products already on the market. Health Canada periodically re-evaluates registered pesticides and can conduct a special review when a specific concern emerges. When one of those processes concludes that a registration should be restricted or cancelled because of unacceptable environmental risks, cabinet can amend or reinstate it. Conditions may limit where, when and how the product is used. Cabinet may also require manufacturers to conduct tests, monitor environmental effects, maintain records or provide information about the product’s economic impact. The law therefore does not erase Health Canada’s scientific finding; it permits cabinet to authorize use despite that finding.</p>
<h2>Emergency Use Can Last as Long as Six Years</h2>
<p>Canada already had a process for emergency pesticide registrations. Under the previous framework, the minister could approve a product for no more than one year when a serious pest problem emerged, no effective registered product was available and other control methods were insufficient. Applications were generally sponsored by a provincial or federal agency directly involved in managing the outbreak.</p>
<p>The new cabinet orders can remain in effect for up to three years and may be extended once for another period of as much as three years. That means a decision described as exceptional could govern pesticide use for six years—far longer than a single growing season. Cabinet must act within one year of the relevant Health Canada decision, and an order cannot violate an international agreement binding on Canada. Conditions can also be geographically targeted. Health Canada officials told senators that a problem affecting Prairie agriculture, for example, could lead to an authorization limited to that region rather than a nationwide approval. The duration nevertheless makes these orders more than a temporary response measured in weeks or months.</p>
<h2>Special Reviews Can Be Paused While an Order Is Active</h2>
<p>One of the most disputed provisions restricts the minister from initiating another special review of the same environmental risks while a cabinet order remains in effect. Because an order may last three years and be renewed for three more, the restriction could remain in place throughout that period. Health Canada would not be starting from ignorance—the original finding of unacceptable environmental risk would already be public—but it could not launch another special review focused on that same concern while the order continued.</p>
<p>The restriction is narrower than a complete suspension of oversight. It does not authorize cabinet to disregard an unacceptable human-health risk, nor does it necessarily prevent action based on a separate issue. Cabinet can require testing, environmental monitoring and new information, and the minister retains authority to cancel a registration in circumstances allowed by the Act. Still, critics argue that updated science may become important during a multi-year authorization. The law also permits the minister to allow remaining stocks to be used during a phase-out period after an order expires, meaning some real-world use could continue beyond the order’s formal end date.</p>
<h2>Ottawa Says Farmers Need a Faster Emergency Tool</h2>
<p>Health Canada officials have defended the powers as safeguards for rare but potentially severe situations. During Senate committee testimony, officials offered major crop failures and significant supply disruptions as examples. A destructive pest can spread faster than a conventional regulatory process, leaving growers with a narrow window to protect a harvest. Floods, droughts, wildfires and changing temperatures can also disrupt supply chains or create conditions favourable to new pests and diseases.</p>
<p>The government insists that human-health requirements remain a firm boundary. A cabinet order can be used only where human-health risks remain acceptable; the new discretion applies to the environmental side of the assessment. Ottawa is also expanding Health Canada’s capacity to conduct economic analysis. The spring economic update allocated $24 million over four years beginning in 2027-28, followed by $9 million annually, to strengthen that work and improve pesticide-review processes. The government expects the costs to be recovered through industry fees. For producers facing an aggressive outbreak, the appeal is straightforward: waiting for a replacement product may not be realistic when an entire season’s crop is at risk.</p>
<h2>Undefined Terms Fuel Concerns About Political Influence</h2>
<p>The law repeatedly invokes “economic security,” “food security” and a “seriously detrimental infestation,” yet it does not fully define those expressions. Cabinet has been given regulation-making authority to establish definitions, while Health Canada has indicated that regulations, policies and public guidance will provide more detail. During committee hearings, senators questioned how Parliament could assess the reach of the powers before those criteria were settled.</p>
<p>Opposition has extended beyond environmental organizations. A coalition of 20 health, farming, scientific and environmental groups urged Ottawa to remove the provisions, arguing that the changes could politicize decisions previously centred on scientific risk. The Canadian Consumer Specialty Products Association, representing regulated companies, also complained about the speed of the overhaul, the absence of a clear implementation plan and uncertainty surrounding new fees. Its submission said 72 per cent of registered pest-control products serve non-agricultural or domestic sectors, while 28 per cent target agriculture. Although the association supports considering competitiveness, it argued that the legislation focuses heavily on agricultural emergencies without clearly benefiting the rest of the regulated market.</p>
<h2>Environmental Risk Can Also Become an Economic Risk</h2>
<p>An environmental finding is not merely a technical objection detached from farming or food security. Under the Pest Control Products Act, environmental risk includes possible harm to biodiversity resulting from a product’s use. Depending on the pesticide and application method, regulators may examine effects on pollinators, birds, aquatic organisms, soil life, nearby vegetation, water and other non-target species. Conditions such as buffer zones, limits on spraying, application timing and runoff controls are commonly used to reduce those risks.</p>
<p>The economic value of healthy ecosystems can be substantial. Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada estimates that managed pollination adds more than $3 billion annually to Canadian crop revenues. Pollinators support canola, fruit, vegetable, seed and forage production, while healthy soil and water systems help farms remain productive over time. This creates the central policy tension inside the new law. A pesticide may protect a crop from an immediate infestation, supporting short-term production, while posing environmental risks capable of weakening agricultural resilience later. Cabinet will now be responsible for deciding when the immediate threat outweighs that longer-term concern.</p>
<h2>The First Cabinet Order Will Set an Important Precedent</h2>
<p>The legislation contains several transparency requirements. Emergency orders must be made public as soon as practicable, and cabinet must publish its reasons within 60 days. When cabinet proposes to overturn a restriction or cancellation arising from a re-evaluation or special review, at least 30 days’ public notice is required. Orders must also appear in Health Canada’s public register. Although they are exempt from the ordinary Statutory Instruments Act process, they are not designed to remain confidential.</p>
<p>Bill C-30 passed third reading in the House of Commons by 166 votes to 159 before completing every Senate stage and receiving royal assent on June 18. The law itself does not automatically approve a banned product, restore a cancelled registration or identify a pesticide that cabinet intends to authorize. Each intervention will require a separate order, conditions and a stated economic or food-security justification. The first such decision will show how broadly ministers interpret their new authority—and whether “exceptional circumstances” remain exceptional. Its supporting evidence, geographic scope, monitoring rules and treatment of Health Canada’s findings will establish the practical standard for every order that follows.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/08/Pesticides-and-Herbicides.png" type="image/png" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadas-banking-regulator-cuts-big-bank-safety-buffer-for-first-time-since-2023</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Canada’s Banking Regulator Cuts Big-Bank Safety Buffer for First Time Since 2023]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 11:03:08 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/canadas-banking-regulator-cuts-big-bank-safety-buffer-for-first-time-since-2023</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[Canada’s largest banks have been given more room to put their capital to work. On June 19, 2026, the Office]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Canada’s largest banks have been given more room to put their capital to work. On June 19, 2026, the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions lowered the Domestic Stability Buffer from 3.5% to 3.0% of risk-weighted assets, effective immediately. The move reduces the regulator’s Common Equity Tier 1 expectation for the country’s six systemically important banks from 11.5% to 11.0%.</p>
<p>This is the buffer’s first adjustment since June 2023 and its first reduction since the pandemic-era cut in March 2020. OSFI says the decision reflects the banks’ strong finances, not a weakening of oversight. The regulator is trying to preserve a substantial cushion against losses while giving lenders more flexibility to support investment during a period shaped by trade disruption, geopolitical tension and major spending needs.</p>
<h2>A Half-Point Cut With System-Wide Consequences</h2>
<p>The change applies to Royal Bank of Canada, Toronto-Dominion Bank, Bank of Montreal, Bank of Nova Scotia, Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce and National Bank of Canada. These institutions are classified as domestic systemically important banks because their size, interconnectedness and role in payments, lending and capital markets mean serious trouble at one could affect the broader economy. Together, the six account for more than 90% of assets held by Canadian deposit-taking institutions.</p>
<p>OSFI also lowered the permitted range for the Domestic Stability Buffer from 0%–4% to 0%–3%. That second change is important because it signals that the regulator now views 3% as an adequate upper boundary under the current framework. The immediate supervisory expectation for Common Equity Tier 1 capital therefore falls to 11.0%. Banks are not being told to spend down to that threshold, but they now have more discretion over capital that had previously been held above it.</p>
<h2>How the Safety Buffer Actually Works</h2>
<p>The Domestic Stability Buffer is an extra layer of high-quality capital placed on top of Canada’s standard bank-capital rules. Under the new setting, the supervisory CET1 expectation consists of a 4.5% minimum requirement, a 2.5% capital-conservation buffer, a 1% surcharge for systemically important banks and the 3% domestic buffer. Added together, those components produce the new 11.0% expectation.</p>
<p>The buffer is designed to move with conditions. OSFI builds it during relatively stable periods, when banks can accumulate capital without sharply restricting credit, and can release part of it when the economy needs more financial support. Capital is not the same as customer deposits or cash kept for everyday transactions. It is primarily shareholders’ equity and retained earnings that absorb losses when loans sour, trading positions decline or operational failures create costs. That is why a seemingly small half-percentage-point adjustment can meaningfully change how much risk a large bank can take.</p>
<h2>Why OSFI Believes the Banks Can Handle It</h2>
<p>The regulator’s case rests on unusually strong capital positions. OSFI reported that the six banks’ average CET1 ratio was about 13.5%, more than two percentage points above the new 11.0% expectation. All six were above 13%. The banks have also remained profitable, maintained access to funding and built provisions for possible loan losses, leaving them with several layers of protection if the economy weakens.</p>
<p>The Bank of Canada reached a similar conclusion in its 2026 Financial Stability Report. It found that large Canadian banks had become more resilient, supported by stronger profitability, high capital and loan-loss provisions that were about 30% larger as a share of lending than three years earlier. OSFI’s own stress testing indicated that the banks could absorb considerable shocks while continuing to lend. Credit growth has recently improved but remains subdued compared with longer-run norms, giving the regulator another reason to create more room without declaring the system risk-free.</p>
<h2>The $673-Billion Figure Needs Context</h2>
<p>OSFI said the banks’ capital cushion above the new expectation amounts to roughly $74 billion. It also calculated that this could support an expansion of approximately $673 billion in risk-weighted assets. That is a measure of theoretical balance-sheet capacity, not a forecast that banks will immediately issue $673 billion in new mortgages, business loans or project financing.</p>
<p>Risk-weighted assets assign different values to exposures according to their perceived risk. A relatively safe loan may add less to a bank’s risk-weighted total than a riskier corporate, startup or trading exposure of the same dollar size. Actual lending will therefore depend on the mix of assets banks choose, demand from qualified borrowers, funding costs, expected returns and internal risk limits. The figure is still significant because it demonstrates the leverage created by releasing capital. Yet it should be read as the maximum room available under regulatory calculations, not money already committed to the Canadian economy.</p>
<h2>Why the Regulator Wants Capital Moving Into Strategic Sectors</h2>
<p>OSFI explicitly linked the decision to structural changes in technology, trade and geopolitics. The regulator identified defence and security, critical infrastructure, natural resources and artificial intelligence as areas where Canadian banks could help finance new investment. Supply-chain restructuring and shifting trade relationships are creating expensive projects that often require large loans, underwriting services or partnerships between governments and private capital.</p>
<p>That context makes this more than a technical banking adjustment. Canadian companies facing tariff uncertainty may need financing to change suppliers, expand domestic production or reach new export markets. Energy, mining, technology and infrastructure projects can require billions of dollars before producing revenue. By lowering the buffer while banks remain strong, OSFI is attempting to create capacity before a severe credit shortage appears. The approach is proactive: preserve enough capital for shocks, but avoid keeping so much locked away that viable investment is delayed during a period of economic reorientation.</p>
<h2>Borrowers May Benefit, but Relief Is Not Automatic</h2>
<p>For households and businesses, the most likely effect is greater availability of credit at the margin. A bank with more capital headroom may be more willing to approve a commercial loan, participate in a large project or compete for a strong mortgage borrower. International research has found that temporary reductions in capital requirements can support lending, particularly when regulatory constraints are beginning to bind.</p>
<p>That does not make the decision equivalent to a Bank of Canada interest-rate cut. Mortgage rates, lines of credit and business borrowing costs are still driven by market yields, central-bank policy, funding expenses, competition and each borrower’s risk profile. Canadian banks already held substantial capital above the previous requirement, so some may choose to retain much of the newly available room rather than expand aggressively. The practical test will be whether loan growth strengthens and financing becomes more accessible in productive areas of the economy, rather than the regulatory change merely creating unused capacity on bank balance sheets.</p>
<h2>This Is a Release of Built-Up Protection, Not a Bailout</h2>
<p>The buffer exists to be used. OSFI cut it from 2.25% to 1% in March 2020 as the pandemic threatened a sudden economic shutdown, helping reassure banks that capital could decline while they continued lending. The regulator later rebuilt the buffer as conditions stabilized, raising it to 2.5% in 2021, 3% in early 2023 and 3.5% later that year.</p>
<p>The June 2026 decision is different from an emergency rescue. The banks are profitable, their capital ratios are well above OSFI’s expectation, and the regulator is not supplying public money. Instead, it is reducing one component of the amount banks are expected to keep in reserve. The distinction matters: a bailout responds to an institution that cannot absorb losses on its own, while a buffer release gives healthy institutions more flexibility before stress becomes severe. OSFI is effectively saying that part of the protection accumulated in stronger years can now support measured risk-taking without undermining financial stability.</p>
<h2>The Risks Have Not Disappeared</h2>
<p>OSFI continues to describe financial-system vulnerabilities as elevated. Household debt reached 179.4% of disposable income in the first quarter of 2026, while the household debt-service ratio rose to 14.75%. House prices have declined from their 2022 peak but remain high relative to incomes and economic fundamentals. Corporate debt is also elevated, and trade disruption could weaken companies that depend heavily on U.S. demand or cross-border supply chains.</p>
<p>There are stabilizing signs. The Bank of Canada reported that most mortgage borrowers renewing at higher rates had managed the increase, while OSFI said unemployment, delinquencies and credit losses remained within historically normal ranges and had recently stabilized. Still, a sharp employment downturn, renewed housing weakness, geopolitical escalation or funding-market shock could change the calculation. OSFI reviews the buffer in June and December and can adjust it between scheduled decisions. The next phase will reveal whether banks use the extra room to expand productive lending while preserving enough capital for the risks that remain.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/RBC-plaza-bottom-up-view-976x560-1.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="976" height="560">
        <media:title><![CDATA[RBC-plaza-bottom-up-view-976x560]]></media:title>
        <media:text><![CDATA[RBC-plaza-bottom-up-view-976x560]]></media:text>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/polling-firm-sends-ford-legal-demand-after-he-calls-record-low-approval-survey-fake</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Polling Firm Sends Ford Legal Demand After He Calls Record-Low Approval Survey ‘Fake’]]></title>
      <pubDate>Fri, 19 Jun 26 10:54:28 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/polling-firm-sends-ford-legal-demand-after-he-calls-record-low-approval-survey-fake</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A bruising approval number has turned into something more serious than a routine political argument. After Ontario Premier Doug Ford]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A bruising approval number has turned into something more serious than a routine political argument. After Ontario Premier Doug Ford dismissed Angus Reid Institute’s findings as “fake” and questioned how the organization gathered its data, the non-profit pollster sent his office a legal letter seeking a correction and retraction. The clash now reaches beyond one bad result. It raises questions about how elected leaders respond to unwelcome evidence, how polling methods should be challenged, and where forceful political criticism ends and potential reputational damage begins. Ford remains a proven election winner with a large legislative majority, but the dispute gives new life to concerns about his standing after eight years in power.</p>
<h2>A Legal Demand Raises the Stakes</h2>
<p>Angus Reid Institute confirmed that it sent Ford a legal letter after his public comments about its work. President Shachi Kurl said the organization stands behind its record as an independent, non-partisan research foundation and believes the public record should be corrected. News reports described the letter as demanding a retraction. Ford’s office had not publicly answered questions about the letter when the first reports appeared, leaving it unclear whether the premier would withdraw, clarify or defend his remarks.</p>
<p>The distinction between a legal demand and a lawsuit matters. A letter can warn that a statement is considered damaging and request corrective action without beginning a court case. No court has ruled on Ford’s comments, and Angus Reid said it did not intend to litigate the dispute through the media. Still, the step transformed a passing exchange at a news conference into a formal confrontation. What might otherwise have disappeared after a day of headlines now carries a written demand and a much larger reputational test for both sides.</p>
<h2>The 21 Per Cent Result That Sparked the Fight</h2>
<p>The June findings placed Ford’s approval at 21 per cent, his lowest level in Angus Reid Institute’s tracking since he became premier in 2018. That represented a 10-point decline from the organization’s March 2026 reading of 31 per cent. The detailed Ontario results showed only four per cent strongly approving of his performance and 17 per cent moderately approving. By comparison, 27 per cent moderately disapproved and 45 per cent strongly disapproved, while six per cent were unsure.</p>
<p>Those figures were not drawn from a handful of opposition politicians, as Ford later suggested. Angus Reid reported an Ontario sample of 850 adults within a national study of 4,076 Canadians conducted from June 7 to June 11. It published an estimated Ontario margin of error of plus or minus three percentage points. Even allowing for that range, the result would remain far below Ford’s pandemic-era peak of 69 per cent in 2020 and below his previous low of 28 per cent during the 2023 Greenbelt controversy. The trend, rather than a single percentage point, is what made the release politically damaging.</p>
<h2>Ford’s Public Rejection Went Beyond Ordinary Criticism</h2>
<p>When asked about the result at an event in Thunder Bay, Ford did not simply say that he disagreed with it or preferred another poll. He called it “fake,” claimed the organization polled the NDP and Liberal caucuses, and suggested its researchers had gone into a “hardcore NDP neighbourhood” rather than conducting work across Ontario. He also said his own polling put the Progressive Conservatives at 41 per cent and would produce another “massive majority” if an election were held immediately.</p>
<p>Politicians routinely question sample sizes, wording, timing and whether a poll accurately captures likely voters. Those are normal arguments, especially when different firms produce different numbers. The sharper issue here is that Ford made specific claims about how Angus Reid selected respondents, while the organization’s published methodology described a province-wide sample drawn from its online panel and weighted to census benchmarks. Ford did not publicly provide evidence supporting his description. That gap is central to the dispute: criticism of an interpretation is one thing, but allegations that call a research organization’s methods or professional integrity into question carry greater consequences.</p>
<h2>Inside the Methodology Angus Reid Published</h2>
<p>Angus Reid said respondents were selected from the Angus Reid Forum, an online panel built to include Canadians from all 343 federal ridings. The national sample was weighted by region, gender, age, household income and education using census data. For Ontario, the reported unweighted sample was 850. The institute also disclosed that the work was self-commissioned and paid for internally, rather than sponsored by a political party, government or advocacy group.</p>
<p>Online panels are not flawless, and no responsible pollster claims that one release is an infallible portrait of the electorate. Results can be affected by who joins a panel, who responds, how questions are phrased and how weighting choices are made. Yet online collection has become common as traditional telephone research has grown more difficult amid declining response rates and changing communication habits. The proper test is not whether interviews happened on the internet. It is whether the sample, weighting, questions and limitations are disclosed clearly enough to examine. Angus Reid published those details, allowing critics to challenge the work with evidence rather than speculation.</p>
<h2>Approval and Vote Intention Measure Different Things</h2>
<p>One of the most important facts in the dispute is that a premier’s job approval is not the same as support for the premier’s party. Approval asks whether residents like the job a leader is doing. Vote intention asks which party they would choose in an election. Angus Reid emphasized that distinction in its response to Ford, while Ford answered the 21 per cent approval result by pointing to internal numbers that he said placed the PCs at 41 per cent.</p>
<p>A voter can disapprove of Ford personally and still choose the Progressive Conservatives. Some may prefer the party’s economic policies, distrust the alternatives, vote strategically in a local riding or believe the government remains the least risky option. That pattern has appeared before. Early in the 2025 campaign, Angus Reid found Ford personally unpopular while 43 per cent supported his party. The PCs ultimately received approximately 43 per cent of the provincial vote. Treating approval and ballot preference as interchangeable therefore creates a misleading comparison: both measurements can be accurate at the same time because they ask different questions.</p>
<h2>Ford’s Electoral Position Is Stronger Than 21 Per Cent Suggests</h2>
<p>Ford entered this controversy as the head of a third consecutive majority government, not as a premier facing an immediate confidence vote. In the February 2025 election, the Progressive Conservatives won 80 of the legislature’s 124 seats with just under 43 per cent of the popular vote. The Liberals earned nearly 30 per cent but secured only 14 seats, while the NDP won 27 seats with approximately 18.6 per cent. Overall turnout was roughly 45 per cent.</p>
<p>Those numbers illustrate why personal dissatisfaction does not automatically remove a government. Ontario’s first-past-the-post system rewards the party that finishes first in individual ridings, and the PCs benefited from a divided opposition and efficiently distributed support. Ford can therefore be unpopular with a large share of residents yet remain electorally competitive, particularly if Liberal and NDP voters divide the anti-government vote. The 21 per cent figure is still a warning because leaders facing intense disapproval can become liabilities over time. But it is not a seat forecast, and it does not mean only one-fifth of Ontarians would vote PC in the next campaign.</p>
<h2>The Drop Reflects More Than One Controversy</h2>
<p>Angus Reid linked Ford’s decline to a combination of economic pressure and political setbacks. Its June report pointed to persistent affordability and health-care concerns, projected provincial deficits and backlash over the government’s brief purchase of a $28.9-million Challenger 650 aircraft, which Ford later said would be sold back to Bombardier. The organization’s April Ontario research had already found that 81 per cent rated the government poorly on the cost of living, 79 per cent on health care and 83 per cent on housing affordability.</p>
<p>Those are the kinds of issues that reach households more directly than daily arguments at Queen’s Park. A family waiting for a doctor, a renter facing another increase or a commuter watching grocery and insurance bills climb may judge a government through lived experience rather than party messaging. At the same time, no single poll can prove why every respondent changed their view, and the 10-point quarterly drop should not be assigned to one event with certainty. The safer conclusion is that several pressures were present at once, creating conditions in which an expensive aircraft purchase could become a symbol of broader frustration.</p>
<h2>What Happens Next Will Shape the Story</h2>
<p>Ford now has several possible paths. He could retract the word “fake,” clarify that he was criticizing the result rather than accusing the institute of dishonest conduct, provide evidence for his description of the sample, or refuse to change his position. Angus Reid could accept a correction, continue pressing privately or consider further legal action. As of the first reports, no lawsuit had been announced, the letter itself was not publicly available and the premier’s office had not offered a substantive response.</p>
<p>The larger issue is whether public debate can still distinguish scepticism from dismissal. Polls deserve scrutiny, and news organizations should avoid presenting one set of numbers as unquestionable truth. Good practice is to examine methods, compare several firms and watch trends over time. Political leaders, however, carry a different burden when they accuse an organization of manufacturing evidence. Angus Reid’s same tracker once recorded Ford at 69 per cent approval and later at 48 per cent following the 2025 election. A credible challenge would identify a methodological flaw. Calling an unfavourable result fake without demonstrating one may rally supporters, but it also risks turning a temporary polling problem into a longer fight over trust.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/04/Doug-Ford-–-Premier-of-Ontario.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1600" height="900">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
    <item>
<guid isPermaLink="false">https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/alberta-separatists-ask-court-to-revive-302000-name-breakaway-petition</guid>      <title><![CDATA[Alberta Separatists Ask Court to Revive 302,000-Name Breakaway Petition]]></title>
      <pubDate>Thu, 18 Jun 26 15:08:27 -0400</pubDate>
      <link>https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/blog/alberta-separatists-ask-court-to-revive-302000-name-breakaway-petition</link>
      <dc:creator><![CDATA[Jennifer Lockett]]></dc:creator>
      <media:keywords>Breaking, Breaking News, Top Stories</media:keywords>
      <category><![CDATA[News]]></category>
      <description><![CDATA[A stack of sealed petition boxes has become the centre of one of Alberta’s most consequential legal fights in years.]]></description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>A stack of sealed petition boxes has become the centre of one of Alberta’s most consequential legal fights in years. Stay Free Alberta says nearly 302,000 people signed its demand for a direct vote on leaving Canada, but those names have never been officially verified. After a Court of King’s Bench judge cancelled the petition in May, the separatist group returned to court seeking a stay that would let Elections Alberta begin counting while a broader appeal proceeds.</p>
<p>The dispute is no longer only about whether enough signatures were gathered. It now reaches into treaty rights, the limits of citizen-led democracy, the provincial government’s duty to consult First Nations and the constitutional rules governing secession. Whatever the appeal court decides, Alberta is already headed toward a different referendum on October 19, ensuring the province’s place in Canada will remain a live political question.</p>
<h2>A Court Fight Over What Happens to the Boxes</h2>
<p>The immediate request before the Alberta Court of Appeal is narrower than the full constitutional battle. Stay Free Alberta’s lawyer, Jeff Rath, is asking for a stay of Justice Shaina Leonard’s May ruling so Elections Alberta can open the sealed boxes and verify the petition. The group says it submitted almost 302,000 names, far above the 177,732 signatures required under the current citizen-initiative formula. Until verification occurs, however, that total remains an organizer’s claim rather than an official result.</p>
<p>That distinction matters. Elections Alberta has stored the petition sheets in locked cabinets under continuous security since they were delivered on May 4. The agency says it cannot begin its 21-day verification process unless the court permits it. For volunteers who spent four months gathering signatures across the province, the boxes represent a major organizing achievement. For the First Nations challenging the process, opening them would allow an initiative they argue was unlawfully approved to advance before the larger appeal is resolved.</p>
<h2>How the Petition Reached Nearly 302,000 Claimed Names</h2>
<p>The petition began with a blunt question: whether Alberta should cease to be part of Canada and become an independent state. Elections Alberta approved the application on January 2, 2026, and the 120-day collection period ran from January 3 through May 2. Proponent Mitch Sylvestre and Stay Free Alberta then delivered the signatures on the next business day, accompanied by supporters carrying boxes and waving Alberta flags.</p>
<p>Organizers portrayed the claimed total as evidence that separatist sentiment had moved beyond the political fringe. Yet a signature on a petition is not necessarily the same as a vote for independence. Some people may sign because they want a debate, a referendum or greater leverage against Ottawa without supporting separation itself. That gap is important because the petition’s purpose was procedural: enough valid signatures would require the proposal to move through Alberta’s referendum system. It would not, by itself, settle the province’s future or establish how the signatories would vote during a provincewide campaign.</p>
<h2>Why the Petition Was Quashed</h2>
<p>Justice Leonard cancelled the petition on May 13, finding that it should not have been issued under provincial law and that Alberta had failed to meet its constitutional duty to consult affected First Nations. The court concluded that a successful petition would set in motion a referendum process with serious potential consequences for treaty rights. It also found problems with the way the separatist proposal was revived after an earlier version had been rejected before Alberta amended its citizen-initiative legislation.</p>
<p>The ruling therefore rested on more than a disagreement over political speech. Leonard treated the decision to authorize the petition as an administrative act with real legal consequences, not merely an invitation to public discussion. She also interpreted the Citizen Initiative Act and Referendum Act together as making a successful direct referendum binding on the provincial government. That reading is central to the appeal. If higher courts agree, consultation obligations may arise at an early stage. If they reject it, the province may have wider room to permit petitions before addressing their constitutional consequences later.</p>
<h2>What Separatists Want the Appeal Court to Do</h2>
<p>Stay Free Alberta is pursuing two related tracks: an appeal of Leonard’s decision and an interim stay that would revive verification while that appeal is pending. The Alberta government has filed its own appeal, saying the judge made 14 errors. Both challengers argue, in different ways, that issuing a petition did not itself trigger the duty to consult and that the court gave too little weight to the democratic purpose of the citizen-initiative process.</p>
<p>The appeals also dispute the lower court’s interpretation of legislation passed in December 2025, which allowed the separatist organizers to submit a new application after their first attempt failed. The province says the judge misread those provisions and wrongly treated the proposed referendum as automatically binding. Stay Free Alberta has additionally raised concerns about procedural fairness and the appearance of impartiality. None of those claims has been finally accepted by an appeal court. The stay hearing concerns what may happen in the meantime, while the broader legal questions remain unsettled.</p>
<h2>Treaty Rights Sit at the Centre</h2>
<p>The legal challenge was brought by Athabasca Chipewyan First Nation and the Blackfoot Nations, including Piikani Nation, Siksika Nation and the Blood Tribe. Their position is that Alberta cannot begin a process capable of changing the constitutional status of treaty lands without meaningful consultation. Treaties 7 and 8 predate the creation of Alberta, and their rights are constitutionally protected. The lower court accepted that secession would plainly have consequences for those agreements and the peoples who rely on them.</p>
<p>This is why the dispute cannot be reduced to a simple contest between petition signers and judges. First Nations are not merely another interest group in the debate; they are rights-holders with constitutional relationships to the Crown. Their leaders have argued that Alberta cannot treat treaty territory as though it belongs exclusively to the province and can be carried out of Canada by a provincial majority. Separatist organizers counter that consultation is being invoked too early, before any referendum result or negotiation. The appeal will help determine where that constitutional obligation begins.</p>
<h2>Alberta’s Rule Changes Reshaped the Path</h2>
<p>Alberta’s citizen-initiative system changed substantially in 2025. Amendments that took effect July 4 lengthened the time available to collect signatures and reduced the threshold for newer petitions. Under the revised formula, the independence campaign needed 177,732 valid signatures, equal to 10 per cent of the votes cast in the previous provincial election. That was considerably lower than the 293,976 signatures required for the earlier Alberta Forever Canada petition under the former rules.</p>
<p>The difference changed the practical politics of direct democracy. A campaign no longer needed support from roughly one-tenth of all registered electors; it needed one-tenth of the people who had voted in the last election. Supporters saw the reform as making citizen initiatives attainable instead of theoretical. Critics argued it made it easier to force provincewide attention onto divisive constitutional questions. The courts must now decide how those statutory changes interact with duties the province cannot remove through ordinary legislation, including the honour of the Crown and consultation with Indigenous peoples.</p>
<h2>Verification Is Still a Major Hurdle</h2>
<p>Even if the stay is granted, the petition would not automatically succeed. Elections Alberta says it will validate signatures and canvasser witness statements, remove duplicates and use a statistically valid process designed to reach 95 per cent confidence. People selected for confirmation who do not verify their information are counted against the petition total. The claimed cushion of more than 124,000 names is large, but only the official process can determine how many meet every legal requirement.</p>
<p>The agency has also added an unusual integrity check. It plans to test the petition against seeded names placed in a copy of the voters list obtained by the Republican Party of Alberta. If those markers appear, Elections Alberta says the petition will receive further scrutiny. The electoral office has stressed that it cannot alter documents after submission and that any anomalies could lead to additional verification steps. In other words, the current court fight is only the gateway to the count. It is not a ruling that 302,000 valid Alberta electors signed.</p>
<h2>Smith Created a Second Route to a Vote</h2>
<p>Premier Danielle Smith responded to the May ruling by announcing a different referendum question for October 19. Instead of asking Albertans to leave Canada immediately, the government’s question asks whether Alberta should remain a province or begin the legal process required to hold a later, binding referendum on separation. Smith says she supports remaining in Canada but argues that both separatist and pro-Canada petition signers deserve a public vote.</p>
<p>The alternative route draws heavily on two competing campaigns. Elections Alberta verified 404,293 signatures on Thomas Lukaszuk’s Alberta Forever Canada petition, while Stay Free Alberta claims almost 302,000 unverified names. Smith has cited the roughly 700,000 combined signatories as evidence that the issue cannot simply be ignored. Separatists, however, describe the October question as a “referendum on a referendum” that delays the direct choice they sought. The result is a political paradox: the court case could revive the original petition even as the government prepares a separate ballot designed to work around the ruling.</p>
<h2>A Referendum Would Not Equal Independence</h2>
<p>Canadian constitutional law does not allow a province to leave the country unilaterally. The Supreme Court’s 1998 Quebec Secession Reference held that a clear majority on a clear question could create an obligation for governments to negotiate, but it would not produce automatic independence. Those negotiations would have to reconcile federalism, democracy, constitutionalism, minority rights and the interests of Indigenous peoples. Major issues such as borders, debt, assets, citizenship and treaty relationships would remain unresolved.</p>
<p>The federal Clarity Act adds another layer. The House of Commons must assess whether a proposed secession question is clear and, after a vote, whether the majority is sufficiently clear in light of the result, turnout and other circumstances. The law specifically requires consideration of views expressed by representatives of Indigenous peoples. That means even a successful Alberta referendum would mark the beginning of a long constitutional process, not the end of one. The appeal over petition verification is important, but it remains several legal steps removed from the creation of an independent state.</p>
<h2>The Numbers Reveal a Divided Province</h2>
<p>The petition’s claimed strength sits beside polling that still shows a majority opposed to beginning the separation process. An Angus Reid Institute survey conducted in May found 35 per cent support for the government’s proposed path toward a future binding referendum, while 60 per cent opposed it. When respondents were asked a simpler stay-or-leave question, 67 per cent chose to remain in Canada and 30 per cent supported leaving.</p>
<p>Those figures help explain why every side is fighting so hard over process and wording. Separatists can point to hundreds of thousands of claimed signatures and persistent frustration with Ottawa. Federalists can point to a larger verified unity petition and polling that favours remaining in Canada. First Nations insist that neither side can settle treaty questions through a simple provincial head count. The Court of Appeal’s decision on the stay will determine whether the 302,000-name petition receives an official count. It will not resolve the deeper argument over who gets to decide Alberta’s future, under what rules and with whose consent.</p>
]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <media:content url="https://www.hashtaginvesting.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/01/Alberta.jpg" type="image/jpeg" medium="image" width="1000" height="666">
        <media:credit><![CDATA[Image Credit: Shutterstock]]></media:credit>
        <mi:hasSyndicationRights>1</mi:hasSyndicationRights>
      </media:content>
    </item>
</channel>
</rss>